Home

HP LaserJet 5Si Family Printers Service Manual, C4077

1. Rear and Left Side View 058 2 HP Laser et 5Si 5Si M X N X Optional Paper Handling Accessories ee a Sample 5 Page Coverage 1 oo Printer Space Requirements Control Panel Layout PCL Configuration Page PCL Menu MapPade o o Image Area Margins o eee ees Tray 2 3 Position Adjustment Tray 4 Position Adjustment Printer Functional Block Diagram Low Voltage Power Distribution System Low Voltage Power Supply High Voltage Power Supply contacts Normal ModevsEconoMode Image Formation Block Diagram PhotosensitiveDrUM a DruMCleaninQ celles Primary Charging Roller Image Writing Image Development Image Transferring and Media Separation ImageFusing o tiera ee Printer Paper Paths 0 00004 eee Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper Path 2000 Sheet nput Unit Sensors Switches Clutches andMotors enn Multi Bin Mailbox Paper Paths Multi Bin Mailbox Mialbox With Stapler Sensors andMotors lens Stapling Unit Paper Paths ls Stapler Sensors and Moto
2. 8 24 Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox with Stapler Components 2 of 3 8 26 Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox with Stapler Components 3 of 3 aoaaa a a 8 28 Stapling Unit Internal Components 8 30 Parallel Cable Pin Assignments C2951A B 2 Connecting tothe END of aLocalTalk Network B 3 Connecting to the MIDDLE of a LocalTalk Network 1 of 2 B 4 Connecting to the MIDDLE of a LocalTalk Network 2 of 2 B 4 I O Connector Locations 0 0000 eae B 5 VCCI Statement Japan 0 C 4 List of Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 6 1 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Printer Features conc o oou x o a Tray 1 Media Guidelines Tray 2 Media Guidelines lll Tray 3 Media Guidelines Tray 4 Media Guidelines eee Printer Dimensions nn Electrical Specifications AcousticEmissions Accessories and Options Minimum Memory Requirements
3. 3 6 Heavy Media Fuser Mode Explanation 3 8 Setting the Fuser Mode Using PJ L Command 3 9 Control Panel Menus a 3 10 Wray Vene 2246288428 tbe raras 3 12 JobControlMenu 2 a 3 13 TESTER IT 3 14 Configuration Menu 4 2 3 15 Print Quality Menu o a 3 17 PostScript Menu www 2 e 3 17 PELIN erara E 3 18 I O Menu 2 ohh oy a ohio s 3 19 MIOIand2Menus oen n 3 20 Service Mode llle eon s 3 21 Setting Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number 3 23 Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size 3 24 PONES VO zoe eee X 309 asas 3 24 Testing the Printer 222 5 3 25 PCL Configuration Page clle 3 25 PaperPathTest rera tsai 3 25 Solski ue xo been ea eee ee ss cO 3 30 Operating Overview 3 1 3 2 Operating Overview Figure 3 1 Table 3 1 Using the Control Panel Control Panel Layout The control panel consists of a 2 line 20 character per line display panel five keys and three indicator lights Control Panel Layout Control Panel Keys owitches the state of communication between computer and printer to ON on line or OFF off line Stops printing when memory clears Menus Provides a menu system for obtaining status information or changing th
4. es a Ho hm ts T E Mu eu ul VE UM er rad AAN A i Formatter Assembly Caution The Heavy Media C3124A 5Si HM has a Thermal Control PCA and wiring harness The Thermal Control PCA is located in a SIMM slot on the formatter and must be removed and reinstalled on the replacement formatter The formatter PCB is unique for the C3124A See the parts section for correct ordering 6 38 Removal and Replacement Setti ng Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number The page count maintenance count and printer serial numbers are stored in Non Volatile Memory PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer MAI NTCOUNT is the pagecount when the next preventive maintenance should be performed every 350 000 images 250 000 images with HP Laser et 5Si Heavy Media printers and 5 N is the printer serial number also located on the printer back cover If itis necessary to replace the F ormatter PCA these numbers should be set tothe current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine The procedures for setting these values are listed in Table 3 15 Before removing the old Formatter PCA print a PCL or PostScript Configuration Page to verify the current values if possible Note If itis not possibleto print a PCL Configuration Page try to verify the values before replacing the F ormatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3 below After verifying the page count mainten
5. Related Documentation Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions Control Panel Keys Indicator Lights cll Factory Default Settings Initial Fuser Mode Recommendation Control Panel MenuMap sn TrayMenultems cnn J ob Control Menu Items Test Menu Items aaa ee Configuration Menultems Print Quality Menu Items PostScript Menu Items PCL Menultems I O Menu ItemS enn n MIOland2MenulteMS Service Mode Menu Items KeytoFigure3 2 enn Key to Figure 3 3 Lx ox oe o o3 3o Rom X Se oe we x Cleaning the Printer Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans 2000 Sheet Input Unit Sensors Switches Clutches and Motors eee eee ees 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper Quantity Switches 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper SizeSwitches MBM MwS Sensors Switches and Motors Stapling Unit Sensors Switches and Motors Major Assemblies and Subassemblies of the Stapler Paper Size Switches Printer Timing nnns HardwareTable Power On 1 hh oos dH arrasar Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Tab
6. Remove the toner cartridge Remove the top cover see Figure 6 8 Unplug three cable connectors Figure 6 26 callout 1 Reroute the cable running across the top of the assembly so that it is out of the way Caution Do not touch the scanner mirror located under the forward edge of the assembly Use approved ESD handling procedures when touching the Beam Detect PCA UN HB 5 Remove 4 screws CH 105 Figure 6 26 callout 2 To Reinstall Make sure that the locator pins are properly seated Figure 6 26 Laser Scanner Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 41 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Main Gear Assembly 1 Removethe following components in the order listed e Toner Cartridge e ray 1 Tray 2 Transfer Roller Assembly see Figure 6 51 Back Cover Assembly see Figure 6 4 Tray 1 Assembly see Figure 6 52 Right Lower Door Assembly see Figure 6 14 Paper Input Unit see Figure 6 31 HVPS seeFigure 6 40 Main Motor seeFigure 6 30 2 Remove 2 screws CH 102 Figure 6 27 callout 1 Caution Be careful not to damage the plastic gears when removing the Main Gear Assembly Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help free the Main Gear Assembly from the printer 3 Frominside of the PIU cavity carefully tilt the bottom of the Main Gear Assembly away from the chassis and down to free the gear mechanisms To Reinstall Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help install the Main Gear Assembly as
7. ee 6 64 Tray LASSAMDIV ut e Be eee A drm edge E NA Ge 6 65 Tray 2 3 Assemblies 4 6 66 Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit cler 6 67 back COVEN satus seh Seve 79e d tae cec EXE ur ed TR dic eum de deep qe EIUS 6 67 he GOVE dos diuo dn X veas aue ue vod Me Noo Vv d lade Nx M xa 6 68 RIG C OUO e sura mot e of arida Bow o a Erde BU see DECR URP EP ae 5 6 69 Main Drive Assembly 2 5 6 70 Paper FAY 55 vob dde EA A a e ES es 6 71 PEA CONTO al a ia ais ee r 6 72 Pickup Assembly aaa aa CR Ue a e db a ee ad 6 73 POWOI SUDDIV C cdo dicitis Once cai dede Sec qe diode dede oma Ge A rd 6 75 Rollers Pickup Feed and Separation css 6 76 Switch Assembly Paper Quality nonoo 6 77 Switch Assembly Paper Size 6 77 Switch Assembly Lifter Sensing 6 78 Transfer Assembly ellen 6 78 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 6 80 E SA ua II NR 6 80 Delivery Head Assembly 6 81 Flipper Assembly rns 6 83 aput P abper Guide i us oe Nox dod 9 Aves ue donc BR eie e SE X 6 85 IDterlocK SWIC ui opua e CE ay al ec Yo e De 7 A ee e Be 6 86 J am Access Door Assembly ler 6 87 Lower Elevator Pulley Assemblies 6 90 Metallic Tape and Housing Assembly css 6 92
8. PS Bl N EMPTY EXIT 2 HEAD POSITION EXIT 1 EJ ECT PS PS BIN FULL PS PS Multi Bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram 1 Tx 3 Rx 4 TERM OUT 6 CLOCK 12 STROBE 13 POWER ON IN 2 7 8 11 GND 24V 1 Tx 3 Rx 4 TERM IN 6 CLOCK 19 STROBE 43 POWER ON OUT 2 7 8 11 CNP NO CONNECTION Figure 7 40 Two dots Reserve device connector in CLink One dot Next device connector in CLink RETAINER MOTOR DC B Stapling Unit Controller PCA Main Wiring Diagram Vcc STAPLING UNIT C MI CONTROLLER i PCA Vcc Im i Vcc 24V J5 J4 MORE pl DE ay NO RETAINER CONNECTION HOME SENSOR A SECURITY SWITCHES STAPLE OUT STAPLER HOT STAPLER DC MOTOR RACK MOTOR RACK SENSOR THROAT SENSOR SLIDER MOTOR SLIDER SENSOR BIN FUL SENSOR INPUT SENSOR Troubleshooting 7 99 Dunoousoe qnoJ L 7 100 Troubleshooting Parts and Diagrams Chapter Contents How toUsethePart Lists and Diagrams 8 3 Ordering Parts eres 8 3 Accessories and Supplies rrr 8 4 Common Hardware a 8 4 Illustrations and Parts Lists lll eee 8 5 Parts and Diagrams 8 1 8 2 Parts and Diagrams How to Usethe Part Lists and Diagrams Thefigures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts A table material list follows each exploded assembly di
9. Do jams only occur when See Verification Section of this chapter and use Paper Path Test to paper is output to a specific isolate problem Note Multi Bin Mailbox and Stapler are not output bin e g face down supported with the HP LaserJet 5Si HM C31244 output bin face up bin mailbox bin duplex operation stapler Do paper jams occur with a Try known good media See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper specific type of media Specifications Guide Note that the guide is bundled with the Service Manual Where does the leading Attempt to duplicate See Verification Section of this chapter and edge of the first sheet of use Paper Path Test Inspect the paper path and all paper path paper in the printer s paper mechanical assemblies prior to the leading paper jam path stop when a jam occurs Are any sheets of paper physically damaged or torn Is the customer loading the Observe customer loading paper Do not fan paper Refer to proper paper trays correctly paper handling procedures in the Paper Specification Guide Is the customer overfilling Ensure paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in the paper the paper trays trays Observe customer loading paper in trays Are the paper tray guides Ensure Tray 2 and 3 left side paper fence is set correctly at both set correctly the front and rear of the tray and that the front fence is locked into the correct position For Tray 4 ensure all adjustments are set correct
10. If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter PCA the printer returns to the INTR period If not it returns to the STBY period 5 40 Functional Overview Functional Overview Seq eDeyoA uDi Seq 19 02 Buisn add oz o nH e N S Oc seiq ebed ueemieg sei uuid seig abed ueemieg Seq eneben SEIQ jOjeuiuije e6Jeuo ones 7 8i L SSA WN TAA R Ze A SS ebeyo saysues ei 90 seiq Buidoyanag Ov Seq 6uidoje eg 90 eBmyo Aieuug S g i L L El el L L Ov a eyoa Areuug cOt Sd Josuas Alaayjap Ke UMOp 208 4 i EOF iSd s0Sues Ajewjop yun Buisny e 0 LLNS 200w dN 4914 d LLN 200W UIEN S uone peeds m07 RASS AZ DBE Cow SAAN O SOON EOS o EE ouo 3081 A8IS spuooes Hun uogelio peeds uDiuj i Sa D bi XS 4d LS NO U9IIMS J6MOd Asaaijeap Aes UMOp 928J P39 y sses 19401 Jaded eJuozIJOy py uo sjuud eAnnoesuoo OM 10J eya Bulut e General Timing Diagram 1 of 2 for LJ 5Si 5Si MX Figure 5 22 Functional Overview 5 41 SS A 0 00 ER AAA mem menn I LZSd Josuas saded yun Buixaydng 3 22Sd Josuas YORQUOUMS a S07 Gd Josues AUealap pun Buisn4 A a UONBIOJ PIIAS MO LEALES IAS ISS SS SID 23 SOS SOS S33SS SS O gt SS S EASY TT jo1uoo 2 691 0109 2 081 jQuuco A wx
11. 1 With the printer turned OFF and unplugged slide the Envelope F eeder up and out of the printer Removal and Replacement 6 11 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay External Paper Handling Controller 1 With the printer turned OFF and the power cable unplugged disconnect all interface cables from the F ormatter Assembly 2 Loosen 2 captive screws and remove the Formatter Assembly Remove MIO card No 2 if installed 3 Unplug theribbon cable connector 1 remove the connector mounting screws 2 and lift the PCA dear of the Formatter Assembly 3 6 12 Removal and Replacement Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit 1 With the printer turned OFF and the power cable unplugged disconnect all interface cables from the F ormatter Assembly and from Tray 4 WARNING The printer weighs approximately 100 pounds Useat least four peopleto lift it 2 Lift the printer dear of theTray 4 assembly and place it on a smooth sturdy surface To Reinstall 3 Match thelocater pins as illustrated in step 3 4 Make surethat the printer is aligned on all corners Removal and Replacement 6 13 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 1 1 hy y 6 14 Removal and Replacement With the printer turned OFF and unplugged disconnect the power and interface cables from the Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox With Stapler controller PCA Carefully slide the Multi Bin
12. O olcigo gt o uijc 5 10 o lolo o 3 8 gt lt o 5 z S a9 Parts Index A 7 Xopu Sued V Table A 1 PSU Cable small Rear Cover Registration Assembly Registration Cable Right Cover Right Cover Right Cover Assembly Right Lower Cover Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal Screw CT M3X3 Screw CT M3X3 ing M4X8 Screw tapping pan head M4X10 Screw tapping truss head M3X8 Screw Torx T20 M4X10 Screw Torx T20 M4X10 Screw Torx T20 M4X12 Screw Torx T20 tapping M4X10 Screw TP M3X6 Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder A 8 Parts Index Alphabetical Parts List continued Product Part No RF5 1427 000CN Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued crew w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN CH105 crew w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN CH105 Sensor Arm PS1 RB1 6417 000CN 8 04D Sensor Arm PS2 RB1 6557 000CN 8 04E RB 8 04D 8 04E bh I O ER e ks O O O O Z on poaae o EEN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and lock washer XA9 0547 000CN Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and lock washer XA9 0547 000CN Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 606CN Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 607CN Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 606CN Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 607CN Chos CHI05 EE GN a o O 8 JJ E D Oi Oi Ki e e O Z 8 04D 8 04E oo J D QIO
13. Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge Removethe Transfer Roller Assembly see Figure 6 51 Remove the Registration Assembly see Figure 6 42 Unplug the sensor cable at the right side of the Feeder Assembly Figure 6 22 callout 1 Remove 2 screws CH 102 at the front of the Feeder Assembly Figure 6 22 callout 2 Remove 1 screw CH 101 at the back of the F eeder Assembly Figure 6 23 Removing the High Voltage Power Supply is recommended to ease the removal of the Feeder Assembly primarily because of the contact points Release 4 plastic retaining tabs by moving them in the directions indicated in Figure 6 23 while carefully lifting upwards on the F eeder Assembly Remove the F eeder Assembly by lifting it upwards out of the Toner Cartridge cavity To Reinstall Make sure that the plastic retaining tabs are all properly seated before replacing the screws 6 36 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement 6 37 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Formatter Assembly 1 If the Formatter is to be replaced make sure to note the page count 2 Loosen the two captive screws Figure 6 24 callout 1 and slide the Formatter PCA out of the chassis 3 After installation of a replacement F ormatter be sure to re enter the serial number page count and maintenance count Seethe following instructions for more information Figure 6 24 LIE ME TULIT ll la a gm Tin e
14. 17953 PRINTER P DLO NOT ATIOMATICALOY EJECT FAFER 17342 A STIDLEDG TUAN AROUSA PAPER LATE JAM 1734 7 4 5IDED Tikit ABZ JLNL PACER LATE JAM I734 EXTIZBMAL OCTMIT DEVICE PALER E 173940 EXRTEEMAL IEROT DEVICE TAPER 173940 EXTZEMAL IRPBUT DEVICE FRFPER TAM lis FUSER CPTTB T PAPER STOPPED TAM 4 17340 OLA DEVICE PATER CAM 17940 z OCTFUT DEVZILE PAPER hM i754D OUTIIT DEVICE PADIR AM 17542 Z OOCTRIT DEVICE PAJER ya 17542 OOTHMIT DEVICE PAPER AM 11415 Z JOTFUT LEJ ILE PAPER JAM 21 g 8 7 a 3 4 4 z 1 Error Log Page To interpret the error log e Each individual entry in the log is called an ERROR with all errors occurring at the same page count an EVENT Read the Recommended Action for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what took place during that event Events usually conclude with a timeout or no response from device Error 66 nn nn in printer logs which requires a power cycle of the print engine e t is assumed that any Paper Handling Devices are connected as shown in the C Link Cable Diagram Figure 7 7 Theerrors will belogged with different device numbers if any non standard cabling is installed e Usetheerror log tablein the Reference section of this chapter to associate errors in the error log with the Control Panel error message Follow the Recommended Action listed in the table for each error or event 7 18 Troubleshooting Figure 7 9 Communication Ask the customer
15. 7 4 HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier Troubleshooting Process 7 5 Fan Location and Airflow 7 7 Engine Test Button a 7 8 Configuration PageExample 7 12 Menu PageExample 7 13 Communications Link C Link Cables Supported Daisy Chain Connections els 7 14 Err Od aO a a bra oe m di Sir eh ioe deer 7 18 MIO Block on Configuration Page 7 19 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection 7 22 Clearing StaplejaMS 7 25 Scanbar and MBM Interlock Switch SW1 7 25 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 7 27 Tray 2and Tray 3 2 Paper Out Flags 7 33 Vertical Transfer Door Closed Sensor PS35 7 33 Sensor Flag Locations Along the Paper Path 7 36 Flipper Assembly and Paper Sensor Flags Multi BinMailbox a 7 43 Paper Sensor Exit eee ee ee ee 7 43 Mailbox Motor and Encoder Disk callout 1 7 45 SLAVS EDIT e dec o do OECD a cie E Tea D a a 7 45 Delivery Head Exit Roller 7 57 Multi Bin Mailbox 7 57 Tray 4 CAVIty u 3weossd X Ue ow x X de a EE Ew 3 7 60 Tray EIE CODES od Ga c cuoc de ce t can 7 60 Repetitive Defect Ruler 7 73 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 7 76 Paper Path am Locations 7 78 Printer Sensors and Swi
16. Formatter Assembly Formatter Assembly Heavy Media RB1 6495 000CN TY TI TI Tl O O JOIO 5315315 3 cR e D JIOIO ct ololo T JAE a 2 o 1d D 3 o lt A 4 Parts Index Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued bec mewemew EIC 5 JIDDI D uvillig TITIO OIO ja 9 o9 o o o ololc oleis OlOolo Ololo zZzZiziz Hinges Set of C3766 60506 03 Kit Metallic Tape Housing C3764 67900 not shown Kit Hardware C3764 67901 not shown C3764 67902 not shown C3764 67903 not shown C3764 67904 not shown 3764 67905 not shown C3766 60511 not shown z 00 e J et t m 2 2 2 5 Ss jojo 2 S o 3 8 z g 8 S jo slol z lt Ss po o Dizxlo ES DIO l gt ollm 3 O O o D OJO 05 N D T D N o e e J Kit Plastic staple cover bin full sensor actuator and flag next bin full sensor actuator and flag scan bar Kit T10 Torx screws 10 JJ 09 ik co Oi d o e e O Z Label Operation Special Order Parts Index A 5 Xopu Sued V Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued Product Part No Fig RG5 1895 000CN J Metallic Tape and Housing Assy Mounting Shaft e Clip Multi Bin Mailbox Controller PCA 8 09 HB1 6484 000CN 8 02 0 lzlz JEJE Slol amp o s 9 Co o 9 UJ olal e D A a o Liter Sensing Switch SW31 Ras 25460000N s0 6 Maintenance Kit
17. Go to Step 5 Figure 7 2 Error Log Have you evaluated the error log A Print and evaluate the error log B After evaluating the error log Go to Step 6 Can the customer print successfully from their system A Run a print job from the customer host system B After successful completion of the print job Go to Step 7 Verification Does the printer pass the verification tests A Run a paper path test to verify operation B Run a print job from the customer host system HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier Troubleshooting Process Troubleshooting 7 5 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 1 7 6 Troubleshooting Power On Overview It is important to have the printer s Control Panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer s diagnostics can assist in locating printer errors Power On Problem 1 Is AC power available at the printer s power receptacle 2 Is the printer s ON OFF switch set to ON 3 Are the printer s fans on Ensure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode See Figure 7 3 to locate the fans Verify See Table 1 7 Push the switch to the ON position Note Fan operation is significant since all fans are controlled by the printer s DC Controller PCA Operational fans indicate AC power is present in the printer DC power supply is functional both 24vdc and 5vdc are being generated DC Controller
18. Image Development Funcional Overview 5 17 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Figure 5 12 Image Transferring and Media Separation During the image transferring process the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the media A positive charge applied to the back of the media by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged toner particles on the drum surface to be attracted to the media The small diameter of the drum combined with the stiffness of the media cause the media to separate easily from the drum The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum The static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and the positively charged paper This action keeps thin media from wrapping around the drum After separation the drum is deaned and conditioned for the next image Static charge Transfer charging eliminator roller DC bias E Image Transferring and Media Separation 5 18 Functional Overview Figure 5 13 Image Fusing TheFusing Assembly bonds the toner particles into the media with a heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller There are two levers on the Fusing Assembly which adjust roller pressure for single sheets down position or envelopes up position Both levers must be set tothe same position The fusing roller contains two quartz halogen lamps that provide heat for the fusing process Fusing temperature is monitored by t
19. Mailbox M ailbox With Stapler away from the printer until the locator tabs and the lower guide rail are dear To Reinstall Make sure that the lower guide rail and the locator tabs are aligned and that the dot pattern on the PCA connector and cable connector match Make sure that the Interlock Switch is fully depressed To connect the power cables for the Mailbox with Stapler only Attach the top longest section of the 3 way power adapter to the power connector on the back side of the print engine Attach the middle section of the 3 way power adapter to the power connector on the back side of the 2000 Sheet Input Tray Attach the bottom section of the 3 way power adapter to one end of the power supply box Attach the other end of the power supply box to the power connector at the bottom of the mailbox Connect the single section of the 3 way power adapter to the power cords Connect the power cord to a grounded power outlet Note Table 6 1 Part Number Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder XA9 0267 000CN General Metal to metal Hardware Table The screws listed in Table 6 1 are also listed in Chapter 8 with their respective assemblies Hardware Table Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and XA9 0547 000CN General Plastic over metal lock washer Screw M4X8 XB6 7400 807CN Main Motor Screw CT M3X3 XB5 6303 007CN Fan 1 Fan 2 Screw w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN Laser Scanner Screw tapping truss h
20. Refer to the General Paper Path Troubleshooting Verify movement is not hindered in any of the Paper Jam sensor flags see Figure 7 13 PS31 in the Transfer Door PS32 in the Transfer Door PS2 at the paper input slot PS1 at the Registration Assembly PS1403 Fusing Exit PS1402 Face Down Delivery PSEntry Flipper Assembly of Multi Bin MailBox Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the specific paper path if possible e g Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 or the Duplex paper path To view the Tray 3 paper path remove Tray 2 and view pickup rollers through the tray 2 cavity To view the Tray 2 paper path remove the duplex option if installed and view the Tray 2 pickup rollers through the Front Duplex Paper Jam access door For Tray 1 view pickup roller at Tray 1 For Tray 4 override the Transfer Door interlock PS35 refer to Figure 7 12 and watch the pickup roller as paper is being fed The Duplex paper path can be viewed by removing Tray 3 and opening the Front Duplex Paper Jam access door Table 7 5 Message 13 x PAPER JAM Continued Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Printer Engine Specific Paper Jams 0 Non Specific paper jam 1 PAPER FEED 1 PAPER LATE JAM Paper late arriving at PS2 2 PAPER FEED 2 PAPER LATE JAM Paper late arriving at PS1 3 FUSER OUTPUT PAPER LATE JAM Paper late arriving at PS1403 4 FUSER OUTPUT PAPER STOPPED
21. While Hewlett Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges and non HP staple cartridges during the warranty period or while under a maintenance contract their use is not supported for the following reasons Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges and non HP staple cartridges are not covered under the H ewlett P ackard warranty or maintenance contract Hewlett Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge or non HP staple cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new HP Laser et toner cartridge or HP Laser et staple cartridge Also Hewlett Packard cannot predict the long term reliability effect on the printer when using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges The print quality of HP Laser et toner cartridges influences the customer s perception of the printer Hewlett Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge Recycling Toner Cartridges In order to reduce waste Hewlett Packard utilizes a recycling program for used toner cartridges Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled as are plastics and other materials Hewlett Packard pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant For each cartridge returned HP donates one U S dollar to be shared by the Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation To join this recycling effort follow the instructions inside the t
22. edO MOINIDA Dui Tray Menu Table 3 6 Tray Menu Items Tray Menu Items Item Choices Action Required EEES Press ltem to display alternate menu items Press to display alternate choice Press Select to activate choice ENV FEEDER SIZES Press ltem to display alternate menu items Press to display alternate choice Press Select to activate choice TRAY 1 TYPE Press ltem to display alternate menu items TRAY 2 TYPE PREPRI NTED Press to display alternate choice TRAY 3 TYPE LETTERHEAD Press Select to activate choice in Ti 2 TRAY 4 TYPE not in Trays 2 or 3 not in Trays 2 or 3 not in Trays 2 or 3 RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK notin Trays 2 or 3 TRAY 1 SIZE Press ltem to display alternate menu items Press to display alternate choice Press Select to activate choice EXECUTI VE 11 X 17 Asterisk indicates printer default Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated 3 12 Operating Overview Table 3 7 J ob Control Menu The items available in the J ob Control Menu can also be changed through software applications if an appropriate printer driver is installed Job Control Menu Items Job Control Menu Items Item Choices Action Required CANCEL OB PRESS SELECT TO FORMFEED None Press ltem to display alternate menu items Press Select to cancel Job Printer displays STOPPI NG CHECK LAST PAGE When printer stops
23. pl Cold Reset Cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults except Service M ode settings back to the factory settings Performing a cold reset resets the J etDirect configuration To avoid making changes to your configuration remove the J eDirect card before performing a cold reset If possible print a PCL and a PostScript Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset This will document current settings for later reference To perform a cold reset Turn the printer OFF While holding the On Line key down turn the printer ON RESTORING FACTORY SETTI NGS appears briefly on the display then NTERNAL TEST appears After about 30 seconds RESTORI NG FACTORY SETTINGS again appears on the display followed by READY TheOn Lineindicator also illuminates The cold reset is now complete 3 30 Operating Overview Maintenance and Adjustments Chapter Contents Cleaning the Printer and Accessories 4 3 Cleaning the Printer 1 0 ee 4 4 Cleaning Spilled Toner ee ee nn 4 5 Preventative Maintenance 4 6 Tray 2 and 3 Adjustment Procedure 4 7 Tray 4 Adjustment Procedure ee 4 9 Maintenance and Adjustments 4 1 4 2 Maintenance and Adjustments WARNING Caution Cleaning the Printer and Accessories To maintain the print quality and paper performance thoroughly de
24. 10 Com 10 Portrait 105 x 241 mm bond 105 g m5 Envelope C5 6 4 x 9 0 in Portrait 136 x 231 mm Envelope DL 4 3 x 8 7 in Portrait 109 x 218 mm Envelope Monarch 3 9 x 7 5 in and B5 Portrait 99 x 191 mm 1 4 Product Information Table 1 2 Tray 1 Media Guidelines continued Media Type Weight Capacity Feed Orientation Envelope B5 6 93 x 9 84 in Should not exceed 28 lb Up to 10 at one time Portrait 176 x 250 mm bond 105 g m Post Card 2X 5 83 x 7 87 in Should not exceed 110 Ib 149 x 200 mm index 199 g m Tray 2 Table 1 3 Tray 2 Media Guidelines Media Type Weight Capacity Feed Orientation Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 in Single sided 16 to 28 Ib 500 sheets of 20 Ib bond Landscape 216 x 279 mm 60 to 105 g m paper Paper ISO A4 8 3 x 11 7 in j Two sided 16 to 28 lb bond letter and A4 for Trays 2 3 Landscape 210 x 297 mm 60 to 105 g Im and 4 Paper Legal 8 5 x 14 in Portrait 216 x 356 mm Paper JIS B4 10 12 x 14 33 in Portrait 257 x 364 mm Note TheHP Laser et 55i HM C3124A supports 16 53 Ib bond media from all trays However performance in Tray 2 may not be as good with heavier media due to the sharp turn in the paper path For best performance Tray 1 3 or optional Tray 4 are recommended Caution When using 16 Ib bond media only use fusing mode STD PAPER Product Information 1 5 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd Tray 3 Table 1 4 Tray 3 Media Guide
25. 19 THRU 30 _______ 18 THRU 25 niP dll nFAULT 32 ii Vcc 33 Vcc 35 OAONOOABRWN OONOABRWND Parallel Cable Pin Assignments C2951 A B 2 1 O Information Figure B 2 Connecting to LocalTalk Networks The printer does not come with a LocalTalk network cable Use a standard LocalTalk network cable and connector kit such as the HP LocalTalk Network Cable Kit part number 92215N You will need one connector kit for each printer on the network and another for each Macintosh computer on the network Connecting to the END of a LocalTalk Network Connecting to the END of a LocalTalk Network 1 Disconnect the printer from its power source Insert the connector box cable into the LocalTalk port of the printer 2 Insert one end of the cable nto the new connector box 3 f the connector box is not self terminating insert a terminating resistor into the connector box 4 Insert the other end of the cable into the last connector box on the network Remove the terminating resistor if necessary 5 Reconnect the printer to its power source I O Information B 3 uoneuuoju oj E Connecting to the MIDDLE of a LocalTalk Network Figure B 3 Connecting to the MIDDLE of a LocalTalk Network 1 of 2 1 Disconnect the printer from its power source Insert the new connector box cable into the LocalTalk port of the printer 2 Insert one end of the new cable into the connector box 3 Placethe othe
26. 220 240V 05 07 31 07 02 7D NEN NEN not shown not shown Olololololo lt ZI lt lt lt lt l 5 ololololalo f apaaypariyjaisys piso o lS lt lt lt lt lt O O wn D O F O Lo Lo D Spanish C3166 40005 not shown Norweigan C3166 40006 not shown O lt o m lt A 6 Parts Index Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued mM Overlay Japanese Katakana C3166 40018 Paper Input Unit PIU RG5 1852 160CN Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange 1 A 8 04E JJ G KA de N E o e e O Z Paper Pick Up Assembly JJ O rh co e e e O Z RS5 1201 000CN WG8 5210 000CN Paper Registration Sensor Flag RB1 7813 000CN RB1 6692 000CN RG5 2225 000CN not shown BO not shown Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 Paper Size Guide Label Trays 2 and 3 00 e Dlslel zxz z aJ DID rl amp lalololio mio lololoe o q 9S o LIC YA ollm voleleleisioisiNn olwimiszximliolol lczc MILLS Pale ae ela alelelsisis isels ols lsal lolejelelo Olsalalo o e elo z zizizizizi4lzZ 0 3 3 6 6 6 3 0 Paper Size Sensing PCA Trays 2 and 3 2 00 Photo Interrupter E 0 0 5 2 4 1 11 02 3 3 0 Photo Interrupter 52 87 U U U Ul 0 U Ul U0 o D mo Oo amp mo Oo amp Oo o o o Oo o o D Iolo oo I C sa gt a Js gt ws E o ovg D o l2l2 ala oo f c O U Ojo Jj 5 opiu o O
27. 5 Paper Input Unit PIU RG5 1852 160CN Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange C3166 69011 f not shown Registration Heavy Media only compatible with C3124A C3124 60002 Parts and Diagrams 8 13 8 sweibeig pue sLied PS1205 J219 t 41202 31205 PS1204 87 C PS1203 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 Figure 8 4 8 14 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 4 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 Reto Descript 8 04 Diverter Assembly 8 04A Diverter Drive Assembly 8 04A 20T Gear 8 04A Conductive Bushing 8 04A Tension Spring 8 04B Mi Paper Sensing Lever 1 8 04B Paper Height Lever 8 04 Rca Fuser Assembly 110V Exchange 8 04 Ba Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange 8 04C 836 8 04C DEJAN 8 04C 38 8 04D 08 Sensor Arm Spring 8 04D 07 Block Shaft Holding Front 08 o0 Oo ERN o NN 2 8 04D Block Shaft Holding Rear 2 Qty RG9 1150 000CN HF5 1441 000CN RS5 0758 000CN RS5 1101 000CN RS5 2490 000CN RB1 6692 000CN RB1 6693 000CN RH7 1289 000CN C3166 69001 C3166 69013 RB1 6614 000CN RB1 6615 000CN RB1 6616 000CN RG5 1834 000CN RB1 6409 000CN HB1 6414 000CN RB1 6415 000CN RB1 6417 000CN RG5 1843 000CN RS5 2463 000CN RS5 2466 000CN WG8 0291 000CN C3166 69011 RB1 6588 000CN RG5 1860 000CN RF5 1426 000CN RF5 1427 000CN RB1 6557 000CN RB1 6558 000CN RG5 1859 000CN WG8 0291 000CN RG5 1861 000CN RH7 1262 000CN C C Fuser Flag Fuse
28. 7 Connectors between the Laser Scanner unit Inspect and reseat the connectors Replace and DC Controller are not seated properly or are cables as necessary defective 7 65 BuljooyusajqnoiL L Table 7 8 Fading Print Possible Cause Recommended Action AaBbCc 1 Toner supply is low Shake the cartridge gently to redistribute the toner or replace the cartridge uit Change to a darker setting and retry printing 2 Print Density is set incorrectly Change to a darker setting and retry printing 3 EconoMode is on EconoMode saves toner by Turn EconoMode off Verify that EconoMode is reducing the dot density This may appear to be not being enabled by either the printer driver or AaBbCc a print quality problem in some cases the job application 4 Paper does not meet specs The moisture Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer content conductivity or surface finish may not Family Paper Specifications Guide work correctly with the electrophotographic process 5 Transfer Roller is defective or incorrectly Inspect the Transfer Roller for proper installation installed If the Transfer Roller loses conductivity and contact If the Transfer Roller is damaged it cannot effectively pull toner from the drum to replace it the paper 6 Laser Scanner door is not opening properly 1 Remove and re seat the toner cartridge 2 Check the Laser Scanner shutter door for proper operation If defective replace the Laser
29. 8 16 and 32 Mbtye Modules See Accessories amp Supplies in Chapter 8 for option product numbers 32 Mbyte modules are compatible but not available from Hewlett Packard If the 8 Mbyte module is removed and replaced with a 32 Mbyte module the maximum can be 100 Mbytes 3 Product Information 1 3 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd Paper Capacities and Sizes Tray 1 Table 1 2 Tray 1 Media Guidelines Media Type Weight Capacity Feed Orientation Maximum paper size 11 7 x 17 7 in Single sided 16 lb bond to 100 sheets of 20 Ib bond 297 x 450 mm 53 lb bond 110 Ib index paper l i 60 to 199 g m a SH Do not load to more than a Two sided 16 to 28 lb bond maximum height of Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 in 60 to 105 g m 10 mm the paperfill mark Landscape 216 x 279 mm Paper ISO A4 8 3 x 11 7 in Landscape 210 x 297 mm Paper Executive 7 25 X 10 5 in Portrait 184 x 267 mm Paper Legal 8 5 x 14 in Portrait 216 x 356 mm Paper Ledger 11 x 17 in Portrait 279 x 432 mm Paper ISO A3 11 7 x 16 5 in Portrait 297 x 420 mm Paper JIS B5 7 16 x 10 12 in Landscape 182 x 257 mm Paper JIS B4 10 12 x 14 33 in Portrait 257 x 364 mm Transparency See minimum 0 0039 0 0045 in thick Limit to paperfill mark on and maximum 0 099 to 0 114 mm paper width guides Label Mod bid 0 005 0 007 in thick 0 127 to 0 178 mm Envelope Commercial 4 1 x 9 5 in Should not exceed 28 lb Up to 10 at one time
30. JAM 5 FACE DOWN OUTPUT PAPER LATE JAM 6 FACE DOWN OUTPUT PAPER STOPPED JAM Recommended Action PS2 is located in the Paper Pickup Unit refer to Figure 7 16 Inspect paper path Verify flag movement by manually inserting sheet of paper into slot beneath right side paper path access door and listening for flag movement PS1 is the Registration photosensor refer to Figure 7 15 Remove the toner cartridge and lift up on green lever to access sensor flag Verify flag movement PS1403 is located in the Fusing Assembly refer to Figure 7 16 Remove Toner Cartridge and the Fuser Access Door and inspect paper path Verify photosensor flag in the Fusing Assembly moves freely PS1402 the face down delivery photosensor is located on the Face Down Delivery assembly refer to Figure 7 15 Inspect Diverter Drive Assembly located on the access door to the Fusing Assembly and the Face Down Delivery Assembly Verify paper path from the Fusing Assembly to the top Face Down Bin is clear and all sensor flags move freely Troubleshooting 7 39 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message 13 x PAPER JAM Continued 13 x PAPER JAM Continued 13 x PAPER JAM Continued 7 40 Troubleshooting Message Description Duplex Module Paper Jams 7 2 SIDED TURNAROUND PAPER LATE JAM 8 2 SIDED TURNAROUND PAPER STOPPED JAM 9 2 SIDED PATH PAPER LATE JAM 10 2 SID
31. Message LOAD TRAY X or LOAD Attendance The printer received a request for a media Load the indicated tray with the ENV FEEDER media Required type and size that is not currently installed in correct media or override the type paper size the printer media type and size through the printer s Control Panel for that print job Note If paper is loaded when the printer is in POWER SAVE it may not be recognized Open and close the affected source when printer is in READY mode MANUAL FEED TRAY 1 Attendance The printer received a request for a media Load the correct media in Tray 1 media type paper size Required type and size manually fed from Tray 1 If the correct media is already loaded press Online so the printer will use that media Note If paper is loaded when the printer is in POWER SAVE it may not be recognized Open and close the affected source when printer is in READY mode MOPY XX OF Y from Tray n This message indicates the progress of the No action required current job OFFLINE The printer is offline and cannot receive data Press Online OUT OF STAPLES Attendance The staple cartridge is empty Staples are Replace the staple cartridge Required detected by a photosensor and flag located NOTE The stapler will retain beneath the staple cartridge access slot some staples do not remove Inserting a cartridge with staples pushes them Remove the cartridge down this flag Verify that the flag b
32. Multi Bin K nener Mailbox Duplex Mailbox w stapler Un Fusing AsSy S Cartridge Paper Output System Image Transfer Paper Input System Functional Block Diagram Figure 5 1 Printer Functional Block Diagram 5 4 Functional Overview Power Distribution System The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply HVPS The Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System is illustrated in Figure 5 2 Refer to the Reference Diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for more details To fuser roller heater gt A o mey n Circuit Ircul N H3 breaker fi CB101 l Current transformer T Surge current p reduction 1 resistor iv cae Current Power H transformer a switch i m i aasal us Main esmoo f motor Surge current ia cunin reduction i if os5v resistor ii oi i nans l szava Solenoid Noise Rectification SN Clutch smoothing AE F101 fil 4 H H e Y iter Ben das gt eicuit REMT24 J e 45V Operation a T E Control i de Constant voltage ge control E Control iphotocoupler IC sree 1 Sensors el Operational arrplifier photocoupier Input voltage detection PSIYP photocoupler i dnie a a Dey ate L ower supply circuit 1 220 2
33. Oo ER O Co O Z Co O CO BA Front q no N O is OIOIO OIOIO OIOIO O Z 8 04D 8 04A O Z O Rear 8 04D 00 Di Dini vi wv QDINI NIM W alo 2 N o V o oie eo e O Z O E CO hs O O O O Z J lt 2 e O Oi jq o e N O Z 7 Special Order Switch Special Order e Lm mb O ER 00 O O O O O z JIDD olo RIS Oo CO M Es oo oo oo OJO zZziz 22524 522 F3 le See Ea Ez O O ti REINO 2 o l9 lol 9l5 C1 Oo ft olol lol o Nio o a eo Ojo O OIO Z ZIZ 00 e al Damper Holder Front Rear DC Controller PCA DC Controller PCA Exchange UU U OloljoijolijoijoIioIijioIijoIijo oO o OoOjojoljo jojoljloIloIlcIie 3 lt lt lt S3 S3 gt 3 3 E lt U IO tl oy odpdossoso sea O 25 D o ES S73 3 lo o lt c 2 2 gt lt 3 o iriz 8a a8 elelelojo TIS E 0lo06 lt lo lo o a D D zi clo o SS 15 3 a OJT SI w SISi la TO D o c gt gt 8 2 JE sei a 9 Ie 3 3 En S15 2 gt o la o 3 za b o cae E CO o c N lt o lt 3 c I UJ 5 JJ Q al Li Co N 2 O O O O z Co O no C2 O O O C1 BA 0 3 2 0 1 0 3 3 2 Delivery Head Assembly for Mailbox with Stapler 0 5 0 1 5 1 5 2 2A 6 2 A JJ OQ d T Z o e e O Z JIJ lt pO OD lt SD o 2 a lt 2 r oO ID olg 3 e AE lt o gt
34. RG5 1861 000CN 103 Paper Pickup Cable Fusing Assembly 100 120V JJ G q co D a nO O O O Pad bn gt m 1 nmi oijo c BR ory hm Pp MIN gl al MINJ IAINIA A O p oaorpo al NIO Co RG5 1870 000CN Cover Assembly Fusing Assembly 220 240V a Co N mb co O Z 21B Face Down Delivery Assembly 8 03 Di DO Dv OJOJOO alata o B EN SEEN oio ele ele OJO Ziz Face Up Solenoid Assembly RG5 1876 000CN 8 06 4A 04B Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V JJ G ph co N Ex o e e O Z o Low Voltage Power Supply Universal RG5 1880 100CN Tray 1 Pick up Assembly JJ G q Co CO rx O O O O Tray 1 Door Tray 1 PCA RG5 1884 000CN 8 03 JJ G ts Co 00 ha o e e O Z Transfer Roller Assembly RG5 1888 000CN High Voltage Power Supply Laser Scanner Assembly Cover Assembly psv Ev sv aia oQioliloljioliol o oa Raa Raa Ra Rea Rei olojolol ol o NINI INIO ele ve 9 9v O ojoIijioijioI jo oOo ojo 2 O O O ojoijioijioIjo OIojoljoljoIlo Zziziziziziz Right Cover Assembly Main Motor Cable 8 03 8 06 8 06 Cassette Size Sensor Cable Fan 3 Cable RG5 1924 000CN Cable Assembly A 16 Parts Index Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued Scanner Motor Cable ad ra ojo ala m m alo Registration Cable 2000 Sheet Input Tray Assembly Tray 4 Main Drive Assembly VIDI DIDI vai DID O O O O O O O a sm qe o pm
35. Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 Remove the Tray 1 Assembly see Figure 6 52 4 Remove the Right Lower Door Assembly see Figure 6 14 5 6 7 Remove 4 screws CH 102 Figure 6 31 callout 1 Slide the assembly out from the chassis approximately 3 inches and unplug the connector inside the right end Figure 6 31 callout 2 Continue sliding the assembly out of the chassis Paper Input Unit To Reinstall Make sure that Trays 2 and 3 are removed when reinstalling the Paper Input Unit The Laser et 5Si HM printer C3124A requires a unique paper input unit 6 46 Removal and Replacement PCA DC Controller Remove the F ormatter Assembly see Figure 6 24 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 Remove the High Voltage Power Supply see Figure 6 40 Unplug 18 connectors from the PCA Figure 6 32 callout 1 Note For the 5Si HM C3124A you also need to disconnect the Thermal Control Cable Figure 6 32 callout 6 5 Remove 2 screws CH 101 Figure 6 32 callout 2 from the left side of the PCA and 2 self tapping screws CH 106 Figure 6 32 callout 3 from the right side of the PCA 6 Releasetwo retaining dips Figure 6 32 callout 4 and carefully tip the left side of the PCA outward to clear the Formatter PCA connector from the card cage DU N m To Reinstall Make surethe retaining clip posts Figure 6 32 callout 4 and the two locator pins Figure 6
36. The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside this printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation WARNING Use of the controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Regulatory Information C 1 Laser Statement Finland Thefollowing applies to printer operation and servicing in Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1LASER APPARAT HP Laser et s 5Si 5Si MX and 5Si Mopier laserkirjoitin on kayttajan kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa kayt ssa kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estaa lasers teen paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle Kirjoittimen on hyvaksynyt Suomessa laserturvallisuuden osalta Sahk tarkastuskeskus Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty valtioneuvoston paat ksen N o 472 1985 ja standardin EN 60825 1991 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen kayttaminen muulla kuin kaytt
37. Tray 3 These sensors detect amount of the paper remaining in Tray 2 L when there is no paper in Tray 3 L when there is no paper in Tray 2 L when there is no paper in Tray 1 L when the lifting plate rises Troubleshooting 7 89 Dunoouse qnoJ L Switch Sensor PCA i Face down i Ed tray paper full vLIC RALIS J2217 FoFuLs sensor l I Face down i a tray delivery vL 12 FDOUTS sensor l t _PS1403 l Fusing unit l 1 11 8 delivery sensor VL IE i eo l l 24VB i 1 1 00 2 2 i 1 4 3 1 I 24VA D itch oor switc i i lo 72 o 8 s i i Fusing unit eal aa aes i Fusing roller i TH temperature sensor I 1 me em m m ou m A 4 o ee a i High voltage EP cartridge power supply PCA ps a aa Toner o ANTIN L 701 5 J220 A5 sensor i TB703 i TONRS d b o ooo l Paper size sensing switch PCA CSS SSeS S I SW1601 J1601A 1 J2199 sizE y i ro 9W1602 2 4 paper size i SW1603 i 3 3 LSIZE2 sensing I oO SW1604 4 gt LSIZE3 switches i E LSIZE4 i i i a a e eye i Paper size sensing switch PCA PARA A A ee ee t SW1601 t J1601B 1 J215 10 1 e Tray 2 i SW1602 1 2 9 eel paper size t SW1603 l 3 3 USIZE2 sensing l SW1604 4 7 USIZE3 switches i USIZE4 i 5 6 t t RN 1 Figure 7 31 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 2 of 5 7 90 Troubleshooting DC Controller PCA H when the face down tr
38. communications There is however no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate receiving antenna e ncrease separation between equipment and receiver Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult your dealer or an experienced radio TV technician Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply within the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules VCCI Statement J apan The VCCI statement below is required in J apan It is similar tothe FCC regulatory statement COBRE S RESEISCGUEXEIBEXITOBHLUIiuBECi1ScC8H SHAN SHBRE TCETHE COTES SBME LITERALES E set RE AEM BRAC VCCI BEC MAL THOT Lol KAZIJA FeV sa PRICE LC CeMIte Se SIRBEORMAECKEACLEHSHDET HUG AE HE gt TIEL RL ORL TF aL VCCI Statement Japan C 4 Regulatory Information DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that th
39. discharges the negative potential wherever it strikes the surface This creates a latent invisible electrostatic image which is developed into a visible image as the drum rotates see Figure 5 10 Cylindrical lens Laser driver Scanner motor BD mirror Mirror Scanning mirror Focusing lens BD PCA Photosensitive drum Image Writing Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating the entire surface area of the drum can be covered The speed of the scanner motor which turns the scanning mirror and the speed of the main motor which turns the drum are synchronized and each successive sweep of the beam is offset 1 600th of an inch The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot of light every 1 600th of an inch This is how the printer achieves its 600 x 600 dpi resolution After the writing process the drum surface has a latent invisible electrostatic image At the end of each sweep the beam strikes the beam detect lens generating the Beam Detect Signal BD The BD signal is sent tothe DC Controller where it is converted to an electrical signal used to synchronize the output of data VDO for one sweep scan line and to diagnose problems with the laser diode or scanner motor 5 16 Functional Overview Figure 5 11 Image Developing The developing process changes the latent electrostatic image into a visible image by depositing negatively charged toner particles on the exposed
40. enouiay Figure 6 93 6 104 Removal and Replacement Caution Figure 6 94 Stapling Unit Controller PCA Remove the Stapling Unit Assembly see Figure 6 91 Remove the Back Plate see Figure 6 92 Remove 2 screws located on the right side of the Stapling Unit holding the PCA board see Figure 6 94 callout 1 Unplug the cables that are connected to the PCA Identify their color and size and the ground cables see Figure 6 95 callouts 1 and 2 The board is supported by a hooked tab at the top of the card see Figure 6 96 callout 1 Slidethe board tothe left and then down To Reinstall Slide the board up and then tothe right Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly Removal and Replacement 6 105 9 jueuieooejdey pue PAOUIO9H 6 106 Removal and Replacement Caution Figure 6 97 N Top Cover Assembly Remove the Stapling Unit Assembly see Figure 6 91 Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the Back Plate see Figure 6 92 Unplug the ground and signal cables from the right side of the Stapling Unit Controller board being careful to keep them in the cable holder On each side of the assembly pull the hingeto release the 2 posts from the retaining notches see Figure 6 97 ToReinstall Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage
41. serial number 1 7 specifications 1 8 standard memory 1 3 testing 3 23 timing 5 40 printer dimensions 1 8 printer features 1 3 comparison 1 3 printer information 1 1 1 28 m I Oo printer languages printer space requirements printing from the envelope feeder 5 39 from tray 1 5 3 from tray 2 5 3 from tray 3 5 3 from tray 4 5 3 two sided 5 3 printing menu 3 5 default settings 3 5 product information 1 1 product overview 1 1 PSI see registration sensor 6 62 PS2 see paper input unit sensor 6 61 R recycling toner cartridges 1 23 reference diagrams 7 86 refilled toner cartridges 1 23 registration assembly 6 56 registration sensor 6 62 related documentation 1 24 remanufactured assemblies 1 21 removal and replacement strategy 6 5 repair philosophy 1 21 repetitive defects 7 69 repetitive image defect ruler 7 71 replacing disk drive 6 8 duplex unit 6 10 envelope feeder 6 11 external paper handling controller 6 12 multi bin mailbox 6 14 tray 4 6 13 required tools 6 6 requirements space 2 4 reset cold 3 28 Resolution Enhancement technology 1 3 5 9 resolution print 1 3 restoring factory settings 3 6 REt see Resolution Enhancement technology 1 3 5 9 REt Resolution Enhancement technology 1 3 roller transfer 6 64 Index 3 Xepul rollers tray 1 6 58 tray 2 6 60 tray 3 6 60 S saving menu selections 3 8 scanner drive 5 10 scanner motor 5 11 scanner laser assembly 6 42 scr
42. 04E Torque Limiter Transfer Guide Transfer Guide Bushing Transfer Roller Transfer Roller Assembly Transpsort Belt Motor in kit Tray 1 Door Tray 1 Feed Roller Tray 1 Internal Cover Shield Tray 1 PCA Tray 1 Pick up Assembly Tray 1 Separation Pad Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Main Drive Assembly Vertical Transfer Assembly Volume Paper Cable Wire Frame A 10 Parts Index Numerical Parts Index Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index Fg meo 420 MB Disk Left Mounting Bracket 420 MB Disk Right Mounting Bracket 420 MB Disk Cable Assembly C3166 67905 Packaging Kit Printer C3166 69001 Fuser Assembly 110V C3166 69001 Fusing Assembly 100 120V Exchange C3166 69005 High Voltage Power Supply Exchange C3166 69006 Laser Scaner Assembly Exchange 06A C3166 69007 Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V Exchange C3166 69008 Low Voltage Power Supply Universal Exchange C3166 69010 DC Controller PCA Exchange C3166 69011 Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange C3166 69011 Paper Input Unit PIU C3166 69013 Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange C3168 67905 C3168 69005 C3169A C3762 60500 0950 2927 C2009 00006 C2930A C2931A C2965 40001 C2965 40002 C2965 60004 C2965 69001 Ba No Ro lt 2 5 olo Olelo S 5 9 S S UJ UJ oOo lolo lt 2 lalo A amp s s S lt Qi a gt lt Z YN S o 3 y z O lt D D Formatter Assembly Formatter Assembly Exchange 02 Packaging Kit Duplex Unit 8 01
43. 1 3 Press the retainer tabs together Figure 6 73 callout 2 to release the switch and remove it from the rear of the unit Figure 6 73 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Interlock Switch 6 86 Removal and Replacement Caution Note O U bb YN rt J am Access Door Assembly Remove the left and right covers see Figure 6 65 Remove the Delivery Head Position Motor see Figure 6 82 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 Release the upper end of the Metallic Tape see Figure 6 79 Release 2 retaining springs Figure 6 74 callout 1 From the front of the unit remove 1 e clip from the right end of the shaft Figure 6 75 callout 2 Use caution when removing the e dip because the dip might slip and shoot towards you or another person Before removing the am Access Door six sided shaft note the position of the plastic retainer that holds the metallic tape located at the center of the door It must be replaced on the shaft in the same position for proper paper movement From the front of the unit support the door assembly while sliding the shaft to the left until it is clear of the frame The retaining springs and tape retainer will fall free Release the upper ends of the Paper Guide Strings Figure 6 76 callout 3 from the assembly To Reinstall Attach the upper ends of the Paper Guide Strings to the door assembly before installing it into the frame Make sure tha
44. 2 screws CH 104 Figure 6 19 callout 2 Fan 2 LVPS Removal and Replacement 6 33 9 jueuiooejdey pue enouiay Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing Fan Motor Note The fan motor FM 3 can be removed without removing the housing assembly 1 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 2 Unplug the fan connector Figure 6 20 callout 1 Caution Do not bend the fan retainer clips upward Release them by pinching 3 Releasethe 2 retainer dips Figure 6 20 callout 2 and slide the fan out of the housing assembly To Reinstall Make sure that the fan cable exits from the upper left corner Fan Housing See Fan 2 4 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 5 Remove 2 screws CH 101 Figure 6 20 callout 3 Figure 6 20 Bis 4 F L m ad j y ARROW DIRECTION Fan 3 Formatter 6 34 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 21 Fan 4 Exhuast Delivery Unit 1 Remove the top cover see Figure 6 8 2 Unplugthefan cable Figure 6 21 callout 1 3 Remove 1 screw CH 101 Figure 6 21 callout 2 and remove the metal fan shield 4 Release 4 retainer clips Figure 6 21 callout 3 and slide the fan forward out of the Delivery Unit Assembly Fan 4 Delivery Unit Removal and Replacement 6 35 9 juaua9e doy pue eno0uay Note O U bb YN PP 10 Feeder Assembly Open the left access door and remove the Duplex Unit if installed Remove the F user Assembly see Figure 6 25
45. 36 42 Ib Bond Minimum media weight Minimum media weight Minimum media weight media media media supported is 90 Ib Index supported is 90 Ib Index supported is 90 Ib Index 43 Ib Bond 43 Ib Bond 43 Ib Bond Note Any preprinted media labels or envelopes must have inks coatings or adhesives that withstand temeratures up to 215 C Refer to the HP Laser et Printer Family Paper Specification Guide for more complete media specifications Setting the Fuser Mode Using PJ L Command The printer default can be set using the following command lt E SC gt 12345X PJ L CR2 L F gt GP LDEFAULTFUSER STDPAPER lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt 12345X lt CR gt lt LF gt The range choices are as follows STDPAPER HEAVYPAPER1 HEAVYPAPER2 CARDSTOCK1 CARDSTOCK2 CARDSTOCK3 Operating Overview 3 9 e MINIMO Bunerado Control Panel Menus Press Menus to cycle through the control panel menus Each menu is described in a separate table in this section Table 3 5 provides a map of all the menus and their associated items Menu items are displayed only if their associated option is installed or function is activated All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer is on line In a menu mode if no keys are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the system will automatically return to the top level and display e READY if the printer was on line e OFFLINE if the printer was off line e An existing error or
46. 4 Empty See recommended actions for Error Log Messages 66 01 01 and 66 01 02 Troubleshooting 7 55 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action Message 66 2 1 DEVICE ERROR Home reference is not found During the Roll the mailbox assembly away CYCLE POWER Message power on sequence the Multi Bin Mailbox from the printer Inspect the front 66 02 01 and the delivery head travel the length of the of the mailbox to determine if one mailbox verifying that all the bins and the continuous scan bar is present stapler are installed This is performed when refer to Figure 7 12 Each bin the PS Bin Full Head Position photosensor and the stapler assembly if located in the Head Assembly reads a scan installed MUST be in place to bar Ascan bar forms by plastic protrusions form a continuous scanbar located on the rear surface of each bin and Ensure the stapler is firmly the stapler refer to Figure 7 12 When all seated on to the mailbox and the bins are in place one continuous scan ensure all mailbox trays are in bar is formed place With the 8 bin mailbox ensure the Blind Cover is installed Verify the Multi Bin Mailbox Head assembly can move freely Override the Mailbox Interlock switch Figure 7 25 then power on the printer and observe the mailbox head assembly go through the normal power up sequence If the preceding actions do not correct the error re
47. A ZH LH sareay seno Duisn4 L aogr ASSL L ms rr T AmS iv uonejedo spuooes ium Mee NO cam 4aM0d pea Buixejdng saded ejuozi10y py uo suud eannoesuoo OM 104 yeyo Buin e General Timing Diagram 2 of 2 for LJ 5Si 5Si MX 5 42 Functional Overview Figure 5 23 Removal and Replacement Chapter Contents Removal and Replacement Strategy eee 6 5 Required Tools een s 6 6 User Installable Accessories 6 7 Disk Drive rossa 6 8 Duplex Unit 2 252D2 2 2 2225 6 10 Envelope Feeder rrr 6 11 External Paper Handling Controller 6 12 Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit 6 13 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 6 14 Hardware Table cerle rns 6 15 Control Panel e 6 17 COURS etorri 6 18 AC Access Cover aoaaa a a a a 6 18 Back Cover aoaaa AA 6 19 Front Cover a le lee ee a e oho a 6 20 Left Lower COVE 6 22 WOO GOVE wu moe ox rr es A e od eom ou us 6 23 Delivery Unit for FaceDown Bin llle 6 25 Diverter Assembly 6 27 Door Assembly Diverter a 6 28 Door Assembly Right Lower ee ee 6 29 Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing 6 31 Fan Housing lll eee sens 6 31 Fa
48. Assembly see Figure 6 97 Remove the Stapling Bed Assembly see Figure 6 98 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lift upwards Remove 2 screws joining each hinge to the housing See Figure 6 99 callout 1 Disconnect the 2 cables in the hinge containing cables from the Stapling Unit Controller PCA see Figure 6 95 callout 2 Removal and Replacement 6 109 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay 6 110 Removal and Replacement Troubleshooting Chapter Contents Troubleshooting Process les 7 3 PONG Olla ow eey eerren ias SEE mSggEXS4 23 os 7 6 Overview ll lee 4 sos oa oy s aon 7 6 EngineTest a 7 8 DIDIN 3 it oe xu ero ewe ea 7 9 Overview ll s sesso o aon 7 9 Display and Evaluate the Error Log 7 9 Configuration a 7 10 Verify Presence of Installed Personalities and Options on the Configuration Pages oaoa a 7 10 Configuration Page Illustration and Key 7 12 Menu Page Example 2 7 13 Communications Link C Link Cables 7 14 Image Quality sse sirra rken edri nearne sapr 7 15 Check the Toner Cartridge ln 7 16 Faulty Image Examples 7 16 EMO COG 2226226422 ee eee See Re Ree eee 3 x Bo S 7 17 Print and Evaluate the Error Log 7 17 Error Log Interpretation oaoa a a 7 17 Communication o
49. C Link Cable to the 2000 Sheet Input and retry until all devices are added or the failing device is identified Replace the Controller for the failing Paper Handling Device For errors 66 00 14 through 66 00 22 the printer may have possible power failures Replace the Multi Bin Mailbox s external power supply Turn off the printer and all accessories then turn them ON If the message persists check all installed accessories and C Link cables Check all installed FRUs Replace the Formatter PCA Print the error log and the PCL configuration pages Re enter the printer s S N and page counts from SERVICE MODE Cycle power If the error persists follow these steps Replace the Formatter PCA Replace the DC Controller PCA Troubleshooting 7 59 Dunoousoe qnoJ L 1 Paper Quantity Switches 2 Lifter Safety Switch SW31 3 Paper Surface Sensor Flag SW34 4 Tray 4 Paper Out Flag SW33 7 60 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Message 68 NVRAM FULL CHECK CONFIGURATION 70 or 71 ERROR 79 SERVICE 04CC 79 SERVICE 0142 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Catastrophic System Message Catastrophic System Message Description The non volatile memory NVRAM is full A language personality SIMM problem was identified The SIMM is not compatible with the firmware The Main Motor was running for over 20 minutes Duplex job selecting media by source and odd number of pages Recommended A
50. DOIoIoDIDI ast ast aii i iI iI I Oc oOoj ojojoijojojojojojoJjo Oc1 O01 O01 O01 O01 O01 O01 O01 O01 O01 OC01 C WOlWOTOT NINININININIAT Tol UI Troy oartF ft wryrnynyel oy gt yosrzot yo Spring left jam access door Metallic Box Spacer plastic Screw lorx T20 tapping M4X10 CH113 Lower Pulley Assembly Lower Pulley Spring 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 11 Encoder Assembly Cable Flat Delivery Head to Controller PCA Cable Flipper Assembly to Controller PCA Cable Delivery Head Position Motor to Controller PCA Cable Interlock Switch to Controller PCA Cable Encoder to Controller PCA Blind Cover only with 8 bin MBM 8 11 8 11 8 09 8 11 OJO OIOJQO od 0d w cd Oo S N ON SS olo olojo R E R S olo ajojo Ojo o ol o ala alata A gt KR RIA o N OQ oO Casters Right Cover 8 11 8 09 8 11 Left Cover Top Cover Interlock Switch Attachment Bracket Input Paper Guide 8 11 ia D kd ud rs o o a 2 o olo oOjiojojoljoljojoljolo ojielejeljejeljeoeljeljoe ximISMISMISMIRIRIA ololololololol ol o ma pad ae le cx cui d cond ae o5lololololololol o o lelelelieljeleljeselje oa eleljeljeljeljeljael o olololeloeljoelol o oc N S o a o S Anti Curl String O C N D T D e Oi o C zu o Anti Curl String Spring A 12 Parts Index Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued O ER not shown not shown not shown not shown not sho
51. High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity 5 Laser Scanner door not opening properly 1 Remove and re seat the toner cartridge 2 Check the Laser Scanner shutter door for proper operation If defective replace the Laser Scanner Assembly 6 High Voltage Power Supply is defective Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA 7 DC Controller PCAis defective The DC Replace the DC Controller PCA Controller supplies the proper voltage to the High Voltage Power Supply PCA 7 64 Table 7 7 Black Page Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Defective toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge 2 Light is leaking into the printer Ensure all covers are in place 3 High voltage contact springs are dirty or Inspect and clean the high voltage contacts If defective The high voltage contacts are damaged replace the High Voltage Power mounted on the High Voltage Power Supply Supply PCA PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity 4 High voltage power supply circuit is defective Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA not supplying the correct negative voltage 5 DC Controller PCA is defective If the DC Replace the DC Controller PCA Controller turns on the laser beam continuously the entire surface of the Photosensitive drum is neutralized causing a completely black page 6 Laser Scanner Assembly is faulty turning Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly laser on continuously
52. L 4 J118 d 1 6 re p 5 2 PM 6 1 to option controller to other option TIN nownonwal li flre nownonaoanlt i S2xe ise 10000 LIII 100000 GOOD o PAP SIZE2 PAP SIZE1 Paper deck driver PCA 9 FEEDCL 2 PICKUPSL B 424V bici Mdb AL AU j to vion s e LALA 411111102 e AAA AA gt 9 eel ie ele S ejN mo r ej o Power supply S o f 2 CXT I oo as SUE Pick up Lifter abnormal PS31 PS32 CL32 CL33 solenoid PS33 PS34 PS35 position sensing Registration Paper jam Registration Feed clutch Tray paper Paper surtace Door sensor switch paper sensor sensor clutch out sensor sensor 2000 Sheet Input Unit Main Wiring Diagram Figure 7 38 Troubleshooting 7 97 500000 1 10 000006 1500000 11 two dots 1 TX 3 RX previous 4 TERMINATE OUT re 0 ICLOCK connector 12 STROBE im 13 POWER ON IN BN 2 7 8 11 GND 5 10 24V one dot 1 MX e 3 RX 4 TERMINATE IN next 6 CLOCK device 12 ISTROBE connector 13 POWER ON OUT out 2 7 8 11 GND CLINK 5 10 24V power 24 V supply connector Delivery Head M39 Roller Motor Wan Figure 7 39 7 98 Troubleshooting Vcc 7 2 El Transport Belt Motor P gt BELT i m5 Decoder ya BA N8 EH 13351 aNTERLOCK SWITCH MULTI BIN MAILBOX CONTROLLER PCA DETER Po 16 Aa cs Roller Motor Vcc umm VA S A A daan ho Delivery Head TQ ston war 5 RL Vcc El i JA 171 61514 3121 110 918 716 5 4 3 2 1
53. Motor Delivery Head POSITION 6 95 6 2 Removal and Replacement Motor Transport Belt and Encoder Assembly 6 96 Paper BinsandBlindCover eee eens 6 98 PCA Controller 2 2 2 5 2 6 99 Strings Anti Curl a 6 100 Stapling Unit Assembly 6 102 back Plate sic ei eee ew dox E OE Ao amp 66 RE ROC E Re oS 6 103 Stapling Unit Controller PCA lll ae 6 105 Top Cover Assembly 6 107 Stapling Bed Assembly 6 108 POSS uu acu oe de dood eh eae NOR UE Y EORR OCCUR OK amp 6 109 Removal and Replacement 6 3 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay 6 4 Removal and Replacement WARNING Caution Les ES Removal and Replacement Strategy This chapter documents removal and replacement of major assemblies Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included Unplug the power cord from the power outlet before attempting to service the printer If this warning is not followed severe injury may result Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes This printer has some sharp sheet metal edges which can cause injury The printer contains parts that
54. Multi Bin Mailbox s External Power Supply Table 7 5 Message 66 1 1 DEVICE ERROR CYCLE POWER 66 1 2 DEVICE ERROR CYCLE POWER 66 1 3 DEVICE ERROR CYCLE POWER Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description Message Feed Motor malfunction The 2000 Sheet Message Input Feeder Main Drive Motor provides all 66 01 01 drive capabilities for feeding paper in Tray 4 Lifter malfunction Under normal operating conditions when Tray 4 is closed the Tray 4 paper stack lifts until the paper is directly beneath Tray 4 s feed rollers Photosensor flag PS34 the Paper Surface photosensor determines when the paper stack is lifted to its feed position refer to Figure 7 23 Both Feed Motor and Lifter malfunction Recommended Action lo see if the 2000 Sheet Main Motor is functioning open the vertical transfer door Then open and close Tray 4 Override the vertical transfer door open photosensor PS35 Refer to Figure 7 15 See if the white drive roller on the lower right hand side of the printer rotates If it does not rotate check the cable connections from the 2000 Sheet Feeder to the Main Drive Assembly callout 1 Figure 6 56 Pickup Assembly callouts 2 and 3 Figure 6 59 Controller PCA callout 1 Figure 6 58 Power Supply callout 1 Figure 6 61 Replace the Pickup Assembly Replace the Controller PCA Replace the 2000 Sheet Feeder s power supply See the recommended actions for Message Tray
55. O gt lt O m O OIO d S N O AJIO O O al O N Parts Index A 3 Xopu Sued V Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued ProwuctPanno Fo Diverter Drive Assembly 3 O E D A lt lt lt D o D U JOID c elo O oO o D 312 gt lt O aci C mM E iz a O ol 3 o lt U E T D x 5 J Duplex Unit Roller 1 Electromagnetic Clutch RH7 5119 000CN 803 2 Electromagnetic Clutch Paper Feed 8 Exchange Mailbox 5 Bin for Stapler not shown Exchange Mailbox 8 Bin not shown 00 O C2 NO C3766 69500 not shown External Paper Handling Controller PCA C3768 60501 RB1 6491 000CN C3 in Special Order RB1 6490 000CN 802 00 O NO C2 Face Up Solenoid Assembly RG5 1875 000CN RG5 1874 000CN 803 2 Fan 1 RH7 1266 000CN Fan 2 RH7 1266 000CN 00 O Co O nimi im Ti nimimim I m m o o o m wv v v x d D D D O O O Q O lt O ojala a o o jolo om el 212 gt O cicicic 5 210 gt gt 9 y o o o o amp G 2 a lo o O Z o m uo D o gt o D 5151 5 Qo o o 3 3 9 CJ D o lt lt 2 lt 5 S L ae gt JJ lt C 2 2 D D ep D 3 o lt O1 0 11 11 4A 8 04 22 11 0 Fan 3 RH7 1271 000CN 11 RG5 1921 000CN Fan 4 RH7 1289 000CN 8 04B 25 0 52 23 01 01 1A 01 02 NO Feed Separation Rollers 8 04E 2 Flipper Assembly no cable
56. O interface then prints two pages One shows the overall printer configuration and the other one shows the current menu settings Refer to Figure 7 5 and Figure 7 6 or information about interpreting the configuration page If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration pages verify that the C Link cabling is correctly connected and functional Figure 7 7 and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices Check and reseat suspect cable connections If any of the cables are replaced you must cyde the power to have the printer recognize the device again To print a PCL configuration page pl Press Menu until TEST MENU appears Press Item until PCL CONFI GURATI ON PAGE appears 3 Press Select to print the configuration pages N Verify Presence of Installed Personalities and Options on the Configuration Pages Under Installed Personalities and Options look for options such as e Postscript C3169A e 420 MB Disk C2965A e SIMM types RAM or ROM and sizes Verify that the options which are physically installed in your printer are reflected in the PCL configuration page If an installed device is not shown on the PCL configuration page check the following table 7 10 Troubleshooting Table 7 3 Note Devices Action if installed and not detected Duplex Unit Envelope Feeder Device 1 2000 Sheet Input Unit Device 2 Multi Bin Mailbox Device 3 Stapler Module Device 1 2000
57. Paper Path Test from that tray see Paper Path Test under Test Menu in Chapter 3 Refer to Figure 4 1 and compare distance A to distance B DISTANCE A Top Of Page DISTANCE B Image Area Margins Maintenance and Adjustments 4 7 y sjueunsn py Y ooueuo ureJy Note Refer to Figure 4 2 Each adjustment notch changes the physical position of the tray by 0 5 mm 0 02 in Moving the lever counter clockwise moves the tray inward and increases distance A Moving the lever dockwise moves the tray outward and decreases distance A Figure 4 2 NOTCH 0 5 mm Ve ADJUSTMENT 2 PER NOTCH C i O ADJUSTMENT S LEVER Tray 2 3 Position Adjustment 4 If distance A is greater than distance B by more than 0 5 mm 0 02 in move the adjustment lever clockwise one notch 5 If distance A is less than distance B by more than 0 5 mm 0 02 in move the adjustment lever counter clockwise one notch 6 After adjusting e Reinstall thetray e Re run the Paper Path Test e Recheck the measurements e Re adjust as necessary 4 8 Maintenance and Adjustments Figure 4 3 DU N m Tray 4 Adjustment Procedure In some cases the registration from Tray 4 HCI causes print to start too close to the edge of the paper This situation is not a typical occurrence In most cases the Tray 4 offset is fine Although this may or may not be within specification it is unacceptable to some users Perform the following adjustment procedur
58. Pressing Items moves to the next menu item MAI NTCOUNT nnnnnnn Displays the pagecount when the next preventive maintenance should be performed maintenance should be performed every 350 000 pages Press to step through values above cursor Press Select to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing Menus or Items before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing Menus returns printer to the main menu system Pressing Items moves to the next menu item Displays printer serial number also located on the printer back cover Press to step through values above cursor Press Select to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing Menus or Items before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing Menus returns printer to the main menu system Pressing Items moves to the next menu item CLEAR ERROR LOG Press Select to activate Printer returns to On Line READY when completed COLD RESET PAPER LETTER Press to change setting A4 Press Select to activate choice DI AGNOSTI CS OFF For factory test purposes ONLY ON DO NOT change PAGECOUNTznnnnnnn Press to step through values above cursor Press Select to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will s
59. Tee eee ee Tee eee eee a ee rr rra rr oro rra rod rr rr Figure 7 29 Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids 7 88 Troubleshooting Registration xS J11 3 J209 5 paper YH sensor Pick up PCA a PS2 Pick up unit J13 3 J1205 1 P5VBDOR paper sensor 2 2 GND l 1 J FEEDS 141201 14 J219 8 i PS3 143 J1206 1 P5VBDOR 1 Paper pick up E 2 GND i unit door i 3 RDOORS 6 16 sensor i l p n mm l I i PS1201 l Tray 3 I I 12 10 sensor I i I l PS1202 Tray 2 1 i 16 6 sensor i Tray 3 PS1203 paper level i YE te sensor 1 i I Tray 3 PS1204 i paper level l vi i fis sensor 2 i I Trav 2 PS1205 i ray paper level i vL IC gt NI sensor 1 i ee PS1206 ray paper level YE S 13 sensor 2 i Tray 3 i x ud sensor i l I i Tray 2 PS1208 sensor i i Eu uo ulus es ee l Tray 1 PCA uu ceu illud i PS1301 L Tuyipage 3 vL ic J1301 7 J214 7 sensor i i PS1302 Lifting plate i i 6 6 position sensor t 3 3 i i E a M Figure 7 30 P5VB3 REGS PSVBDOR FEEDS RDOORS LDECKC UDECKC LPVS2 LPVS1 UPVS2 UPVS1 LDECKS UDECKS MPTPS MTPLS PSVB2 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 1 of 5 DC Controller PCA L when the sensor detects paper L when the sensor detects paper L when the pick up unit door is open L when the sensor detects Tray 3 L when the sensor detects Tray 2 These sensors detect amount of the paper remaining in
60. Trays 2 and 3 e Back Cover seeFigure 6 4 e VPS seeFigure 6 41 2 Unplug the fan cable from the left side of the connector Figure 6 37 callout 1 remove 1 screw CH 102 Figure 6 37 callout 2 and remove the plastic shield Figure 6 37 callout 3 The Paper Size PCA for Tray 2 Figure 6 38 callout 4 is identical tothe PCA for Tray 3 Figure 6 38 callout 5 The removal procedure for both PCAs is the same 3 Unplug the connector Figure 6 38 callout 6 remove 3 screws CH 101 Figure 6 38 callout 7 and remove the PCA and actuating fingers To Reinstall Make sure that the actuating fingers are aligned with the locating pins Figure 6 39 callout 8 Paper Size PCA 1 of 3 Removal and Replacement 6 51 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Paper Size PCA 3 of 3 6 52 Removal and Replacement Power Supply High Voltage HVPS 1 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 2 Unplugthe cable from the LVPS tothe DC Controller PCA Figure 6 40 callout 1 and move it out of the way 3 Unplug the connector from the bottom of the HVPS Figure 6 40 callout 2 Note DO NOT remove the screw indicated in Figure 6 40 by the null symbol 4 Remove 1 self tapping screw CH 106 Figure 6 40 callout 3 and 3 screws CH 101 Figure 6 40 callout 4 To Reinstall Make sure that the plastic alignment pin Figure 6 40 callout 5 the connector pins and the high voltage conta
61. adjustment procedure 0 assembly 6 media guidelines 1 rollers 6 tray 4 6 6 6 ON back cover left cover main drive assembly 6 70 media guidelines 1 6 paper quantity switch 6 6 6 6 6 6 oo Na No assembly 6 77 paper size switch assembly 6 77 paper tray 6 71 pca controller 6 72 photosensors 6 74 pickup assembly 6 73 power supply 6 75 replacing 6 13 right cover 6 69 rollers 6 76 transfer assembly 6 78 tray menu 3 10 troubleshooting drum rotation functional check 7 75 engine test 7 8 faulty image exampes 7 63 faulty image examples 7 16 half self test functional check 7 74 high voltage power supply check 7 76 image formation 7 63 paper curl 7 85 paper jams 7 11 troubleshooting checks 7 78 troubleshooting tools repetitive image defect ruler 7 72 two sided printing 5 39 typefaces internal 1 3 U upgrading memory 6 7 personalities 6 7 user installable accessories 6 7 W warranty 1 27 warranty limitations 1 28 white stripes 7 71 Kin HEWLETT PACKARD Copyright 1997 Hewlett Packard Co Printed in USA 7 97 Manual Part No C4077 90960 Cus at least M l Il I 50 Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10 Post Consumer Paper C4077 90960
62. and ventilation see Figure 2 1 Install printer away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation Systems Site Requirements 2 3 G s uaws1mbay 9S Space Requirements Figure 2 1 73 inches 1854 mm 35 inches 889 mm 14 5 inches 368 mm 11 inches 19 5 inches 48 4 inches 1229 mm Printer Space Requirements 1 Top view 2 Side view Environmental Requirements Keep the printer within the following environmental conditions for optimum performance Table 2 1 Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions em Operating Storage Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 0 to 40 C 50 to 90 5 F 32 to 105 F with no condensation with no condensation Humidity 20 to 80 RH 15 to 90 RH 2 4 Site Requirements Operating Overview Chapter Contents Using the Control Panel 3 3 Control Panel Layout 0 3 3 Indicator Lights ee ka 3 4 Settings and Defaults lll 3 5 Printer Driver Information ee 3 5 Paper Source Default 3 5 Restoring Factory Defaults len 3 6 Setting the Display Language
63. are five cover assemblies in this printer AC Access Cover located at the left rear of the printer o Back Cover provides access to the HVPS DC Controller LVPS and Main Motor Front Cover including front access door Left Lower Cover located below the Diverter Access Door Top Cover provides access to the F ace Down Delivery Unit and Laser Scanner Assembly AC Access Cover 1 Removethe Formatter PCA 2 Remove 3 screws CH 102 Figure 6 3 callout 1 To Reinstall 1 Tuck the panel edge Figure 6 3 callout 2 inside the back cover if installed 2 Besurethat the three alignment tabs Figure 6 3 callout 3 are inserted into their slots before replacing the screws i Pe Ty J CU A Ui HEN E A inim irn e D LIN THE i INFI Pr ie rd y f a a ITee u Eme Nee aN CN ee ae n m imm mis i p me e Eey n e n lg mm xc T E AC Access Cover 6 18 Removal and Replacement Note Figure 6 4 Back Cover The metal back cover and the plastic panel at the right rear are removed as a single unit The square opening at the upper rear corner on the right side plastic panel is the engine test access 1 Remove 5 screws CH 102 Figure 6 4 callout 1 2 Open the top cover door and remove 1 screw CH 102 Figure 6 4 callout 2 3 Open the 2000 Sheet I nput Unit transfer door if installed Tray 1 and the Rig
64. are merely listed with the associated display panel message Troubleshooting 7 23 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Error Log Table Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages Message Description Recommended Action approximately 2 seconds feature Request from the administrator to unlock function CANCELING JOB Status The printer is canceling the currently active No action required If message job displays for over 5 minutes cycle power An extremely large print job with detailed graphics may take up to five minutes to cancel ACCESS DENIED Status After an attempt to select a locked out The JetAdmin Administrator function this message displays for controls the control panel lockout CLEAR JAMMED STAPLE Attendance Staples are jammed in the stapler To clear the jam open the Stapler Required Top Cover Assembly by pressing 13 10 03 the green tab with your thumb and pulling the green circular tab with your forefinger refer to Figure 7 11 Remove loose or damaged staples from the stapler Push the circular tab to snap it back into place Close the lop Cover Assembly NOTE If any staples are removed while clearing a staple jam up to 2 documents may not be stapled when printing resumes because the stapler must reload NOTE Do Not Remove the flat wires Check the Staple Cartridge staples that are in the path of the stapler If Replace it as required Replace they are removed up to 12 documents may the Stapler Top Cover Replace
65. are present under Paper Handling Options Verify that power is supplied the to the 2000 Sheet Feeder Run paper path test from Tray 4 If the test is successful suspect the paper size detection switches for failure or incorrect size specified in the application software Replace PH Controller if not shown on configuration pages Verify C Link cables are connected as shown on Figure 7 7 Reseat C Link Cable and inspect for pushed in pins Replace C Link Cable Replace 2000 Sheet HCI Controller PCA 7 81 Dunoouse qnoJ L 7 82 Print Voids on pages after coming out of POWER SAVE mode Turn POWER SAVE off POWER SAVE is an item under the CONFIGURATION MENU and retry J ams when printing envelopes transparencies or labels to MultiBin Mailbox or Stapler MultiBin Mailbox does not support these media Direct these media to the Left Output Bin top bin of MailBox Stops printing and hangs on certain jobs 1 Remove any non HP Memory Simms and retry 2 Set to 300 DPI and retry Top 2 3 of portrait page is lighter 1 Replace Toner Cartridge and retry 2 Replace Transfer Guide Won t print to Mailbox 1 Print PCL CONFIGURATION PAGES Verify the PH Controller 2000 Sheet Input Feeder and Mailbox are present under Paper Handling Options 2 Replace PH Controller if it is not shown on Config Pages 3 Inspect C Link Cables for pushed out pins 4 Replace C Link Cables 5 CableMailbox direct to printer if it is no
66. assembly 4 Pull the forward end of the assembly away from the chassis to clear the locating pin and slide it forward to clear two retaining tabs Face Up Solenoid Assembly SL3 Removal and Replacement 6 63 9 jueuieooejdey pue enouiay Caution Figure 6 51 Transfer Roller Assembly Handlethe Transfer Roller from the ends only Do not touch the surface of theTransfer Roller Skin oils will affect its electrical characteristics resulting in poor image transfer Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge Grasp the gear Figure 6 51 callout 1 on the left end and carefully lift upward just enough to dear the retainer clip Slide the Transfer Roller Assembly to the left to release the shaft on the right end Figure 6 51 callout 2 To Reinstall Placethe right end of the shaft into its retaining cavity Hold the Transfer Roller wiper up Figure 6 51 callout 3 and slide the assembly to the right until the gear on theleft end is in position Carefully press the left end of the shaft into the retainer clip Press the Transfer Roller wiper down Figure 6 51 callout 3 until the retaining dips snap into place Transfer Roller Assembly 6 64 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 52 Tray 1Assembly Remove the front cover see Figure 6 5 and the back cover see Figure 6 4 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge Open the right lower door Remove 4 screws CH 102 Figure 6 52 c
67. causing the paper jams Note When verifying print jobs ensure that all of the settings are selected as desired Keep in mind that application settings take priority over Driver settings which take priority over the the printer control panel settings Ifa single setting is not present in the application but is set in the driver that will override the front panel settings J etAdmin does have capabilities to override paper types and sizes and certain conditions 7 22 Troubleshooting Note Reference Control Panel Messages and Errors Printer messages displayed on the control panel provide five categories of information Each message category is assigned a priority If more than one condition occurs at the same time the highest priority message is displayed When it has been cleared the next priority message will be displayed and so on The displayed messages and their priorities are e Catastrophic System M essages e Service Messages e Error Messages e Attendance Required M essages e Device Status M essages Error Service and Catastrophic System messages are preceded by a number designation Device Status and Attendance Required messages except for paper jam messages do not have a number designation The Error Log Table is organized by the display panel messages All of the alphabetical messages are listed first followed by numeric display panel messages The error log codes the second column are in no order They
68. displayed on the PCL Configuration Page Set the Cold Reset Paper Size Default This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4 Clear the ERR LOG Initiate the Service Mode as follows Hold down Items and while powering ON the printer until all lights are illuminated and the Display is blank If the Display Panel reads NTERNAL TEST at this point the keys were released too soon Repeat this step until successful Press Select The message SERVI CE MODE is displayed briefly then the printer automatically begins an NTERNAL TEST After several seconds both Control Panel Indicators turn OFF The printer may display WARMI NG UP if it has not warmed up completely After the printer has warmed up and passed the self test SERVI CE MODE is displayed Press Menus once to display SERVI CE MENU To exit the Service Mode press On Line Operating Overview 3 21 e MINIMO Bunerado Table 3 15 Service Mode Menultems Mode Menu Items Service Mode Menu Item Choices Actions Required Items PAGECOUNT nnnnnnn Displays total number of pages printed by the printer Press to step through values above cursor Press Select to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing Menus or Items before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing Menus returns printer to the main menu system
69. displays PRI NTI NG DEMO PAGES Printer returns to READY when finished PRINT ERROR LOG None Press Select to print Printer returns to READY when finished n SHOW ERROR LOG None Press Select to show view Press to display error codes Printer returns to READY when finished PAPER PATH TEST Select output destination and 2 sided printing in CONFI GURATI ON MENU before starting Paper Path Test Press Select Printer displays NPUT TRAY 1 2 3 4 ENVELOPE Press to display choices Press Select to activate choice Printer displays NUMBER OF COPIESz 1 10 50 100 500 Press to display choices Press Select to activate choice Printer displays PRI NTI NG PAPER PATH TEST Printer returns to READY when finished Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated 3 14 Operating Overview Caution Configuration Menu This menu contains the items for Personality Resource Saving and M emory setup Depending on how the printer is configured any combination of menu items and possible values can appear Memory configuration items can be selected only from the printer control panel When changing memory configuration or O Buffering I O Menu the printer will automatically reset All fonts macros and downloaded data except what is stored on the optional Disk Accessory will be lost When changing Configuration M enu items the newly selected values become active when the nex
70. door 9 5 Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit 10 11 Front Door Tray 2 and Tray 3 Fusing Assembly Area Left door Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Note Note Clearing Paper J ams Open and close all printer covers to clear the paper jam message After removing a sheet of paper you may need to check other areas to ensure that all paper has been removed Whenever a sheet of jammed paper becomes badly shredded it is a good idea to carefully piece all parts together to be sure you haven t overlooked some small part All portions of a jammed piece of paper must be removed or you may run into repeated jams If the jam persists try the following If you have PostScript installed usethe AM RECOVERY 0N menu item under the PostScript Menu The printer will attempt to automatically recover from paper jams Execute a formfeed from the computer or the printer s control panel J ob Control M enu A formfeed may flush an paper or envelopes left in the printer Check to make sure you have located and removed all scraps of paper from insidethe printer Usethe Error Log Page and Error Log Codes to aid you in isolating where the errors are occurring Clearing Repeated Paper J ams Check to see that media is correctly loaded in trays and that all width guides are correctly set not skewed Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray if you are using letterhead paper try printing from Tray 1 Do not use previously p
71. driver Printer settings made in the application or print driver always override the corresponding setting made on the printer Control Panel 6 Print the document Paper Curl Paper curl is inherent to thelaser printing processes as it occurs when paper is subjected to heat Paper curl tends to relax as the paper cools while resting on a flat surface The specification for maximum paper curl when the paper is lying flat before print is 5 mm 0 2 inches Although paper curl cannot be totally eliminated some steps can be taken to lessen its impact as suggested in the following table Paper Curl Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Paper Path Try using Tray 1 and output the paper to the face up bin 2 Paper Surface The recommended printing surface of the page is usually marked on the end of a ream of paper indicated by a small arrow and the phrase print this side first Load paper in Tray 1 with the recommended printing surface facing UP facing down in Trays 2 3 and 4 3 Paper Storing and Over time paper assumes the characteristics of its storage Handling environment in a humid environment paper absorbs moisture in a dry environment paper loses moisture Paper with higher moisture content will tend to curl more Evaluate the storage conditions of the paper 4 Paper Type All paper is manufactured differently different textures moisture content drying processes composition etc Change the type of paper being u
72. information about the Country of Origin the Revision Level the Production Code and production number of the printer Therear labels also contain power rating and regulatory information as shown in Figure 1 1 Q HEWLETT A packanon C3166A Complies with Canadian PEE DEN EL ONE Na TE EMC Class B requirements e Pus E BOISE IDAHO 83714 U S A 5 211 Conforme la gass B des normes canadienne de compatibilit 48338 LISTED MONIN um i ff US RE MANUFACTURED RB9 0219 Made in U S A Sample Model and Serial Number Label This device i with Part 15 of the FCC Rul Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This product conforms with CDRH radiation SF chapter 1 standard 21 hae chapter 1 sub chapter J The identification labels for the 2000 Sheet High Capacity Input Tray are located on the back panel directly below the identification labels on the printer Tolocate the identification labels for the 8 bin Multi Bin Mailbox and 5 bin Multi Bin Mailbox with Stapler detach the unit from the printer The identification labels are located on the bottom right of the front side side that attaches to printer Product Information 1 7 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd Specifications This section contains information o
73. left screw Be sure to connect the dutch cable connector After replacing the 4 screws replace the Main Gear Train Shield Tilt the top outward tuck thelower tabs in place and snap the cover down into position The Laser et 55i HM C3124A requires a unique Registration Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 55 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay 6 56 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 44 Registration Assembly 3 of 3 Removal and Replacement 6 57 9 jueuiooejdeyu pue PAOUIOH Roller and Separation Pad Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 Open Tray 1 door and remove the plastic shield 2 Pinch retainer tabs together Figure 6 45 callout 1 and slidethe roller to the left off of the shaft Figure 6 45 Tray 1 Feed Roller 6 58 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 46 Separation Pad Open Tray 1 door and remove the F eed Roller Insert a flat bladed screwdriver into the slot Figure 6 46 callout 2 and carefully pry the separation pad upwards out of its retaining notches To Reinstall Make sure the metal edge of the Separation pad faces forward Tray 1 Separation Pad Removal and Replacement 6 59 9 jueuieooejdey pue enouiay Note Note Figure 6 47 Rollers Tray 2 3 Pickup Feed and Separation There arethree rollers for each tray The Pickup Roller the F eed Roller and the Separation Roller The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between trays Th
74. ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle nakymatt malle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds pa annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP Laser et s 5Si 5Si MX and 5Si Mopier kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil Tallaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita kayttajan kasikirjassa lueteltuja kayttajan teht vaksi tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mikali kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymatt malle lasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa l katso s teeseen VARNING Omlaserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten ar i funktion uts ttas anvandaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin sateilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 777 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser C 2 Regulatory Information Note Note Toner Safety n case of toner spills skin and clothing are best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue then washing with cold water H ot water causes toner to permanently set into dothing MSDS Information A Ma
75. on the display panel do not always correspond The numbers in the display panel message may not be the same in the error log Ensure that you refer to the correct number in the Reference section Display and Evaluate the Error Log If the printer cannot print or move any paper follow these steps to display the error log Press Menu until TEST MENU appears Press Item until SHOW ERROR LOG appears Press Select to show the error log Press toscroll through the error log Write down the error messages For example 30 13 59 11 52100 13 11 PAPER JAM EXTERNAL INPUT DEVIC Error Log on Display Panel Display Panel Message 50 Error Number 13 59 11 Error Log Code 52700 Page Count Check the error log for specific error trends in the last 10 000 printed pages Ask the customer for any observed error trends Record any specific error trends and review the Error Log Interpretation later in this chapter Refer to the error log table in the Reference section and follow the recommended action If the display panel indicates any messages other than Ready Offline or PowerSave restart at step 1 If not go to the next section Troubleshooting 7 9 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Configuration Usethe configuration pages to verify the proper installation of accessories options and personalities When you print the configuration pages the printer checks its internal controller and I
76. or to join CompuServe call 1 800 524 3388 Internet Anonymous ftp library service is available for around the clock access to drivers software and technical support information for HP peripheral and computer products Please note that paths may change without notice Access the Internet or FTP address and use the menus to locate the software or support of your choice URL for Access HP http www hp com URL for Software and Support http www hp com go cposupport FTP address ftp hp com L ogin anonymous Password your Internet name or user identification FTP Path for Drive Software pub printers FTP Path for Network Software pub networking World Wide Web Download printer driver software using www hp com go cposupport HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line TheHardware Technical Support Center HTSC is available for technical support to assist Hewlett Packard authorized service technicians The HTSC can be reached at 1 800 544 9976 between 7 00 A M and 6 00 P M Mountain Standard Time M onday Tuesday Thursday and Friday On Wednesdays the office closes at 4 00 P M Other Areas Outside of North America and Europe contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support 1 26 Product Information Warranty This warranty entitles you to standard warranty services for your printer and accessories and is available from HP worldwide However there may be local variations in the le
77. paper is located directly beneath the feed rollers To watch Tray 3 lift remove Tray 2 and use Tray 2 s cavity to see Tray 3 move into position during power on To watch Tray 2 being lifted remove the duplexer if installed and through the duplex paper jam access door watch Tray 2 being lifted during power on To watch Tray 4 being lifted open the Vertical Transfer Door and then open and close Tray 4 Override the Vertical Transfer Door closed photosensor PS35 refer to Figure 7 16 and see if Tray 4 s paper stack is being lifted 58 1 Tray 2 lifter malfunction 58 2 Tray 3 lifter malfunction 58 3 Tray 1 lifter malfunction 58 4 Tray 4 lifter malfunction The Main Motor is powered by 24VB which is generated when Switch 1401 on the Switch Sensor PCA closes 59 1 Main motor start up failure 59 2 Main motor rotation failure The printer encountered a parity error when accessing either internal memory x 0 or SIMM memory x 1 4 Recommended Action Press Select to continue The printer will ignore the faulty tray until the next power cycle Cycle power If the message persists for Trays 1 2 and 3 Replace the Paper Input Assembly Replace the Main Gear Assembly For Tray 4 check the white bushing located on the lower part of the Main Drive Assembly refer to Figure 6 56 Replace Tray 4 Replace the Gear Assembly Cycle power If the message persists replace the Switch Sensor PCA Check and
78. permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the printer Unlikethe standard printer memory permanently downloaded items remain in the printer even when the printer is powered off Fonts downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the printer Macintosh users can use the HP Laser et Utility and Windows users can use the HP printer driver to download fonts The Printer Hard Disk can also be write protected through software for additional security Refer to the on line help associated with your HP software for more information Product Information 1 19 L uoneunoju jonpo4d If you are a PostScript language programmer refer to Adobe s PostScript Language Reference M anual for information about downloading forms and patterns to the disk For the Macintosh environment refer to the on line help in the HP Laser et Utility Guide included with the HP Laser et Utility software For the Windows environment refer to your HP Windows driver on line help Determining Memory Requirements The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents your print With the PCL printer language your HP Laser et 5Si printer can print most text and graphics at 300 or 600 dpi without additional memory Add memory to your printer if you e commonly print complex graphics e Use many downloaded fonts e Print complex documents e Use advanced functions such as I O Buffering and Resource Saving For the HP Laser et 5
79. photosensors and flags Clutches registration tray pickup and Tray 1 feed EngineTest Motors Main Drive Scanner and Fans Figure 5 2 shows the Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System Refer to the wiring diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for detailed listings of the DC Controller inputs and outputs Laser and Scanner Drive Based on information received from the F ormatter the DC Controller sends signals to the Laser Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser diode ON and OFF and to drive the Laser Scanner motor Refer to I mage Formation System later in this chapter for more information Paper Motion Monitoring and Control The DC Controller PCA controls paper motion by continuously monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating paper movement with the other print processes Clutches The drive signals for the Registration Assembly Clutch CL 1 Paper Input Unit Clutch CL 2 and the Tray 1 Feed Clutch are provided by the DC Controller PCA The control signals for the clutches in the 2000 Sheet Input Unit and Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler are provided by the External Paper Handling PCA mounted on the F ormatter Assembly 5 10 Functional Overview Engine Test Microswitch The Engine Test Microswitch located on the DC Controller PCA is activated manually through the square access hole at the right rear of the printer see Figure 6 4 This switch causes the print engine to perform an internal self
80. power Remove the MIO Card s one at a time and cycle power Try using the parallel interface if possible With the MIO cards out of the printer perform a COLD RESET If error continues replace formatter Write down the page count and serial number 80 SERVICE XXXX CALL Catastrophic An unrecoverable MIO protocol error Record the error message and occurred The numbers xxxx following the the 4 digit code before error indicate the specific error continuing Cycle power If the message persists remove the MIO cards one at a time and cycle power to isolate the problem Try using the parallel interface if possible Replace the defective MIO card If it is an HP card include the 4 digit error code with the defective MIO card and return it to HP for evaluation Replace the Formatter PCA 7 62 Troubleshooting Image Formation Troubleshooting Check the Toner Cartridge I mage formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge problems If thereis any doubt always replace the toner cartridge before troubleshooting image defects Use the following check list to ensure that the toner cartridge is still operable Inspect the toner cartridge for remaining toner Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge stamped on the cartridge box Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled Ensure that the toner cartridge is seated properly in the cavity Inspect the cartridge fo
81. systematic approach that addresses the major problems first and then other problems as you identify the causes for printer malfunctions and errors The Troubleshooting Process Figure 7 1 on the following two pages illustrates the major steps for troubleshooting the printing system Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area After completing the additional testing proceed to the next major step The following list describes the basic questions for the customer and the corresponding troubleshooting step to help you quickly define the problem s Does the display panel indicate Ready Offline or PowerSave Contains the procedures for correcting control panel messages and displaying and correcting error log codes Will the printer print configuration pages successfully Contains the procedures for printing the configuration pages and evaluating and correcting system configuration Does the print quality meet customer expectations Contains the image quality comparison tables cleaning procedures toner cartridge checks and High voltage Power Supply checks Are there recurring problems in the error log Contains information about printing the error log and evaluating the error history Can the customer print from the host sy
82. the Transfer Assembly and rotate the plastic cams Figure 6 64 callout 1 to the open position Unplug the connector Figure 6 64 callout 2 Do not release the plastic cams whilethe Transfer Assembly is removed from the chassis The springs are very strong and may cause injury Remove 2 screws CH 110 Figure 6 64 callout 3 and lift the assembly straight up to clear the metal locating tabs To Reinstall Release the plastic cams only after tightening the screws Make sure that the metal locating tabs are in place before tightening the SCrews Release the plastic cams after tightening the screws 6 78 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 64 Tray 4 Trans fer Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 79 9 jueuieooejdoy pue enouiay Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler Covers The procedure for removing the left and right covers is the same 1 Using a small flat blade screwdriver release 3 retaining tabs Figure 6 65 callout 1 along the rear edge of the cover and rotate the cover dear of the frame To Reinstall Make sure that the retaining tabs along the front edge are in place and snap the rear edge of the cover into position Figure 6 65 6 80 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 66 Delivery Head Assembly Remove the left cover see Figure 6 65 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 or the stapling unit see Figure 6 91 Release the top of the Metallic Tape see F
83. this setting is 20 28 Ib bond If better toner adhesion is desired choose HEAVYPAPERT1 HEAVYPAPERI This mode may be most suitable for 28 36 Ib bond media or heavier label stock If better toner adhesion is desired try HEAVY PAPER2 and evaluate the fusing performance HEAVYPAPER2 This setting is primarily an optional setting for media in the HEAVYPAPERT1 range 36 42 Ib Bond CARDSTOCK 1 Hewlett P ackard recommends this mode as a starting point for all cardstock media 90 Ib Index 43 Ib Bond Do not use this mode for standard or light media If better toner adhesion is desired try CARDSTOCK 2 CARDSTOCK 2 This mode may provide increased toner adhesion over CARDSTOCK 1 CARDSTOCK2 is intended for use with cardstock media 90 Ib Index 43 Ib Bond Do not usethis mode for standard or light media This mode may cause excessive jams or media deformation on standard and light media If better toner adhesion is desired try CARDSTOCK3 CARDSTOCK 3 This mode should only be used if toner is not adhering when using CARDSTOCK1 or CARDSTOCK 2 3 8 Operating Overview Table 3 4 Initial Fuser Mode Recommendation STD HEAVY HEAVY CARD CARD CARD PAPER PAPER1 PAPER2 STOCK1 STOCK2 STOCK3 Typical copy bond paper Heavier copy bond paper Heavier copy bond paper Cardstock heavy paper Cardstock heavy paper Cardstock heavy paper labels envelopes and labels labels transparencies Supports 20 28 Ib Bond Supports 28 36 Ib Bond Supports
84. to be corrected before printing can and correct the error condition continue Cycle power and print PCL configuration pages to verify all devices are shown in printout See error log 13 17 11 13 59 11 See Figure 7 5 INPUT TRAY ALLTRAYS Status The printer will pull paper from all available No action required paper trays INSTALL TONER Attendance The toner cartridge is missing or installed Ensure the toner cartridge is CARTRIDGE Required incorrectly The print engine detects the seated properly or install a new presence of the toner cartridge by reading toner cartridge ensuring it is the voltage at the Toner Registration Toner seated properly If the error Sensor on the High voltage Power Supply persists Check functionality of For sensor location on the power supply the toner cartridge and refer to Figure 7 13 The contact can be High voltage Power Supply accessed from the right hand side wall of the contacts refer to Figure 7 13 toner cartridge cavity in the printer Replace the toner cartridge Replace the High voltage Power Supply INTERNAL TEST Status The printer is executing a non printing self No action required If this test message displays for over three minutes first cycle power If this persists verify that the Formatter connections are secure Then remove all optional SIMMs and MIO s 7 28 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action
85. to run a print job from the host system If the print job is successful proceed to the following step Verification Verify Communication Print the PCL configuration page and study the HP MIO block The MIO block will appear on the bottom portion of the configuration page An example of a properly operating MIO block appears in Figure 7 9 HP MIO 1 HP JETDIRECT J2552A NOVELL STATUS READY TCP IP STATUS 40 FIRMWARE REVISION A 04 08 ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS LANHW ADDRESS 080009E18595 MODE QUEUE SERVER 080009E5B847 Node Name PORT SELECT 10BASE T NODE NAME l OCard ura 3605000703010315 D8 MOPIER Ready sa AREON SERVER NAME BPR TECH SUPPORT I O CARD READY CONFIG BY FRONT PANEL TELNET IP ADDRESS 192 0 0 192 NOVELL RETRANS 868 SUBNETMASK NOT SPECIFIED IP Address Network NETWORK FRAME TYPE RCVD DEF GATEWAY 192 0 0 192 P 46FE0022 EN 802 2 5871371 SYSLOG SERVER NOT SPECIFIED otatistics UNKNOWN EN SNAP 6981 IDLE TIMEOUT SECONDS 120 46200FF1 EN II 4881695 NETWORK STATISTICS UNICAST PACKETS RCVD 736288 77 5 TOTAL PACKETS RCVD 23683942 APPLETALK STATUS READY BAD PACKETS RCVD 3 ETALKNET 391 NODE 170 P2 FRAMING ERRORS RCVD O LTALK NET 0 NODE 146 PACKETS TRANSMITTED 751433 APPLETALK NAME HP LaserJet 5 UNSENDABLE PACKETS 0 Sil ee XMIT COLLISIONS 0 ETALK ZONE BSO Office 2Defau DLC LLC STATUS READY XMIT LATE COLLISIONS 0 tt M
86. with the Laser et 55i HM C3124A Troubleshooting 7 11 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Configuration Page Illustration and Key Figure 7 5 The default S N is LCD peret AAXXY Y99999 To set the correct S N refer to the rine mion SERVICE MODE procedure Formatter Numer 459998 Firmware Datecode 19960829 v9 1 in Chapter 3 of this manual Formatter Number Division use only No functionality or accessibility Formatter and firmware s datecode and version number The three most recent error log messages display here The MIO Block shows network communication See Figure 7 9 Processor Revision 29040 D40d Page Count 1150 Pages Since Last Power Cycle 0 Pages Since Last Maintenance 1150 Installed Personalities and Options PCL 19960829 POSTSCRIPT 19960724 Adobe PostScript anc the PostScript Logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Disk HP 229654 SIMM Slot 1 1 MByte ROM SIMM SIMM Slot 2 8 MByte RAM S MM SIMM Slot 3 Empty SIMM Slot 4 Empty Error Log Number of Entries in Use 34 Maximum Number of Entries 50 Last Three Entries Number Error Page Count 34 13 58 11 949 33 13 49 11 885 32 40 00 00 750 Not Installed Laser er 5 Si ESA Total Memory 12 MBytes Available Memory 8 10 MBytes 1 0 Buffering Not Enabled Need Resource Saving Not Enabled Need 12 MBytes More Memory 11 MBytes More M
87. 01 serv Tray 2 C2931A Tray 3 C2930A not shown Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 not shown Paper Size Guide Label Trays 2 and 3 AAA 10 Duplex Unit C3762A C3762 60501 serv 10 Duplex Unit Heavy Media C4178 69001 ex 11 Duplex Unit Roller 1 RB1 6822 000CN 12 8 bin Multi Bin C3764A C3764 69100 ex 5 bin Mailbox for Stapler C3774A C3766 69515 ex 13 Face Up Bin RB1 6491 000CN 14 MIO Coverplate C2009 00006 15 Stapling Unit C3766 60500 C3766 69500 ex not shown Packaging Kit Printer not shown Packaging Kit Duplex Unit not shown Packaging Kit 2000 Sheet Input Unit not shown Packaging Kit Multi Bin Mailbox not shown Packaging Kit Envelope Feeder not shown Maintenance Kit 100 120V C3971A C3971 69001 ex Maintenance Kit 220 240V C3972A 68972 69001 ex not shown go Go U y ct Uu Q 5 a Y C O Q Q UN Table 8 1 Printer and Paper Handling Components continued Description Product Number Part Number Exchange Service Number QTY not shown C Link Cable Assembly 178 cm HCl to MBM C3764 70000 DENN not shown C Link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to HCI C3763 70000 BEEN not shown 3 Way Power Adapter C4077 60102 O ae not shown C Link Cable Assembly 97 cm MBM to Stapler C3766 60512 BEEN Parts and Diagrams 8 9 9 sweibeig pue sLied PIHI lililo e t Y co Lu oc gt e LL Lu Lu N Printer Covers and Doors Figure 8 2 8 10 Parts
88. 1 12 Product Information Storing Print Media Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing print media Store paper in its ream wrapper until ready to use Re wrap partially used packages of media before storing Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of the other Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the envelope edges Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity extremes DO NOT store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will absorb a higher moisture content nstead place cartons on a pallet or on shelves DO NOT storeindividual reams in a manner that causes them to curl or warp along the edges DO NOT stack more than six cartons on top of each other DO NOT place anything on top of media regardless of whether the paper is packaged or unpackaged DO NOT store printed documents in vinyl folders which may contain plasticizers or expose the documents to petroleum based solvents Shipping Print Media When shipping print media through different environments plastic wrap all cartons on the shipping pallet When shipping media across bodies of water wrap individual cartons as well Packaging must protect the media from physical damage Product Information 1 13 L uoneunoju onpoJd Product Overview External View of HP Laser et 551 55 MX NX and Mopier Engine Figure 1 2 o o Oo o OQ HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX NX and Mopier Engine Front and Right Side View wi
89. 32 callout 5 are properly aligned Figure 6 32 DC Controller PCA Removal and Replacement 6 47 9 juaua9e day pue enouiay PCA Output Paper Sensor 1 Removethe following components in the order listed e Toner Cartridge e Formatter Assembly see Figure 6 24 AC Access Cover see Figure 6 3 Top Cover see Figure 6 8 Back Cover see Figure 6 4 Fan 3 and Housing Assembly see Figure 6 20 HVPS see Figure 6 40 DC Controller PCA see Figure 6 32 2 Remove 7 screws CH 101 Figure 6 33 callout 1 and remove the Formatter PCA cage 3 Remove 5 screws CH101 Figure 6 34 callout 2 and remove the Formatter PCA grounding strip 4 Remove 3 screws CH 102 Figure 6 35 callout 3 and remove the plastic PCA shield Note the positioning of the metal grounding fingers at the left of the shield 5 Unplugthe connector Figure 6 36 callout 4 6 Remove 2 screws CH 101 Figure 6 36 callout 5 and unplug the connector on the back side of the PCA To Reinstall Make sure that the sensor flags rotate freely and that the top cover and Diverter doors operate the microswitch SW 1401 6 48 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Output Paper Sensor PCA 2 of 4 Removal and Replacement 6 49 9 jueuieooejdoy pue enouiay 50 Removal and Replacement 6 Note Figure 6 37 PCA Paper Size 1 Removethe following components in the order listed e Toner Cartridge e
90. 4 120 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 45 Watts Maximum 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 45 Watts Maximum Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 45 Watts Maximum Operating current requirements Product Information 1 9 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd Table 1 8 Acoustic Emissions Operation position per ISO 9296 Printer Printer System stand alone Printing Lpa dB A 54 db 56 db Standby Lpa dB A 42 db 42 db Bystander 1m per ISO 9296 Printing Lpa dB A Standby Lpa dB A Sound Power per ISO 9296 Printing LWAD 6 6 bels A 7 1 bels A Standby LWAD 5 5 bels A 5 5 bels A Printer System includes the 2000 Sheet Input Unit Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler Duplex Unit and Envelope Feeder 1 10 Product Information Note Caution Media Selection Guidelines More detailed specifications are in the HP Laser et 5Si and 5Si MX User s Guide and the HP Laser el Printer Family Paper Specification Guide See Re ated Documentation and Training Media later in this chapter Paper Toachieve the best possible print quality and avoid paper jams follow these guidelines for selecting paper Use only copier grade paper that meets all specifications in the paper specification guide Avoid paper with embossed lettering perforations or texture that is too smooth or too rough Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white photocopy paper The pigments must withstand the fusin
91. 40V ONLY Figure 5 2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System Functional Overview 5 5 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny AC Power Distribution The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected and the power switch is ON A toner cartridge must be installed and the top access door must be closed before AC voltage is supplied to the DC power circuits or the Fusing Assembly Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection There aretwo overcurrent overvoltage devices in this printer Theresettable circuit breaker CB 101 shuts off AC input power to the LVPS in case of an AC overcurrent condition To reset remove the LVPS and press in the circuit breaker button Figure 5 3 callout 1 Fuse 101 interrupts AC input power to the 24V DC and 45V DC power circuits To check or replace the fuse Figure 5 3 callout 2 you must remove theL VPS Figure 5 3 Low Voltage Power Supply 5 6 Functional Overview Figure 5 4 High Voltage Power Distribution The High Voltage Power Supply HVPS see Figure 5 4 applies a DC biased AC voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing roller and a programmed DC voltage depending upon the phase of the printing process tothe Transfer Roller Refer tothe General Timing Diagram Figure 5 22 at the end of this chapter for HVPS timing information Toner Cartridge Detection A toner level detector inside the toner cartridge is connected to the HVPS when the toner cartridge is i
92. 5 4 t 1 I Controller PCA 5V REGI L when the sensor detects paper 45V JAM L when the sensor detects paper 45V PAP EXIST L when there is no paper in the tray 45V DOOR L when the feed cover is opened 45V LIFT H when paper is detected PAP VOL1 PAP VOL2 Detects the level of paper PAP SIZE1 PAP SIZE2 PAP SIZE3 Detects the size of the paper PAP SIZE4 2000 Sheet Input Unit Controller PCA Inputs Troubleshooting 7 95 Dunoouse qnoJ L Controller PCA J118 4 J204 3 DCMOT RDY L when deck motor rotates normally 3 4 1 2 DCMOT ON Deck motor is driven when L Deck motor 24V J117 1 J116 4 J205 1 FEDBND FEDBD ick E tor rotation Pick up motor Gurs 3 2 3 FEDAND Pick up motor ro control signal FEDAD 24V J11 2 J206 1 Lifter clutch 2 LIFTCL Lifter rises when L 24V Registration J203 i 1102 8 Hors gens clutch REGICL Registration roller rotates when L 24V 1205 1 J102 10 J101 1 J207 10 peste 2 E 9 FEEDCL Feed roller rotates when L 24V Pick up J115 1 Ji14 2 J208 2 solenoid SL31 PICKUPS Aae barin ts Figure 7 37 2000 Sheet Input Unit Controller PCA Outputs 7 96 Troubleshooting 7 Troubleshooting Pick up motor SMT31 Paper level Paper size sensing sensing switch PCA Lifter clutch Deck motor switch PCA SWT7O1 o o CL31 MT31 SW702 o o s SW601 J119 4 1 J118
93. 5 are related to invalid device configuration Recommended Action Cycle power If the message persists verify that the SIMM module is installed correctly Turn off the printer remove the SIMM module then turn on the printer If the message does not display replace the defective SIMM If the message continues repeat the step above for the remaining SIMM modules to isolate the problem If the message continues with no SIMMs installed replace the Formatter PCA Cycle power If the message persists replace the DC Controller PCA Replace the Formatter PCA Cycle power If the message persists replace the Formatter PCA For error codes 1 22 Verify C Link Cables are installed correctly refer to Figure 7 7 Print the PCL configuration pages Note which installed devices are NOT present on configuration pages refer to Figure 7 5 Replace the External Paper Handling Controller If problems persist reduce the printer to a minimum configuration For example start with the Formatter PCA only and print the PCL configuration pages Add the External Paper Handling Controller no cable and print the PCL configuration pages Add the C Link Cable to the 2000 Sheet Input and retry until all devices are added or the failing device is identified Replace the controller for the failing Paper Handling Device For errors 66 00 14 through 66 00 22 the printer may have possible short term AC power failures Replace the
94. 9 8 sweibeig pue Sued O Lo a ST O N ha oO 2 SA OS 7 PDAs a MZ 15 2 Yr RES d o o a CH108 8 60 CH110 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components Figure 8 7 8 20 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 7 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components pesetas O emm a 6 9 9 ICI 9 TY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 2 Parts and Diagrams 8 21 8 sweibeig pue sed 32 J210 Von A Figure 8 8 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components 8 22 Parts and Diagrams ND J114 J101 J209 35 550 3 J J701 J203 28 J901 CH108 26 Table 8 8 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components z T 2225 o T s mE 7 z Screw TP M4X6 Parts and Diagrams 8 23 8 sweibeig pue Sued CH113 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 1 of 3 Figure 8 9 8 24 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 9 1 1 0 1 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 1 of 3 Spacer plastic C3764 60524 Metallic Box C3764 60523 Multi bin Mailbox Controller PCA C3766 60535 Stapling Unit Exchange C3766 69500 CH112 screw Torx T20 M4X10 C3764 60519 Bin Assembly 8 pak C3766 60536 Parts and Diagrams 8 25 y 8 sweibeig pue Sued Figure 8 10 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler C
95. Assembly is not heated sufficiently to bond the toner image to the paper 5 DC Controller is defective The DC Controller If a new Fusing Assembly does not resolve the regulates fusing roller temperature problem replace the DC Controller PCA Background Scatter or Leading Edge Halo Possible Cause Recommended Action Random Background Scatter 1 Paper does not meet specs The moisture Try a different media or paper lot see HP content conductivity or surface finish may not LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications work correctly with the electrophotographic Guide process 2 Inside of printer is dirty toner may have Clean inside of printer see Chapter 4 Install a leaked out of the toner cartridge new toner cartridge if leaking 3 Printing on envelope seams Printing on an Move the text to an area without seams If not envelope seam can cause a background scatter printing on seams try a higher print density problem setting see item 6 below 4 Defective toner cartridge Install a new toner cartridge 5 Dirty or worn Transfer Roller Aworn Transfer Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry lint free Roller can cause background scatter due to cloth DO NOT touch the Transfer Roller with improper bias voltages your fingers If the problem persists replace the Transfer Roller Assembly 6 Print Density set too low causing background Adjust the print density to a higher setting scatter particularly with enve
96. B and the toner cartridge cavity Use the brush supplied with the printer to remove residue from tight areas 4 Replacethe toner cartridge dose the printer reconnect all cables and switch the printer ON Table 4 1 Note Cleaning the Printer Cleaning Method Notes Outside Covers Use a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside General Use a dry lint free cloth Remove all dust spilled toner and paper particles Paper Pickup Feed and Use a water dampened lint free cloth Retard Rollers Separation Pad Use a dry lint free cloth Registration Roller Use a dry lint free cloth Transfer Roller Use a dry lint free cloth DO NOT TOUCH with your fingers Fuser Assembly Use a water dampened lint free cloth Cleaning Spilled Toner Defective toner cartridges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam may pick up this toner Clean spilled toner with a cloth slightly dampened in cold water Do not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro fine particle filter If toner gets on your clothing use cold water to remove it Hot water sets toner stains into fabric Maintenance and Adjustments 4 5 y sjueunsn py Y ooueuoQjureJy Note Preventative Mainten
97. Bin Full Sensor Figure 5 21 Stapler Sensors and Motors Functional Overview 5 35 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny The major assemblies and subassemblies of the stapler are shown in Table 5 7 Table 5 7 Major Assemblies and Subassemblies of the Stapler Major Assembly Stapling Bed Assembly Top Cover Assembly Housing Stapling Unit Controller PCA Subassemblies Retainer Assembly Sliders Assembly Stapler Assembly Rack Assembly Registration Pusher Off Set Pusher Exit Flap Assembly Output Bin Bin Full Sensor Actuator Wire Frame Z gt Mailbox with Stapler Operation All communication and control of the Mailbox the 2000 Sheet I nput Tray and the Stapler is through the External Paper Handling Controller EPH PCA mounted in the Formatter Assembly These instructions are sent to the stapler controller PCA located in the lower part of the stapling unit The main components of the stapler are listed in Table 5 6 Power is provided to the stapler by the Multi Bin M ailbox M ailbox With Stapler external 24Vdc power supply through the CLINK cable The stapler is mounted in the Multi Bin Mail box M ailbox With Stapler replacing the three top output bins It handles letter and A4 sizes plain paper The stapler can staple up to a maximum of 20 sheets Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler Paper Feed Cycle The Stapling Bed Assembly receives the paper from the Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox With Stapl
98. C3763 60500 Packaging Kit 2000 Sheet Input Unit C3763 70000 C Link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to HCI C3763A 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 C3764 60500 Packaging Kit Multi Bin Mailbox 01 C3764 60501 Flipper Assembly no cable C3764 60502 Delivery Head Assembly for Multi bin 09 U U c O O n o o x O c o 5 em em 0 lt lt O O f e 2 e A m Parts Index A 11 Xopu Sued V Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued Description 8 09 8 11 8 11 8 10 8 10 mb Face Up Bin O C N D T D e Oi O Oi Delivery Head Position Motor Cable Holder Flat Jam Access Door Assembly A O O w o J olo e DN olo o o ala 10 w N o iv OO oio Il Il lol O O IOIO e oOo 0o Ol i iojo ojlo MINI gt OTN FA O CO N O FR O O C1 BA O CO O C Metal Tape Holder oro O W n o O gt OIO Ojo C1 Ol lI O Ol F O O N Mounting Shaft Hex Mounting Shaft e Clip 8 10 8 10 8 09 8 11 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 09 8 09 8 09 O C N 9 T D e Oi N o N Spring right jam access door Screw Torx T20 M4X10 Screw Torx T20 M4X10 Screw Torx T20 M4X12 CH112 CH112 CH111 Metalic Tape and Housing Assy alalalalalalalalalalala OIII Oo a TwPol_ wo wo w oo NIJNININ TNINININ JNINININ Oo oj o j oj oj oj oj olj olj olj oljo pie e SS 2 e 8 8
99. Controller Replace the Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 35 Bunoouse qnoJ L Figure 7 16 PSEntry PS1402 PS1403 O PS31 Tray 4 Transfer Door Registration Photsensor PS32 Tray 4 Transfer Door Paper J am Photosensor PS2 Paper Input Unit Paper J am Photosensor PS1 Registration Assembly P hotosensor PS1403 Fusing Exit Photosensor PS1402 Face Down Delivery Paper J am Photosensor PS Entry Flipper Assembly of Multi Bin Mailbox Sensor Flag Locations Along the Paper Path 7 36 Troubleshooting General Paper Path Troubleshooting Paper jams occur in the printer when paper does not either reach or dear a photosensor along the printer s paper path in a specific amount of time If a paper jam occurs a 13 xx PAPER AM message is displayed on the printer s Control Panel Thefollowing lists general questions you should ask and topics you should explore prior to troubleshooting General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions a What is the frequency of the Verify with customer Print or Show Error Log to determine paper paper jams e g continuous jam history See the Display and Error Log Sections of this Chapter one jam per 100 pages one land evaluate error log jam per 1000 pages etc Do paper jams only occur See Verification Section of this chapter and use Paper Path Test to when the paper is fed from a isolate problem particular paper input source e g Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 or Envelope Feeder
100. E Phone numbers for the various sources are e SMO Support Materials Organization 1 800 227 8164 U S Only e SME Support Materials Europe 49 7031 142253 e HP s Distribution Center HPD 1 303 353 7650 Exchange Program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Parts Direct Ordering PDO Support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME Product Information 1 21 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd Figure 1 6 Note Consumables The printer has two consumables the toner cartridge and staple cartridges which may be ordered directly from H ewlett Packard Refer to Chapter 8 for ordering information Toner Cartridge Life The Toner Cartridge C3909A is designed to simplify replacement of the major consumable parts Thetoner cartridge contains the printing mechanism and a supply of toner At 596 page coverage a toner cartridge is guaranteed to print approximately 15 000 images see Figure 1 6 EKKZ 5 COVERAGE KKKEEEKKEEEEZZZE EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKKEEEKKEEEEZZZE KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKKEEEKKEEEEZZZE KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKE KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZ
101. ED PATH PAPER STOPPED JAM 2000 Sheet Input Tray Paper Jams 11 2000 Sheet High Capacity Input related Paper Jam messages Several of these message are further explained later in this reference table Multi Bin MailBox Paper Jams 12 Multi Bin MailBox MailBox with Stapler Paper Jam Recommended Action Paper Jam message 13 7 through 13 10 involve paper jams related to the Duplex Module Paper is diverted into the Duplex module after leaving the Fusing Assembly The paper is then turned around and re fed into printer s paper path refer to Figure 7 16 To view a duplex print operation remove Tray 3 and initiate a duplex print job from the printer s Control Panel you should be able to observe the trailing edge of the paper being turned around in the Tray 3 paper cavity For duplex print problems first re seat the module If problems persist replace the complete Duplex Assembly The Fusing Assembly and Diverter Assembly may also cause duplex printing problems Verify their operation This group of errors is related to the first device on in the C Link daisy chain see Figure 7 7 in the supported configuration this should be the 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray The known individual error log messages are documented in this Reference Table in numerical order refer to the error log column of this table This group of errors are related to the second device on in the C Link daisy chain see Figure 7 6 in the
102. EET INPUT TRAY C3763A LA Lasenter E Si db Printer Information _ Serial Number AAXXYY9999 Formatter Number A99999 Firmware Datecode 19960510 v6 1 Processor Revision 29040 D40d Page Count 0 Pages Since Last Power Cycle 0 Pages Since Last Maintenance 0 6 Installed Personalities and Options PCL 19960510 POSTSCRIPT 19960513 Adobe PostScript and the PostScript Logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions SIMM Slot 1 4 MByte ROM SEMM SIMM Slot 2 Empty SIMM Slot 3 Empty SIMM Slot 4 4 MByte ROM SIMM Input Trays Oes 1 TRAY 4 2000 Sheets Device 2 Number of Entries in Use 1 Maximum Number of Entries 50 HEWLETT PACKARD MULTIBIN MAILBOX Last Three Entries Output Bins 20 MBytes More Memory BNP3618 B0 Number Error Page Count 1 68 0020 0 la OPTIONAL OUTBI OPTIONAL OUTBI OPTIONAL OUTBI OPTIONAL OUTBI 5 OPTIONAL OUTBI OPTIONAL OUTBI 125 Sheets 250 Sheets 250 Sheets 250 Sheets 250 Sheets 250 Sheets Face Up Face Down Face Down Face Down Face Down Face Down Device 3 HEWLETT PACKARD STAPLER MODULE Qutput Bins 1 OPTIONAL OUTBIN 7 350 Sheets 3 1 T T6201 Face Down HP MIO 1 HP MIO 2 HP JETDIRECT J2552A NOVELL STATUS 16 TCP IP STATUS FIRMWARE REVISION xmgl2PT NOT CONFIGURED Not Installed LAN Hw ADDRESS 0800091CA491 MODE POR
103. Guide Spring C3764 60563 Pulley small C3764 60564 Flat Cable Kit Includes Flat Cable C3764 60545 Cable C3764 67903 Holder flat C3764 60513 Cable Holder edge C3764 60566 6 Parts and Diagrams 8 27 8 sweibeig pue sLied I O A 1 ds gt E 49 N S d NAS SN AAA es m Ec EST uu Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 3 of 3 8 28 Parts and Diagrams Figure 8 11 Table 8 11 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 3 of 3 Input Paper Guide C3764 60561 Screw Torx T20 M4X10 C3764 60519 Parts and Diagrams 8 29 QT Y 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 8 sweibeig pue sLied Figure 8 12 Stapling Unit Internal Components 8 30 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 12 Stapling Unit Internal Components Re h OIOI AIOTITN not shown 8 not shown 9 O Description Part Number ty Kit Plastic staple cover scan bar shown O bin full sensor acutator and flag not shown Kit T10 Torx screws 10 E C Link Cable 97 cm C3766 60512 1 Parts and Diagrams 8 31 9 sweibeig pue sed 8 32 Parts and Diagrams Parts Index Parts Index A 1 Alphabetical Parts Index Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Tray Assembly 3 Way Power Adapter 20T Gear 420 MB Disk Cable Assembly 420 MB Disk Drive Exchange 420 MB Disk Left Mounting Bracke
104. IMPROPER PAPER SIZE CONTINUE ON the printer will x 4 NO VIDEO SYNC automatically continue printing x 5 NOISY VIDEO SYNC REQ SIGNAL when this error occurs For improper paper size errors check for paper jams Refer to 13 x PAPER JAM earlier in this table for more information If the error persists cycle power to the printer 50 x FUSER ERROR i The fuser is malfunctioning which may be Turn off the printer for at least 20 CYCLE POWER from either an overheating or under heating minutes and then turn it back on condition If the error continues Verify that the Fusing Assembly is installed Fuser low temperature failure correctly and is fully seated into Warm up failure timed out its connectors no bent pins or Over temperature failure pins outside their receptacles Bad fuser Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly Replace the DC Controller xX XK X XK Ho d L Ig ROD If LaserJet 5Si HM the Thermal Control PCA is Thermal Control PCA malfunctioning instead of the fuser 7 50 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Message 51 x ERROR CYCLE POWER 52 x ERROR CYCLE POWER 53 xy zz MEMORY ERR CYCLE POWER 54 2 SIDED ERROR CHECK DUPLEXER Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description A laser subsystem problem exists 1 Beam detect malfunction X x 2 Laser malfunction Ascanner subsystem problem exists 1 Scanner start up failure 2 Scanner rotation failure ASIMM memory er
105. IO Block on Configuration Page If the MIO J et Direct Card has successfully powered up and completed its internal diagnostics the I O CARD READY message will appear If communication is lost an I O NOT READY message appears followed by a two digit error code Consult the HP J etDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action The Network Statistics column indicate that the network activity has been occurring Bad packets framing errors un sendable packets and collisions should be minimal If a high percentage greater than one percent of these occur contact the network administrator All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered off Troubleshooting 7 19 Dunoousoe qnoJ L The Novell Status block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is connected If the node name reads NPI Xxxxxx Voooooc ast six digits of the MI O s LAN address the MIO card has not been configured for a Novell server This could indicate that the card is operating under a I PX protocol other than Novell Consult with the network administrator if the Node Name is not present e IntheTCP IP protocol block the default IP address is 192 0 0 192 It is acceptable to operate the printer with this default address The error message ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS may appear in this block This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP IP protocol is not being used Please chec
106. IS LNALMO dOl NOIIVNIISaSGO uadvd NO 440 Ado dqaars t ANAN NOIIVHuDDIJNOO SGNODES 0O0t S SQNO0E8 ST LDOSMIL OF MOOLS CAWI TWANWN SUASA LTASNOD T Uadd AAVHH HHSnd s t ALISNZ0A INIUd NO HONI uad SLOG 009 4dO HONI dad SLOG OOEt 4A4O ANXAOONM WNL HONI Wad SLOG 009 NO NOILn IOS3 ddo 440 8304U3 XLdINOSISOd INTUA aa miva aava o WOWER nous bor oa ata ea oa OVd ANOIONMIG 38IQ LSI I LNOd LdIu2SISOd ZOVd HOIIVUSODIANOO X1d4IWDBLSOd aqaz4wxod OL 101198 SSXNHd SOC HONS SG 727777 Tiras NH PCL Menu Map Page Figure 3 3 3 28 Operating Overview Table 3 17 Key to Figure 3 3 1 NO oO fF C PD 00 Tray Menu lists the current media types settings and for Tray 1 or the Envelope Feeder the media size Job Control Menu shows the Cancel Job and Form Feed times Test Menu lists the different available printer tests PCL Menu lists the PCL font settings used Configuration Menu lists the current settings for the configuration items Print Quality Menu lists the current settings for the different print quality items PostScript Menu appears if the PostScript option is installed This menu lists the current settings for the two PostScript menu items IO Menu lists the current settings for the Parallel IO Speed IO Timeout and IO Buffer HP MIO Menu s list the current settings for the HP MIO option Operating Overview 3 29 e MINIMO Bunerado Caution
107. KZK EKEKEK EKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKE KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKEZZZ KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE EE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE Sample 596 Page Coverage Thetoner cartridge may print less than 15 000 images if routinely printing very dense print Conversely when routinely printing pages with less coverage such as short memos or in EconoM ode the toner cartridge may print more than 15 000 images However E conoM ode does not extend toner cartridge component life For best results always use a new toner cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the toner cartridge box 1 22 Product Information Refilled Toner Cartridges amp Non HP Staple Cartridges
108. LA prexano HP LaserJet 551 Family A Printers Service Manual Service Manual HP Laser et 5Si C3166A HP Laser et 551 MX C3107A HP Laser et 551 NX C3950A HP Laser et 55 HM C3124A HP Laser et 551 Mopier C4076A C4077A C4176A O Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1997 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Publication number c4077 90960 First edition September 1997 Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard tothis material including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not beliable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damaged in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid electrical shock use only supplied power cords and connect only to properly grounded 3 hole wall outlets Note Caution WARNING Conventions This manual uses the following conventions The names of major printer parts and assemblies are Capitalized Color is used to emphasize items which are important to the material
109. LWET 192 0 0 192 NOT SPECIFIED Check the Total Memory to see if it corresponds with what is physically installed in the printer All the paper handling devices that are physically present should be listed in this section Verify that each device is connected according to Figure 7 7 When configured correctly Device 122000 Sheet Configuration Page Example 7 12 Troubleshooting Input Tray Device 2 Mailbox Device 3 Stapler Menu Page Example Figure 7 6 O seien on gm Menu Bl PAcKkARD ser et 5si Page ma c DM 1 TYPE jj PCL ii SOURCEeINTERMAL 2 BIDEDAOFF PLAIN COMFIGURATION PAGE INTERNAL OFF TRAY 1 SIZE POSTSCRIPT MUNBER ON LETTER CONFIGURATION PAGE 0 22 PAPER DESTINATION c POSTSCRIPT OPTIONAL OUTBIN E pue DISK OPTIONAL OUTBIN mum 0 7 M up OPTIONAL OUTBIN OPTIONAL OUTBIN PRINT ERROR LOG OPTIONAL OUTBIN ORIENTATION PAPER PATH TEST PORTRALT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE POWER SAVE DELATs 1 HOUR OFF 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 3 HOURS PERSONALITY PRINT POSTSCR ERRORS OFF OPF ON RESOLUTION 600 DOTS FER INCH JAM RECOVERYsOPF 300 DOTS PER INCH OFF 600 DOTS PER IWCH ON RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT ON OFP ON PRINT DENSITY 3 1 5 Menu Page Example Troubleshooting 7 13 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Communications Link C Link Cables Figure 7 7 Short C Link Cable 24 inches 61 cm For
110. Messages continued Description This message displays after the engine test button is pressed and indicates that the engine test is in process If the test fails an error or attendance message displays Aform feed is in process This message displays while the upper HP MIO card initializes The printer supports I O switching and remains online but the channel is not active during initialization NOTE Since older MIO cards cannot remove the message the printer will remove the message after a 5 minute timeout This message displays while the lower HP MIO card initializes The printer supports I O switching and remains online but the channel is not active during initialization NOTE Since older MIO cards cannot remove the message the printer will remove the message after a 5 minute timeout The upper MIO card is not ready One of two situations may occur First the parallel port and the lower MIO card may continue to operate nominally If the upper MIO card is operating correctly and communicating with the network this message will disappear after approximately one minute No action is required Second if the upper MIO card is unable to communicate with the network this message will display for five minutes and then disappear In this case the printer is not communicating with the network even though the message is no longer displayed Upon power up the MIO cards perform a self test to complete initialization Verif
111. NIX AI X HP UX Solaris or SunOS which must be purchased separately Network software configuration information for the printer is located in the HP J etDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide included with the HP Laser et 5Si MX printer ToEnter the MIO Menu Press On Line totakethe printer offline Press Menu until MI 0 MENU appears Press Item until CFG NETWORKzNO appears Press until CFG NETWORK YES appears Press Select CFG NETWORK YES appears Table B 1 Configuring Novell NetWare Frame Type Parameters Normally selecting a NetWare frame type is not required The HP J etDirect card automatically selects a NetWare frame type and only when this selection is incorrect do you have to set the NetWare frame type through the HP Laser et 55i MX control panel TheNetWare frametypeis displayed on the self test page To manually configure Novell NetWare parameters 1 Press item until CFG NOVELLzNO appears 2 Press until CFG NOVELL YES appears 3 Press Select CFG NOVELL YES appears 4 Press tem FRAME AUTO appears 5 Toconfigure the Novell NetWare protocol Press to select one of these frame types Novell NetWare Frame Types on an HP JetDirect Ethernet Card Frame Type Description AUTO default All listed Novell frame types will be allowed Limit frame types to IPX over IEEE 802 3 frames All others will be counted and discarded Limit frame types to IPX over Ethernet II fram
112. O O O O O O O O OIOITIO zZziziz O ER m N Xopu Sued V JJ I 3 nN Q5 ku o e e O Z DIDI DiIiDiIivnDin NniN T T T TI SS N 7 O 7o7o7 7 ola3 2 zimi nm SJal eo oej o ve jdovo e lolele2 els sielsis eciloiloloeliolo Ololol9o9lolo Zziziziziziz Electromagnetic Clutch 2 Electromagnetic Clutch Paper Feed 8 04E Conductive Bushing 8 04A N gt JJ 109 g ND O O O O Z Parts Index A 17 Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued lt U N O O ER m C2 E O Z Fuse LVPS Universal 8 06 O5A Panno Cr Re Fuse LVPS Universal S VS1 5057 007CN 8 06 13A XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder 8 02 CH101 XA Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder 8 03 CH101 XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder 8 05 CH101 XA9 0267 000CN Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder 8 06 CH101 XA9 0547 000CN Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and lock washer 8 02 CH102 XA9 0547 000CN Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and lock washer 8 03 CH102 XA9 0605 000CN Screw tapping M4X8 8 03 CH114 XA9 0817 000CN Screw w washer M3X20 8 03 CH105 XA9 0817 000CN Screw w washer M3X20 CH105 T N R e e co e O Z 8 05 8 02 8 05 8 05 8 06 CH106 CH107 CH107 CH104 CH104 CH110 CH110 CH108 CH108 CH109 Screw tapping truss head M3X8 Screw tapping pan head M4X10 T N BA O O O co O z Screw tapping pan head M4X10 Screw CT M3X3 Screw CT M3X3 Screw TP M3X6 Sc
113. ONT LIST Status This message displays while the printer No action required prints a font list PRINTING PAPER PATH Status This message displays during a paper path No action required To stop the test This test can print 1 10 50 100 or 500 pages TEST test access the JOB CONTROL PROCESSING JOB FROM Status The printer is processing data from the active No action required ENV FEEDER I O channel Some data is printed and some data cannot be printed such as downloading menu and select CANCEL JOB fonts or macros The media source is the Envelope Feeder 7 30 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Printer Control Panel Messages continued lt continued Message Description Recommended Action Message PROCESSING JOB FROM Status The printer is processing data from the active If an incorrect tray is displayed I O channel Some data is printed and some check the tray selected and the data cannot be printed such as downloading type settings If printer does not fonts or macros The media source is the respond after pressing the control indicated tray panel keys cycle power to clear the error x tray number 1 Tray 1 Note If paper is loaded when the 2 Tray 2 printer is in POWER SAVE it may 3 Tray 3 not be recognized Open and 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit close the affected source when printer is in READY mode READY Status This is the default message The printer is No action req
114. PCA s micro processor is functional If the fans are NOT working turn off the printer and remove the printer s Formatter PCA Disconnect all the printer s paper handling options Then turn on the printer and check the fans again If the fans are still not working perform the following steps 1 Verify that all fans are connected to the DC Controller PCA according to Figure 7 33 2 Replace the low voltage DC power supply 3 Replace the DC Controller PCA If the fans are working but the printer s Control Panel is blank print an engine test See the section titled Engine Test If the engine test was successful perform the following steps 1 Reseat or replace the cable from the Control Panel which is connected to J203 of the DC Controller PCA see Figure 7 35 2 Replace the printer s Formatter PCA 3 Replace the Control Panel assembly If the engine test was not successful verify that no paper is in the paper path Retry the engine test If the engine test is still unsuccessful replace the DC Controller PCA Figure 7 3 Fan 1 Exhaust Intake Fan 2 Exhaust Fan Location and Airflow Note When the printer is in PowerSave mode the fans are off Table 7 2 Fans Laser Scanner fan Formatter intake Face down Delivery Unit Low voltage Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 7 Dunoouse qnoJ L Note Figure 7 4 Engine Test The engine test verifies that the print engineis functioning c
115. Parts Lists Thefollowing illustrations and their assorted parts tables list the field replaceable components for this printer Where applicable the exchange part number is listed immediately following the original equipment part numbers Appendix A provides two cross reference tables of all the parts listed in this chapter Table A 1 lists the parts in alphabetical order and Table A 2 lists the parts in numerical order Both tables are cross referenced to the appropriate figure and reference designator in this chapter Parts and Diagrams 8 5 9 sweibeig pue sLied d Diagrams 8 6 Partsan Figure 8 1b LJ 5Si Mopier Family and Paper Handling Components Parts and Diagrams 8 7 8 sweibeig pue Sued Table 8 1 Printer and Paper Handling Components Description Product Number Part Number Exchange Service Number QTY Formatter Assembly C3168 67905 Formatter Assembly Exchange 01 e 1A 01 02 03 C3168 69005 ex Formatter Assembly Heavy Media C3125 60001 serv PostScript SIMM C3169A 13169 69001 ex 420 MB Disk Drive C2965A 03A 420 MB Disk Drive Exchange not shown 420 MB Disk Left Mounting Bracket not shown 420 MB Disk Right Mounting Bracket not shown 420 MB Disk Cable Assembly 04 External Paper Handling Controller PCA Toner Cartridge C3909A Envelope Feeder C3765A C3765 60501 serv C2965 69001 ex 05 07 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 C3763A C3763 69501 ex C3763 605
116. Scanner Assembly 7 High voltage contact springs are dirty or Check the contacts for functionality If dirty clean defective The high voltage contacts are using alcohol if damaged replace the High mounted on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity 8 High Voltage Power Supply PCAis defective Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA 9 DC Controller PCAis defective The DC Replace the DC Controller PCA Controller supplies the proper voltage to the High Voltage Power Supply PCA 7 66 Table 7 9 Dropout Possible Cause Recommended Action AaBbCc 1 Single sheet of paper defective Try reprinting the job AabbCc 2 Paper does not meet specs The paper Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer AaGabCc moisture content conductivity or surface finish Family Paper Specifications Guide may not work correctly with the AaBbCc electrophotographic process AROB 9Cc 3 DC Controller defective low primary voltage Replace the DC Controller 4 High Voltage Power Supply PCA defective Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA 5 Transfer Roller defective Replace the Transfer Roller Table 7 10 Black Lines parallel or perpendicular to path Possible Cause Recommended Action pev 1 Toner cartridge not seated properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it AGE LAGBbte 2 Toner cartridge is damaged Inspect the toner cartridge for a scratched or s
117. Sheet Input Unit Device 2 Multi Bin Mailbox Power off reseat verify connector is not broken then replace duplex cable and or duplex unit and power on Power off reseat or replace envelope feeder and power on Verify C Link cables are installed correctly see Figure 7 7 Remove all C Link connections and visually inspect for connector damage on the cable pins and connector ends Try using a different cable to connect the problem device directly to the External Paper Handling Controller All C Link cables are wired the same but are different lengths If a device is not recognized replace device controller or defective C link cable Verify AC power is present in the 2000 Sheet Input Unit Note The tray will not lift if C link cable is not connected properly to External Paper Handling Controller Verify that the external DC power supply is receiving power Verify that the external DC power supply output is connected to the Multi Bin Mailbox controller Note The Multi Bin Mailbox will not appear on the PCL configuration page without the C Link cables properly installed external power applied or if Fuse F202 in 2000 Sheet Input Unit s Controller PCA is blown Replace external DC power supply Replace Multi Bin Mailbox controller After verifying that the PCL configuration pages accurately reflect the installed devices proceed to the section titled I mage Quality Multi Bin Mailbox and Stapler are not supported
118. Si printer you can add up to 128 MBytes of memory for a total of 132 MBytes If you have the HP Laser et 5Si MX printer or 5Si Mopier you can add up to 64 MBytes of additional memory for a total of 76 MBytes Table 1 10 presents the amount of memory required for the most common print jobs performed with the HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX 5Si NX Mopier using 600 dpi printing Table 1 10 Minimum Memory Requirements Print Job Paper Size PCL Minimum PostScript Minimum Memory Requirements Memory Requirements single sided printing Letter A4 Legal 4 MBytes 9 Mbytes 1 20 Product Information Service Approach Repair of the printer normally begins with a three step process e Step 1 Isolate the problem to the major system i e the host computer the network and or server or the printer system e Step 2 Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine e Step 3 Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7 Once a faulty part is located repair is usually accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units F RUs Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level Replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies is not supported by Hewlett Packard Ordering Parts Field replaceable part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual Replacement parts may be ordered from HP s Support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SM
119. T SELECT 10BASE T NODE NAME MFG ID 9999000700000309 NPI1CA491 SERVER NAME QUEUE SERVER HOST NAME CONFIG BY 0 IP ADDRESS RCVD SUBNET MASK 61 DEF GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 22 SYSLOG SERVER NOT SPECIFIED 37 IDLE TIMEQUT SECONDS 90 SPECIFIED SPECIFIED 15 8 28 128 hpnp hpb15554 cf hpb15554 RARP BOOTP TFTP 15 8 25 130 NOT SPECIFIED 1 0 CARD READY NOVELL RETRANS NETWORK FRAME TYPE 0008024A EN 802 2 0008024A EN 11 NETWORK STATISTICS 00008024 EN 802 3 UNICAST PACKETS RCVD TOTAL PACKETS RCVD BAD PACKETS RCVD FRAMING ERRORS RCVD PACKETS TRANSMITTED UNSENDABLE PACKETS XMIT COLLISIONS XMIT LATE COLLISIONS TM Q ra mer c OW c2 DO gq APPLETALK STATUS INITIALIZING SNMP SET CMTY NAME ETALK NET 65281 NODE 138 P2 BOQTP SERVER LTALK NET O NODE 227 CONFIG FILE APPLETALK NAME ETALK ZONE Figure 3 2 PCL Configuration Page 3 26 Operating Overview Table 3 16 Key to Figure 3 2 1 Printer Information lists printer specific statistics Serial Number shows the printer serial number Formatter Number shows the number of the formatter board Firmware Datecode is an eight digit date YY YYMMDD of the internal code Processor Revision is the revision number of the firmware processor Page Count shows the number of pages the printer has printed Pages Since Last Power Cycle shows the number of pages the printer has printed since the last time it was turned off Pages Since Last Ma
120. a a a aj O o O O ay rit Bp e o 5 o 7 9 3 O ojoijIoIyjoIjocoijioIljlo O ojoijoIyjoI jocoijioIljo O ojoi IoIijioIijioIjovooijo OlIloj oljoljoljoloI o Zzilziziziziziziz panno pesmm EA o 5 FoupRer Te Loto Door Sms O O II a ar Paese Formater Te Paper Sze Gude aya Pend IEC Adustable Sue Pate Back ow Parts Index A 15 Xopu Sued V Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued Description Adjustable Size Plate Front 8 07 8 07 8 03 8 03 8 04D 8 05 8 06 8 05 8 03 8 06 8 06 8 03 8 04E 8 04E 8 04E 8 03 Front Cover O NO ARIE Gla a ololo a o N lolo Qlols oOlioijo O JO O ziziz P oe osi odii Bodl Rs M brad orn ks adl rs O ololaloalo ololo O olo v mimlolo o alala oo c Tm no N Registration Assembly JJ G rh co CO T O O O O Z M oo Feeder Assembly JJ Q gi Co R oe O O O O Z Sensor Cable DC Controller PCA A Co ms J I QIO q g Co R ik OIO O Ol OIO OIO ziz NIO OJN Paper Size Sensing PCA Trays 2 and 3 Switch Sensor PCA C3 JD D QIO Sn cd c R S a oe olo ole ole OJO ziz on Main Gear Assembly Fuser Cable 1 Fuser Cable 2 Paper Input Unit PIU JJ O q Co ms ix O O O O Z O no J D QJ O oy pen co co oO o dad Bord alo olo ojo OIO ZIZ oio ojo EF G m co Oi P o e e O Z Sensor Cable RG5 1860 000CN PIU PCA
121. agram Each table lists the reference designator item number for each part the associated part number for the item the quantity and a description of the part While looking for a part number pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model of printer Ordering Parts All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered from H P s support Materials Organization SM O or Support Materials Europe SME Hewlett Packard Co Support Materials Organization 8050 Foothills Blvd Roseville CA 95678 Parts Direct Ordering 1 800 227 8164 U S Only Hewlett Packard Co Support Materials Europe Wolf Hirth Strasse 33 D 7030 B blingen Germany 49 7031 14 2253 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers Parts and Diagrams 8 3 8 sweibeig pue Sued Accessories and Supplies The accessories supplies and parts listed in Chapter 1 and in the following pages are available through your local authorized HP dealer Tofind a dealer near you or if your dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center 800 752 0900 U S Only Note Refer to Related Documentation in Chapter 1 for documentation and training media product numbers Common Hardware Refer to Table 6 1 in Chapter 6 listing the common hardware used in the printer 8 4 Parts and Diagrams Illustrations and
122. al HVTCRTD Transfer bias constant current drive signal HRLBD Fusingroller bias drive signal DCHGBD Discharge bias drive signal HViFRQ Primary bias frequency output signal DCHGUP Discharge bias switch signal HV1DCD Primary DC bias drive signal B8 B8 DBDCD Developing DC bias drive signal A9 B9 A9 B9 24VB A10 B10 Figure 7 32 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 3 of 5 Troubleshooting 7 91 Dunoouse qnoJ L J218 1 DC Controller PCA MMRDY L when the main motor runs 9 2 correctly m Ba MMOTD L to run the main motor Main motor c 24VB H to rotate at high speed L to J208 i 7 FAN1D rotate at low speed Laser scanner FAN1S L when the exhaust fan runs fan 3 correctly H to rotate at high speed L to J216 1 i Low voltage z FAN2D rotate at low speed power supply FAN2S L when the exhaust fan runs fan correctly H to rotate at high speed L to 13 1 J12 3 J210 1 E gt E E FAN3D rotate at low speed Formatter FAN3S L when the suction fan runs fan 3 sl 3 correctly H to rotate at high speed L to J26 1 25 3 J225 1 i peirer unii E J E gt FAN4D rotate at low speed ian y FANAS L when the exhaust fan runs 3 1 3 correctly 24 VA Registration A re ca e clutch REGCLD L to run the registration roller Pick up PCA l 1 J1202 1 J1201 20 J219 2 FEDAD Paper pick up FEDAND Busen P Gu 3 18 4 FEDBD Pick up motor control
123. allout 1 Carefully pull the assembly out from the printer and unplug the connector insidethe right end Figure 6 52 callout 2 Continue sliding the assembly out of the printer chassis ul bb UN rH o To Reinstall Make sure that the alignment pins and plastic gears are properly aligned Tray 1 Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 65 9 jueuieooejdey pue enouiay Tray 2 3Assemblies Note The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory If you arereplacing Tray 2 or Tray 3 with a tray other than the original factory installed unit you may have to adjust the new tray For details refer to the Tray 2 and 3 Adjustment Procedure in Chapter 4 1 Open thetray and pull it out to the stop 2 Carefully lift up on the outer end toreleasethe tray stop mechanism at the right rear while continuing to pull thetray free of the chassis To Reinstall 1 Align theleft rear corner of the tray and the locating track at the lower rear center of the tray with their respective guides and insert the tray no more than two inches into the chassis 2 Carefully lift up on the outer end of thetray while pulling the tray stop mechanism located at the right rear of the tray opening out and over the tray roller and guide assembly 3 Carefully slidethetray intothe printer until it latches into place 6 66 Removal and Replacement Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit Back Cover 1 Remove 4 screws CH 108 F
124. an the printer and the paper handling accessories e Every time you change the toner cartridge e After printing approximately 15 000 images e Whenever print quality problems occur Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly water dampened cloth Clean the inside with only a dry lint free cloth Use the guidelines listed in Table 4 1 Observe the warnings and cautions below Before you begin these steps turn the printer OFF and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area It may be HOT To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer Do not touch the transfer roller with your fingers Contaminants on the roller can cause print quality problems Maintenance and Adjustments 4 3 y sjueunsn py Y ooueuoQjureJy 4 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Cleaning the Printer 1 Before you begin these steps turn the printer OFF and unplug all cords 2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge WARNING Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area It may be HOT Caution Do not touch the transfer roller A Skin oils on the roller can reduce print quality If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 With a dry lint free cloth wipe any residue from the paper path area the registration roller
125. ance The user conducted preventive maintenance cycle for this printer is every 350 000 images The part numbers for the preventive maintenance kits are C3971A for the 100V printers and C3972A for the 220V printers The kits contain the following replacement parts one F using Assembly one Transfer Roller Assembly and six F eed Separation Rollers two each for Trays 2 3 and 4 Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual and the instructions induded in the kits for detailed replacement procedures The control panel message PERFORM USER MAI NTENANCE indicates that the 350 000 maintenance is due Upon completion of the maintenance procedures goto the control panel Configuration M enu and set theSERVI CE MESSAGE toOFF Laser et 55i HM C3124A has a 250 000 image user preventive maintenance interval due to heavy media usage 4 6 Maintenance and Adjustments Note Figure 4 1 Nom 3 Tray 2 and 3 Adjustment Procedure The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory Perform this procedure ONLY if a paper tray has been replaced with a tray other than the original factory installed unit or if the top margin of the image area is off center more than 0 5 mm 0 02 in The adjustment procedure is identical for Trays 2 and 3 Before performing this procedure check that the margins in your software application are properly set Load the paper tray being tested with letter or A4 size paper Perform a 1 sheet
126. ance count and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA replace it with the new PCA 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter 2 When SERVI CE MODE is displayed press Venus to access the Service Menu 3 Press ems todisplay PAGECOUNT MAI NTCOUNT and S N 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item 5 Press 0n Line toexit Service Mode Removal and Replacement 6 39 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay FusingAssembly 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and remove the Duplex Unit if installed Caution Use the upper levers to release the Fusing Assembly NOT the lower levers Thelower levers set the pressure rollers inside the F using Assembly for envelope printing down for single sheets up for envelopes 2 Releasethe Fusing Assembly by rotating the upper levers down Figure 6 25 callout 1 3 Remove the Fusing Assembly by lifting up on the finger handles Figure 6 25 callout 2 while pulling outward To Reinstall 1 Makesurethat the Fuser Output sensor flag Figure 6 25 callout 3 on the upper left corner of the Fusing Assembly rotates freely 2 Make surethat the lower levers are set down for single sheets If having trouble printing envelopes move the levers up Move the levers back down when done Figure 6 25 Fusing Assembly 6 40 Removal and Replacement Laser Scanner Assembly Caution TheLaser Scanner diode is extremely sensitive to ESD Les ESD
127. and Diagrams Table 8 2 CH102 Screw TP M3X6 floating flat and lock washer XA9 0547 000CN CH107 Screw tapping pan head M4X10 XB4 7401 009CN Printer Covers and Doors Face Up Bin Special Order HB1 6490 000CN Right Lower Cover Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal RB1 6498 000CN Spring Compression Special Order RB1 6493 000CN Spring lorsion Special Order RB1 6509 000CN Front Panel Control Panel Display RG5 2433 000CN Cable Assembly RG5 1924 000CN Plate Guard RB1 6522 000CN Diverter Assembly RG9 1150 000CN QTY 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 Cover Switch Special Order RB1 6492 000CN Parts and Diagrams 8 11 8 sweibeig pue Sued O y co LLI cc 2 LL Lu Lu Qo Printer Internal Components 1 of 4 Figure 8 3 8 12 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 3 Printer Internal Components 1 of 4 O lt 2 0 0 03 0 da w 21C Fusing Assembly 100 120V Exchange C3166 69001 21D Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange C3166 69013 Tray 1 Feed Roller HB1 6730 000CN Tray 1 Door RG5 1883 000CN 4 8 Tray 1 Internal Cover Shield HB1 6749 000CN 6 9 0 Tray 1 Separation Pad RF5 1455 000CN 1 5 0 22 23 24 24A 25 2 21 2 2 3 30A 31 0 Main Gear Assembly RG5 1847 000CN Transfer Roller Assembly RG5 1887 000CN 5 Tray 1 PCA RG5 1884 000CN CH101 Screw TP M3X6 fixed shoulder XA9 0267 000CN 4
128. ar Assembly 3 of 3 Main M otor Paper Input Unit DC Controller PCA Output Paper Sensor PCA 1 of 4 Output Paper Sensor PCA 2 of 4 Output Paper Sensor PCA 3 of 4 Output Paper Sensor PCA 4 of 4 Paper Size PCA 1 of 3 Paper Size PCA 2 of 3 Paper Size PCA 3 of 3 High Voltage Power Supply Low Voltage Power Supply Registration Assembly 1 of 3 Registration Assembly 2 of 3 Registration Assembly 3 of 3 Tray 1 Feed Roller Tray 1 Separation Pad Tray 2 and 3 Pickup F eed and Separation Rollers Paper Input Unit Sensor PS2 Registration Sensor PS1 F ace U p Solenoid Assembly SL 3 VI Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 Figure 6 94 Figure 6 95 Figure 6 96 Figure 6 97 Figure 6 98 Transfer Roller Assembly 6 64 Tray I ASSembly uu co we de OE A Se A E 6 65 Tray 4 Back Cover nnn 6 67 Tray 4 Left Cover rrr 6 68 Tray 4 Right Cover 6 69 Tray 4 Main DriveA
129. are electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive Always service printers at an ESD protected workstation Watch for the ESD reminder shown at left while performing removal procedures Removal and Replacement 6 5 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 1 Note Caution Required Tools 2 magnetized Phillips screwdriver 6 inch shaft Small flat blade Screwdriver Small pair needle nose pliers T 15 Torx Driver 6 inch shaft All components in the printer and in the 2000 Sheet I nput Unit use Phillips head screws which require a 2 size Phillips screwdriver Figure 6 1 shows the difference between a Phillips and a Pozidriv screwdriver Notethat the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces All screws used in the field replaceable Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler components require a T 15 Torx driver Phillips Posidriv Phillips vs Posidriv Screwdrivers See Table 6 1 and Chapter 8 for a table listing screws and other common hardware used in the printer Toinstall a self tapping screw first turn it counter clockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern then carefully turn clockwise to tighten Do not over tighten If a self tapping screw hold becomes stripped repair of the screw hole or replacement of the affected assembly is required 6 6 Removal and Replacement User Installable Accessories Memory and Personality Upgrade Caution SIMM s and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of ele
130. are worn causing slippage or jumping Inspect the gears driving the toner cartridge and the Fuser Replace the Main Drive Assembly if necessary 6 Paper does not meet specs The surface of Try a different media or paper lot see HP the paper may be too coarse causing repeated LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications marks Guide Table 7 14 Line at Edge of Paper Possible Cause Recommended Action AaBbCc Defective toner cartridge The photosensitive Replace the toner cartridge drum is wearing out The line will grow wider AaBbCc with cross hatching Shaking the cartridge does AaBbCc not relieve the problem AaBbCc AaBbCc 7 69 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 15 Improperly Formed Characters Character Voids Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Paper surface too rough Toner migrates to Turn EconoMode OFF Use paper with correct low spots leaving higher areas void finish smoothness see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 2 Printing on wrong side of paper The label on Turn EconoMode OFF Check for the arrow on the ream of paper indicates which side to print on the paper wrapper Be sure paper is loaded with The different surface properties of some papers the arrow pointing UP in Tray 1 or arrow may cause problems if loaded wrong side up pointing DOWN in Trays 2 3 and 4 3 Paper surface is too smooth for proper toner Turn EconoMode OFF Use paper with correct adhesion finish smoothne
131. areas of the drum The developing station is located inside the toner cartridge and consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core The developing cylinder is charged with an AC current that is centered around a negative DC bias The AC current improves density and contrast by decreasing the attraction between the toner partides and the magnetic core of the cylinder This increases the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not exposed to laser light The negative DC bias applied tothe developing cylinder is also changed according to the Print Density setting Both the primary charging roller and developing cylinder DC bias voltages are changed in responsetothe density setting These changes in DC bias cause either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum thus increasing or decreasing print density Thetoner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles Thetoner particles are attracted to the magnetic core of the developing cylinder A rubber blade brushes the toner on the developing cylinder to a uniform thickness Thetoner particles obtain a negative static charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder which is charged with a negative DC bias The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged exposed more positive areas of the drum and repelled from the negatively charged non exposed areas Developing cylinder idunt Magnet DC bias
132. ay is fully loaded with paper L when the sensor detects the paper H when the sensor detects the paper H when the upper cover or left cover is open The voltage drops as the fuser roller temperature rises Detects no cartridge and toner out Tray 3 paper size Tray 2 paper size mm as ww ew ew m mo om e 1 Laser scanner unit 1 DC Controller PCA 1 1 J1001 9 J202 1 LLCONT The analog signal is output to adjust the 8 2 intensity of laser beam BD Laser diode 6 4 LENBL The voltage in proportion to intensity of AON Vase beanie input VDO L to switch the laser on according to the 4 21 6 8 VDO signal L to switch the laser on forcibly Laser driver 1 1 1 1 1 1 i l l 1 i i y i 5V Switches the laser on when the LENBL signal and this signal are L l J6 3 1 J206 1 i i i 2 l 2 i BD PCA BDI BD input signal pulse 1 I 5V i i 3 1 i i i l J1 5 J18 5 J207 1 SCNRDY L when the scanner motor reaches the 4 4 SCND prescribed speed L to dri T i m SCNCLK to drive the scanner motor t motor Scanner motor reference clock signal i i i 24 VA SM 1 5 i i A J701 A1 ven HVTS Transfer bias monitor signal HVTRVSD Transfer negative bias drive signal DENADJ Image density adjustment signal DBACD Developing AC bias drive signal A8 A8 Mod i Bi DBFRQ Developing bias frequency output signal HVTVLTD Transfer bias drive sign
133. ble 1 9 Accessories and Options continued Accessory Option___ PartiProduct Number Descripion Modular I O and HP JetDirect Multi protocol Network Card with Network Cards Ethernet IEEE802 3 10 Base T HP JetDirect Multi protocol Network Card with Local lalk DIN 8 and Ethernet IEEE802 3 10Base T BNC standard in LJ5Si MX HP JetDirect Multi protocol Network Card with Token Ring DB9 and RJ45 UNIX Interface Software J2374B HP JetDirect interface software for HP UX systems J2375B HP JetDirect interface software for SunOS and Solaris UNIX systems Printer Hard Disk C2965A 420 MByte disk drive for both PCL and PostScript Printer Stand C2975A 18 9 in 480 mm tall for the HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX printers 110V Maintenance Kit C3971A Contains replacement Fusing Assembly Transfer C3971 69001 Roller and Feed and Separation Rollers for 110V printers 220V Maintenance Kit C3972A Contains replacement Fusing Assembly Transfer C3972 69001 Roller and Feed and Separation Rollers for 220V printers External Paper Handling C3768A Controller board for optional paper handling input Controller Board and output devices Not needed for the Envelope Feeder or Duplex Unit Standard feature in the LJ 5Si Mopier C4076A Hard Disk The Printer Hard Disk accessory is optional for the HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX and 5Si NX printers The hard disk is a standard feature of the HP Laser et 55i Mopier and Mopier engine It can be used to
134. bleshooting Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Error Description Recommended Log Action Category Message 13 12 PAPER JAM Error A paper jam occurred in the input guide The Clear the paper jam by Message input guide is located at theentry and accepts performing the procedures 13 07 72 paper from the printer It guides the paper recommended for Error Log into the Flipper Assembly on the Multi Bin Message 13 01 12 Mailbox refer to Figure 7 17 PSEntry in the Flipper Assembly of the mailbox detects paper entering the paper from the paper input guide 13 12 PAPER JAM Error The paper stopped moving because there is Clear the paper jam Cycle power Message an error in the printer but not in the mailbox To view a history of error 13 08 82 messages related to the mailbox print or view the error log Perform the paper path test to verify that the mailbox is functioning properly Perform the power up sequence recommended for error log message 13 01 12 Verify that the scanbar is complete and that all photosensor flags are free to move see Figure 7 12 If the message persists after performing all the preceding checks replace the mailbox assembly 13 12 PAPER JAM Error A pusher jam occurred Two sets of pusher Clear any paper from the stapling Message arms are located within the stapler bed Open the top cover 13 11 03 assembly the offset pusher and the assembly Inspect the offset and registratio
135. cement Figure 6 59 WN PP Oo ON OH Ul Pickup Assembly Open the paper tray to the stops Remove the Transfer Assembly see Figure 6 64 Remove the right cover see Figure 6 55 and the Back Cover see Figure 6 53 Unplug 1 connector Figure 6 59 callout 1 from the front of the Pickup Assembly Unplug 2 in line connectors Figure 6 59 callout 2 Unplug 1 connector Figure 6 59 callout 3 from the side of the assembly Freethe cables from their retaining dips Remove 4 screws CH 108 Figure 6 59 callout 4 Slide the assembly straight out of the chassis To Reinstall Make sure that the side connector Figure 6 59 callout 3 is replaced Tray 4 Pickup Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 73 9 jueuiooejdey pue eno0uay Pickup Assembly Photosensors There arethree photosensors on the Pickup Assembly e onetosensethat the Transfer Assembly is closed Figure 6 60 callout 1 e onetosensethat the tray has raised the paper to the proper height Figure 6 60 callout 2 e onetosensethat the tray is empty Figure 6 60 callout 3 To remove a photosensor 1 Removethe Pickup Assembly see Figure 6 59 2 Unplug the connector from the sensor 3 Releasethe side oriented retaining tabs and rotate the sensor to free the end oriented retaining tabs on the opposite end Figure 6 60 Tray 4 Pickup Assembly Photosensors 6 74 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 61 Power Supply 1 Remov
136. could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly Removal and Replacement 6 107 9 jueuieooejdey pue PAOUIOH Caution Figure 6 98 ul UN HB WO Stapling Bed Assembly Remove the Stapling Unit Assembly See Figure 6 91 Remove the Back Plate See Figure 6 92 Remove the Stapler Unit Controller PCA see Figure 6 94 Remove the Top Cover Assembly see Figure 6 97 Remove the wire frame by pushing both arms of the wire frame toward the center to clear the retaining notches and lift Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lift upwards Insert a flat blade screwdriver into top of the Stapling Bed Assembly and push gently to release the latches in the front of the stapling bed See Figure 6 98 callout 2 Remove 3 torx screws that join the stapling bed with the rest of the unit See Figure 6 98 callout 3 Toremove the Stapling Bed Assembly lift the edge of the assembly where the stapler unit resides then gently lift the entire Stapling Unit Assembly To Reinstall Replace the Stapling Bed Replace the Stapling Unit Controller Replace the actuator for the paper bin empty sensor Make sure that the actuator is in its proper place before replacing the Stapling Bed Assembly see Figure 6 99 callout 3 6 108 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 99 ul B UN rH o Hinges Remove the Stapling Unit Assembly see Figure 6 91 Remove the Top Cover
137. ction Press Select The printer will go offline Remove MIO card and perform a COLD RESET The printer displays the message RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS When the initialization is complete the printer will automatically return online Remove or replace the language personality SIMM See Service Note C3166 08 See recommended action for General 79 Service XXXX messages See recommended action for General 79 Service XXXX messages Troubleshooting 7 61 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description Recommended Action Message 79 SERVICE xxxx CALL Record the error message SERVICE The numbers xxxx following the error including the number in indicate the specific error parentheses XXXX then press SELECT Write down any message if any and press SELECT again and write down any message Turn off the printer and then on again If the message persists determine if the error occurs with one particular print job or application If yes it is very probable that the print job or application is corrupt try another request Additionally if the message persists with one particular driver PCL driver try the PostScript or vice versa Try a different driver such as 4Si if available If the message continues to persist check the following 1 Cycle power 2 Reseat or replace the interface cable and cycle power Remove the SIMMs one at a time and cycle
138. ctrostatic discharge ESD Wear an anti static wrist wrap 1 With the printer OFF and unplugged loosen the two captive screws and remove the Formatter PCA 2 Removethe SIMM from the anti static package H old the board with your forefingers on the side edges and your thumbs against the back edge so that the notch on one end is on theright and the metal teeth face toward the SIMM slot match the positioning shown in frame 2 3 Insert the board firmly into the SIMM slot at about a 20 degree angle Use closest open slot toward the back of the printer 4 Rotate the SIMM toward the back of the printer to a 45 degree angle until it dicks into the metal locking tabs If it is properly seated it will not lift away from the slot To remove a SIMM you must first release the metal locking tabs 5 Slidethe printer Formatter PCA back into the printer and tighten the two screws 6 Re attach any cables and the power cord then switch the printer ON and print a PCL Configuration Pageto verify the new memory is available If the SIMM is not recognized turn the printer OFF and reseat the SIMM If an error occurs refer to Printer Messages in Chapter 7 Removal and Replacement 6 7 9 juaua9e doy pue eno0uay Disk Drive Note When the disk drive is replaced all fonts and macros must be re loaded 1 TheDisk Driveis mounted on the upper front corner of the Formatter PCA under MIO card No 1 if installed 2 With
139. cts are properly aligned before replacing the screws Figure 6 40 High Voltage Power Supply Removal and Replacement 6 53 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS Remove the F ormatter Assembly see Figure 6 24 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 Remove Fan 3 and its Housing Assembly see Figure 6 20 Unplug 3 LVPS connectors Figure 6 41 callout 1 Unplug the LVPS fan FM 1 cable from the DC Controller Figure 6 41 callout 2 Remove 7 screws CH 101 Figure 6 41 callout 3 ul UN rH o Figure 6 41 DIL stab m AH HALA Low Voltage Power Supply 6 54 Removal and Replacement Note Registration Assembly Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly see Figure 6 51 Remove the Main Gear Train Shield Releasethe retainer dip Figure 6 43 callout 1 and lift the forward end up Unplug the clutch cable from the clutch on the right end of the Registration Assembly Figure 6 42 callout 2 Remove 2 screws CH 102 at rear of assembly Figure 6 43 callout 3 Lift the registration guide and remove 2 screws CH 102 at front of assembly Figure 6 44 callout 4 To Reinstall Lift the registration guide and place the Registration Assembly into position Lift the registration guide and make sure that the locator pin near the right screw is properly positioned Make sure that the grounding strap is under the
140. cu Era co da gt e se o e e olo OIO Ziz O ao N O EN O O al no N Co e co al J Spring JJ 09 iu To Oi Oi ku olo olo ele O Z J ar Oo ER co e O Z Spring Compression Special Order left jam access door OJO w N olo TIT o o o o o o 1 N 00 right jam access door ion Special Order JJ E D Oi e rd o e e O Z Xopu Sued V not shown NO 4 4 2 OIOIOIDJDIDJDIOIOIOIOITIOIO oOlceijcelioliolieijoljc jcl i col co NIN O loOlailninininin i Nn ololo oloijioijioIijioIlo o 25 o 2 9o 9 9o o o o AlalFlolLlalalalalala ola ol lelijelidveijolijoljo cilc dailoalta a a a Oo lo ololo l olo ololo o eisgje 5 o oj oj o OJO ZIZ Top Cover o gt Ja JSE E S S 5 S 2 S S 9 9 9 9 olo 8 2 g 9 9 9 amp S 9 9 3 3 3 o lalalala o SlolS isS slsls 3l8 g 9 Je 8 9 9 lt 1Q Q JO Q dq Q T S 9 0m w 3 o o o z z E red nd em c O Sig gt Zz 3 9 51 5 5 2 51 9 o P lala 59 o amp lilsliel li 74l 42lz l amp eo ziol o ol co D olelolvlioimiz gt is O o o jiv o 1x 8 e A 3 3 ulols a2 2 e 3 5 ol amp lzizigg D eio lt s 28 2 12 2 3 lla 2 o gt Ulo lt lt elo gt 8 03 9 91 02 63 04 02 03 30 0 05 01 01 Parts Index A 9 Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued Description Product Part No Fig Ref Torque Limiter RB1 6588 000CN 8
141. d at the top the highest sequence number is the most recent error logged The next column is the page count at the time of the error and the last column is the Personality PCL or PostScript column or the am Cause at the time of the error Theerror log records all errors in a different format than the Control Panel Display For example should a50 1 FUSER ERROR CYCLE POWER be displayed on the Control Panel Display the error log will record a 50 02 01 error with the 02 signifying that 2 sensors were blocked Likewise when a 13 1 through 13 9 are displayed on the Control Panel the error log will record a 13 0x 01 through 13 0x 09 where x the number of sensors blocked in the printer When an error is detected in an Optional Paper Handling Device a 13 11 13 12 or 66 xx yy will be posted to the Control Panel Troubleshooting 7 17 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Whenever a 13 xx appears on the Control Panel a good practice is to clear all the paper from the printer take the printer offline and print the error log If you cannot print the error log you can still display it on the display panel Write the error next tothe last error logged The last error is the error at the top of the error log printout with the highest number in the leftmost column Figure 7 8 HEWLETT ad de 5 Error Log 6 PACKARD Las ASC S1 Page zrror Los Prinbeur Page count 17357 aerial Number USBHIl78465 Hunter rror Page Counk Parannal ty of Jam Cause
142. d on either temporary settings or factory permanent defaults Settings you send from software applications override printer defaults Temporary Settings are the values set for the current print job by your software application Temporary settings remain in effect until the current print job is finished Control Panel Defaults are the values entered by selecting a control panel item and pressing Select An asterisk next to the item name indicates that it is now the default The printer retains default settings even when power is switched OFF Factory Defaults are the permanent default values for each menu item set at thefactory These values are listed in Table 3 3 Printer Driver Information Y ou can override or change any Printing Menu setting through most software applications and from the printer driver When you change a setting from the printer control panel the new setting becomes the printer default value Paper Source Default The printer paper source is specified by the print job not the printer control panel Thefollowing paragraphs apply when the current job does not specify a paper source Unless changed or not specified by the current job the software application or the printer driver the paper source default is determined by the Cold Reset Paper Size letter or A4 set in the Service Mode Menu If Tray lis set tothe Cold Reset Paper Size and if paper is loaded in the tray no matter what size the print
143. d the mailbox input paper guide fits snugly into the print engine Both devices should sit on level sturdy surfaces Check the PSEntry photosensor flag by opening the paper access flap at the rear of the flipper assembly refer to Figure 7 17 Slide a piece of paper through the paper input slot While sliding the paper through the slot see if the black page width flag moves up and down easily If the flag s movement is hindered remove the obstruction or replace the mailbox assembly Under normal operating conditions if you were to hold this flag up to its top most position and then power on the printer the printer displays 13 12 PAPER JAM Error Log Message 13 01 12 Clear the paper jam by verifying that the sensor flag is free moving refer to Figure 7 17 Remove any obstructions Replace the Multi Bin Mailbox if it is broken or interferes with the flag s movement Under normal operating conditions if you were to hold this flag up to its top most position and then power on the printer the printer displays 13 12 PAPER JAM Error Log Message 13 02 22 1 Offset Pusher 3 Registration Pusher 2 Exit Flap 4 Slider Arms Troubleshooting 7 45 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Error Description Recommended Log Action Category Message 13 12 PAPER JAM A paper jam occurred along the Transport Clear the paper jam by following Belt When the paper s fi
144. d time a 66 x yy DEVICE ERROR message will appear on the printer control panel display Presence of paper in the tray is detected by PS33 Switches SW601 and SW602 detect the amount of paper remaining in the tray refer to Table 5 3 Switches SW701 704 perform two functions they sense the size of paper installed in the tray refer to Table 5 4 and they determinethat the paper tray is properly dosed When the printer calls for paper from Tray 4 the Pickup F eed and Separation rollers rotate to pick up and feed one sheet to the registration roller in the Transfer Assembly The controller PCA monitors the timing of sensors PS31 and PS32 to determine that paper is moving normally If a jam occurs a 13 x PAPER J AM message will appear on the control panel display Switch SW31 is a safety device to prevent breakage of the paper lifting mechanism due to improper or excessive paper loading Table 5 3 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper Quantity Switches SW601 SW602 Remaining Paper 5 26 Functional Overview Table 5 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper Size Switches SW701 o SW703 SW704 p M4 landscape Functional Overview 5 27 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Multi Bin Mailbox Components The components of the Multi Bin Mailbox paper path are illustrated in Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 and Table 5 5 illustrate and describe all of its sensors and motors Flipper Assembly Delivery Head Motor a rap Bin 1 Face Up Bin Face Down Bins Metal
145. down while carefully and slowly lifting the top cover straight up until it dears the Face Down Bin Full sensor flag and the Delivery Unit To Reinstall Be careful not to damage the F ace Down Bin Full sensor flag Figure 6 9 callout 4 when replacing the top cover Hold the top cover door up and the F ace Down bin Figure 6 8 callout 6 down while lowering the cover into position Refer to Figure 6 9 callout 4 Slidethe F ace Down Bin under the Face Down Bin Full sensor flag and make sure that the cam Figure 6 9 callout 4 at the rear of the top cover door is properly positioned while lowering the top cover into place Make sure that the top cover is seated properly and that the retaining tabs arein place before replacing the screws Removal and Replacement 6 23 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Top Cover 2 of 2 6 24 Removal and Replacement Caution Caution Delivery Unit for Face Down Bin Remove the following components e Formatter Assembly see Figure 6 24 e AC Access Cover seeFigure 6 3 e Top Cover see Figure 6 8 e Front Cover see Figure 6 5 Unplug and re route the fan cable out of the way Figure 6 10 callout 1 Remove 1 screw CH 101 Figure 6 10 callout 2 toloosen the grounding strip Remove 1 screw CH 101 Figure 6 10 callout 3 and remove the metal fan shield Open the Diverter Assembly access door remove 2 screws CH 101 Figure 6 10 call
146. e 10Base T jack RJ 45 on the HP J etDirect card The other end of the cable should then be attached to a twisted pair hub concentrator I O Information B 5 uoneuuoju oj E Note ul UN HB B 6 I O Information DIN 8 Local Talk Interface Plug the end of the DIN 8 cable into the Local Talk port on the HP J etDirect card If you areusing only the LocalTalk port 18 MI 0 NOT READY will appear every time you turn on the printer This message will automatically disappear after 5 minutes Optional Network Configuration The following is for HP Laser et 5Si MX printers only Certain network parameters for Novell NetWare UNIX HP U X Solaris or SunOS and EtherTalk networks might need to be set depending upon the network configuration The following describes the parameters and procedures to set those parameters By factory default all supported network protocols are enabled in the HP Laser et 5Si MX printer Disabling unused protocols will Rid the network of unwanted broadcast messages from the printer Provide better control over who prints tothe printer Provide only pertinent information on the self test page Allow the display of warning messages on the printer control panel display to show protocol specific error conditions The procedures for disabling the network protocols is found later in this appendix Software which allows configuration on the supported networks is included with the printer except for U
147. e Laser et 5Si 5Si MX and 5Si NX printers are shown in Figure 1 5 and described in Table 1 9 For the Laser et 5Si Mopier C4076A all the accessories in Figure 1 4 and in Table 1 9 are standard features except for the Envelope F eeder and the Multi Bin Mailbox replaced with the Mailbox with Stapler HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX NX Optional Paper Handling Accessories Envelope F eeder Duplex Unit HP 2000 Sheet I nput Unit Tray 4 Multi Bin Mailbox provides mailbox job separation and job stacking for the Laser et 5Si family Mailbox with Stapler provides mailbox job separation job stacking and stapling for the Laser et 5Si family Product Information 1 17 L uoneunoju 19NPOId Table 1 9 Accessories and Options Accessory Option Par Product Number Descripion Toner Cartridge C3909A Replacement toner cartridge Stapler Cartridges C3772A 3 pack of staple cartridges Each cartridge contains 2000 staples and should last about two months depending on use Memory upgrades 2 MByte C3131A Upgrade to a total of 132 MBytes of memory in 4 MByte C3132A the HP LaserJet 5Si or to 76 MBytes in the HP 8 MByte C3133A LaserJet 5Si MX 16 MByte C3146A Third party 32 MByte memory SIMMs are also available Adobe s PostScript Add Adobe s PostScript Level 2 language by Level 2 printer language C3169 69001 installing this SIMM in your printer Additional memory
148. e Pickup Rollers are interchangeable between trays Tray 2 Pickup Roller Figure 6 47 callout 1 Tray 2 Feed Roller Figure 6 47 callout 2 Tray 2 Separation Roller Figure 6 47 callout 3 Tray 3 Pickup Roller Figure 6 47 callout 4 Tray 3 Feed Roller Figure 6 47 callout 5 Tray 3 Separation Roller Figure 6 47 callout 6 Remove Trays 2 and 3 The Feed and Separation rollers have protruding tabs and the pickup rollers have recessed retaining tabs Be careful not to lose the plastic torque limiters located behind the Separation Rollers Figure 6 47 callout 7 From inside the tray cavity remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft Tray 2 and 3 Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 6 60 Removal and Replacement Note Figure 6 48 Sensor Paper Input Unit PS2 1 Removethe following components in the order listed e Toner Cartridge Trays 2 and 3 Transfer Roller see Figure 6 51 Registration Assembly see Figure 6 43 Front Cover see Figure 6 5 Tray 1 Assembly see Figure 6 52 Right Lower Door Assembly see Figure 6 14 The sensor retaining tabs are released from above and the sensor is removed and replaced from below 2 Release the retaining tabs Figure 6 48 callout 1 on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end 3 Unplug the connector from the sensor To Reinstall 1 Plugin the connector before rei
149. e bushing is located on the Tray 4 main drive assembly Figure 6 56 The bushing accepts the Tray 4 pilot pin when Tray 4 is closed Replace if broken 2 Replace 2000 Sheet Feeder Vertical Transfer Assembly 3 Replace 2000 Sheet Feeder Main Drive Assembly From MultiBin Mailbox 1 Verify pawls areriding above the output rollers Figure 7 20 Won t feed from Tray x when printing from application PAPER PATH TEST works fine Verify correct paper size 1 Tray 1 From Control Panel TRAY MENU 2 Tray 2 3 or 4 Remove and reseat paper fences in correct position in failing tray Excessive I mage Skew 1 2 Remove and reseat paper fences front fence in paper trays mage Skew Specifications 1 mm over 260 mm length First linetoleading edge 5 0 47 2 5 mm Text Stretching 196 simplex 1 596 duplex Envelope Skew 6 0 over 260 mm length First line to leading edge left margin 15 47 4 5 mm Loses Page Counts Serial Number Confirm that serial number listed on PCL Config Pages is AAXXY Y 9999 Print error log Inspect error log errors for a 68 error with a page count of zero Using error log take the page count shown at the top of the page and add the page count from any all errors preceding any 68 errors Usethis number and enter it into the Front Panel from Service M ode Won t print from 2000 Sheet Input Feeder 1 Print PCL CONFIGURATION PAGES Verify the Paper Handling Controller and 2000 Sheet F eeder
150. e causes Since there are many variables in the printing process it is possible to encounter image defects that are not shown in the examples If you find a defect that is not depicted record the probable cause along with the printing environment conditions and save a copy of the defect for future reference 7 16 Troubleshooting Error Log Usethe error log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures Also you can use Show Error Log under Display and Evaluate the Error Log discussed earlier in this chapter Print and Evaluate the Error Log The printer s internal error log stores the last 50 errors and can be printed To print the error log e Press Menu until TEST MENU appears e Press tem Until PRI NT ERROR LOG appears e Press Select to print the error log After printing the error log e Check the error log for specific error trends in thelast 10 000 printed pages e Ask the customer for any observed error trends e Record any specific error trends e Refer tothe error log tablein the Reference section of this chapter to interpret error log codes Error Log Interpretation Theerror logis the key tool in troubleshooting printer problems Figure 7 8 shows a typical error log The error log shows the current page count at the top center of the page with the printer s serial number directly to the right of the page count Theleft column is the error sequence number with the error liste
151. e feed rollers are advancing paper If the rollers do not rotate verify that the following Tray 4 connectors are secure Main Drive Assembly callout 1 in Figure 6 56 Pickup Assembly callouts 2 and 3 in Figure 6 59 Controller PCA callout 1 in Figure 6 58 Power Supply callout 1 in Figure 6 61 If the problem persists replace the Tray 4 Pickup Assembly If the rollers drop down and rotate but do not advance the paper replace the feed rollers NOTE The customer replaces the feed rollers during 350K User Maintenance 250K images with HP LaserJet 5Si Heavy Media printers Replace the Paper Pickup Assembly Troubleshooting 7 41 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Error Description Recommended Log Action Category Message 13 11 PAPER JAM Error A paper jam occurred at the Vertical Transfer See all recommendations listed Message Assembly Paper did not reach exit sensor for Error Log Message 13 17 11 13 27 11 PS32 on time see Figure 7 14 and follow these steps Check the brass washer on outboard side of Vertical Transfer Door registration clutch is present and that the registration clutch does not move more than 2mm from side to side Clean PS32 and the Vertical Transfer Assembly rollers Replace the Vertical Transfer Assembly 13 11 PAPER JAM A paper jam occurred at the Vertical Transfer See all recommendations listed Assembly entrance Paper stays in PS31 for Err
152. e lower end of the support strap Figure 6 14 callout 1 4 Remove 4 screws CH 102 Figure 6 15 callout 2 5 Releasetworetainer tabs from the inside of the Tray 3 cavity Figure 6 16 callout 3 6 Slidethe door assembly away from the printer chassis Right Lower Door Assembly 1 of 3 Removal and Replacement 6 29 9 juaua9e day pue enouiay Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Right Lower Door Assembly 3 of 3 6 30 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 17 Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing Fan Housing 1 Removethe toner cartridge 2 Remove the top cover see Figure 6 8 3 Remove and re route cables away from fan housing Figure 6 17 callout 1 4 Releasethe housing retainer cip located inside the toner cartridge cavity Figure 6 17 callout 2 and lift the housing up and out of the chassis Fan 1 Laser Scanner 1 of 2 Removal and Replacement 6 31 9 jueuieooejdoy pue PAOUI9H Fan Motor 1 Unplug the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA 2 Remove 2 screws CH 101 Figure 6 18 callout 3 and lift the fan and bracket assembly out of the chassis 3 Remove 2 screws CH 104 Figure 6 18 callout 4 to separate the fan motor from the bracket Figure 6 18 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 2 of 2 6 32 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 19 Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS 1 Remove back cover see Figure 6 4 2 Removethe fan cable from the DC Controller PCA Figure 6 19 callout 1 3 Remove
153. e printer configuration Items Cycles through the items on the selected menu Some menu items appear depending upon the options installed and the configuration of other menu choices Steps through the item choices Select Selects a desired menu item an asterisk indicates the selected item Operating Overview 3 3 MINIMO Bunerado Indicator Lights The control panel indicator lights are described in the following table The column labeled Do this includes an action only when an action is required Table 3 2 Indicator Lights When this Looks like indicator this On Line Ready to receive data No action required Flashing Going off line Printer is off line Press On Line to place printer on line No data is being No action required received or processed in the printer Flashing Data is being received or No action required processed On Data is resident in the No action required printer and processed as far as possible More data is expected but no activity on the channel at this time Attention Catastrophic error Turn printer OFF then Printer system is halted ON If problem persists refer to Chapter 7 Flashing The printer needs Read and respond to attention display panel message No action required There are no messages or error conditions requiring attention 3 4 Operating Overview Note Settings and Defaults The printer makes most printing decisions base
154. e product Product Name HP LaserJet 5Si bSi MX printers and 5Si Mopier Model Number C3166A C3167A C4076A CA077A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 950 1991 A1 EN 60950 1992 IEC 825 1 1993 EN 60825 1 A1 1990 laser class 1 EMC CISPR 22 1985 EN 55022 1988 class B CISPR 22 1985 EN 55022 1988 class A EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 prEN55024 2 1992 3 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 prEN55024 3 1991 3 V m IEC 801 4 1988 prEN55024 4 1992 0 5 kV Signal Lines 1 kV Power Lines Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer and Test Systems This printer contains Local Area Network LAN options When the interface cable is attached to either of the IEEE 802 3 connectors the printer meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A Office of Quality Manager Boise Idaho USA August 1 1995 European Contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department ZQ Standards Europe Herrenberger StraBe 130 D 7030 B blingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 Regulatory Information C 5 J uoneunojul toje nboy C 6 Regulatory Information Index 2000 sheet input unit components 5 23 operat
155. e quality they expect from the printer The print sample will also help clarify the customer s explanation Table 7 4 Image Quality 1 Do you have a print Obtain a print sample from the customer sample 2 Does the problem repeat Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler in the Reference Section on the page 3 Is the toner cartridge full Check the toner cartridge using the check list on next page and is it manufactured by HP 4 Is the printer clean Perform the cleaning procedure described in Chapter 4 of this manual 5 Is the customer using For more information about HP s paper specification standards see print media that meets all Chapter 1 of this manual and the HP LaserJet Family Paper HP paper specification Specification Guide standards 6 Is the print sample similar Compare and perform the actions recommended in the Print to those in the Print Quality Quality Tables Tables in the Reference section 7 ls the problem on the Perform the Half Self Test in the Reference Section to determine drum or transfer roller where the defect is If the defect is on the drum replace the Toner cartridge If itis not on the drum replace the transfer roller Troubleshooting 7 15 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Note Check the Toner Cartridge I mage formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge problems If thereis any doubt always replace the toner cartridge before troubleshooting image defects Use the f
156. e the back cover see Figure 6 53 and the left cover see Figure 6 54 2 Unplug the connector from the Power Supply Figure 6 61 callout 1 3 Remove 2 screws CH 108 Figure 6 61 callout 2 4 Lift the Power Supply up to dear thelocating tabs underneath and slide it to the left to free it from the chassis To Reinstall Make sure that the locating tabs are properly aligned Tray 4 Power Supply Removal and Replacement 6 75 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay Note Figure 6 62 Rollers Pickup Feed and Separation Therearethree rollers in this assembly The upper forward roller is the Pickup Roller the upper rear roller is the Feed Roller and the lower roller is the Separation Roller The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between Trays 2 and 3 and 4 The Pickup Roller is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in Trays 2 and 3 e Pickup Roller Figure 6 62 callout 1 e Feed Roller Figure 6 62 callout 2 e Separation Roller Figure 6 62 callout 3 Remove the paper tray see Figure 6 57 TheFeed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs and the Pickup Roller has recessed retaining tabs From inside the tray cavity remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft Tray 4 Rollers Pickup Feed and Separation 6 76 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 63 Switch Assembly Paper Quantity Remove the back cove
157. e to correct the situation With the HCI stand alone remove left right and rear covers from the HCI Remove the vertical transfer unit Open the HCI paper tray Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the right side of the HCI see Figure 4 3 ocking Bracket Hole HCI Closing Lever Bracket Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle right side see Figure 4 3 Slide the bracket so that the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole Tighten both screws Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the left side of the HCl Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle left side Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole conti nued on next page Maintenance and Adjustments 4 9 y sjueunsn py Y ooueuoQjureJy 10 Tighten both screws 11 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit 12 Make sure all the cables vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive assembly are reconnected 13 Reinstall left right and rear covers to the HCI Note Thelocating pin position at the middle could still be unacceptable for some customer s applications If so repeat the procedure by moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin obtained 4 10 Maintenance and Adjustments Functional Overview Chapter Contents Basic Printer Functionality ee 5 3 Printer Functiona
158. e toner cartridge and inside the toner cartridge cavity refer to Figure 7 13 and replace the toner cartridge Replace the High Voltage PCA The printer will still function Load paper if desired If the message is intermittent or persists with paper in the tray Ensure the black triangular shaped paper out flag is not stuck in the down position by rough media Do this before opening the tray To check this flag without opening Tray 2 remove the Duplexer if it is present Open the Front Access Door refer to Figure 1 2 This provides you with a clear view of the Tray 2 paper out sensor flag refer to Figure 7 14 To check this flag without opening Tray 3 use a flashlight to observe the paper out flag If either paper flag is damaged replace the paper flag or replace the paper input unit If the printer is using Tray 2 or 3 and the message is accompanied by a clicking noise every few seconds replace the Paper Input Assembly 1 PS35 Vertical Transfer Door Switch 2 Drive Gear 3 Vertical Transfer Door Registration Sensor Flag PS31 4 Vertical Transfer Door Paper J am Sensor Flag PS32 Troubleshooting 7 33 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Message Tray 4 is empty or not lifting Under normal operating conditions when Tray 4 is closed the paper stack lifts until the paper is directly beneath Tray 4 s feed rollers Photosensor flag PS34 the
159. ead M3X8 XB4 7401 809CN HVPS DC Controller Removal and Replacement 6 15 9 juaua9e doy pue eno0uay Table 6 1 Hardware Table Hardware Table continued Screw tapping pan head M4X10 XB4 7401 009CN Diverter Assembly Face Up Solenoid Assy Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 606CN 2000 Sheet Input Unit general use Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 607CN 2000 Sheet Input Unit right cover Screw TP M3X6 XB6 7300 607CN 2000 Sheet Input Unit Transfer Assembly Screw lorx T20 M4X12 Included in Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Hardware Kit Stapler Elevator Head C3764 67901 Screw lorx T20 M4X10 Included in Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Hardware Kit Stapler general use C3764 67901 Qm OSD Screw tapping Torx T20 M4X10 Included in Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Hardware Kit Stapler Controller PCA C3764 67901 6 16 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 2 Control Panel 1 While pushing in on the side of the printer Figure 6 2 callout 1 lift up on the forward edge of the control panel to release the plastic retaining tab 2 Remove the cable from the retainer and unplug the control panel connector To Reinstall Plugin the cable replace the cable in its retainer insert the rear edge of the control panel under the top cover lip and press down on the forward edge to snap it into place Control Panel Removal and Replacement 6 17 9 jueuieooejdey pue enouiay Figure 6 3 Covers There
160. ect to continue The SIMM that caused the error will not be configured If the SIMM device has more than one bank of memory the good banks will be configured The job may have to be canceled and the duplexer removed to continue Replace the duplexer and reprint the job Troubleshooting 7 51 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message 55 xx ERROR PRESS SELECT KEY 56 x ERROR PRESS SELECT KEY 57 x FAN FAILURE CALL SERVICE 7 52 Troubleshooting Service Message Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description A printer command error occurred which indicates a problem between the Formatter PCA and the print engine XX error code 01 Unable to bring up the engine 02 Excessive noise glitches on the Printer Ready signal PPRDY 03 Printer Ready signal PPRDY was lost 04 No response to a signal communicate request 05 Engine reporting different source and or destination than was selected by the Formatter PCA 06 Unable to synchronize the engine serial communications 07 Serial receive parity error 08 Serial transmit parity error 09 Missed a serial communication interrupt 10 Serial communication is hung 11 Lost a serial communication extended interrupt request XISR 12 Invalid communication timeout error 13 Serial communication delayed An invalid input source or output destination was selected 1 Invalid input source 2 Invalid output destination Afan motor failure occurred r
161. efer to Figure 7 3 All fans are enabled to low speed operation at printer power on Fans will go into high speed operation during the print cycle All fans are disabled during PowerSave Mode Laser Scanner Fan Power Supply Cooling Fan Formatter Fan Face Down Deliver Fan X X x x Recommended Action Cycle power If the error continues check the Formatter seating into DC Controller Ensure no pins are bent Reseat or replace the cable from the DC Controller and the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the DC Controller PCA Replace the Formatter PCA Note These connections may appear to be correct but if the problem persists reseat cable connections making sure they are properly connected Check the installed input and output devices Select a valid device If message is intermittent from the Configuration Menu select POWERSAVE OFF Cycle power It the message continues check and reseat cabling between the fan motor s and the DC Controller PCA Fan 1 J208 Fan 2 J216 Fan3 J210 Fan4 J225 Replace the faulty fan motor Replace the Low Voltage Power Supply Replace the DC Controller Table 7 5 Message 58 x PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER 59 x PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER 61 x PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description The tray lifter malfunctioned The tray lifter mechanisms lift the paper stack in each tray until the
162. embly into the designated bin refer move up and down Remove any to Figure 7 18 obstructions If flag moves normally but the error still persists replace the mailbox assembly 13 12 PAPER JAM A paper jam occurred on the delivery head Clear the paper jam while scanning for bins During power on Roll the mailbox assembly away the Multi Bin Mailbox and the delivery head from the printer to inspect the travels the length of the mailbox verifying that front of the mailbox Determine if all bins and the stapler are installed This is one continuous scan bar is performed when the PS Bin Full Head present refer to Figure 7 12 Position photosensor located in the delivery Each bin and the stapler head assembly reads a scan bar The scan assembly if installed MUST be in bar is formed by plastic protrusions located place to form a continuous on the rear surface of each bin and the scanbar Ensure the Stapler stapling assembly refer to Figure 7 12 Assembly is firmly seated on to When all the bins are in place one the mailbox and ensure all continuous scan bar is formed mailbox trays are in place With the 8 bin mailbox ensure the blind cover and all bins are installed and not broken Remove the mailbox assembly s left side cover Verify the flat ribbon cable that connects the delivery head to the mailbox s controller PCA is not damaged and or is connected If the problem persists replace the Multi Bin Mailbox 7 46 Trou
163. emm gen NI l ss es Tt 1 0101 091 01010 OINININININIJIN dl dl cad os rud rud um olololaololiolo ojejelalieleleo oeojoejielselioelolo ololoijololo o ziziziziziziz JJ Gq a N N C2 m o O e O Z U N nmimimimi u U OU U U T O r W OIO o O ESO ESO E ES e O slslolsis O olo m D O 3 5 5 5 zx Oo gt 3 Icio 2 o D O cz 2 G lolol 51 5 D y IS s m e o U Ola llalla o oco z D D D iojoiu e9 O olo o gt o Q A 2lo lolo gt o OC ct D ulo Co 3 UJ O TU Q 5 c m O O O o D oO gt lt SE gt lt O 2 a 2 a o D 3 o lt o co Dl 0 N o0o w gt 3 gt 0o a ml cololcol nml nm A a ND Cc m al al ojo coljolj mijol 00 ev co o JJ G q in o T O CO O Z ie N Oi e JJ G ue hn N ji o e e O Z Ks o N Oi Paper Pick Up Assembly Vertical Transfer Assembly J DU 6G pe no m NI MIN e en Ojo OIN Ojo OJO ZIZ O 00 O NO JJ G kd e e e O Z O 00 O C3 JJ G e o e e O Z e O oo de I NOR RO On Ae MP TMP MTP oO MIT_NM ITM Co CO N Div Io a a olo olo elo OIO Ziz RG5 2235 000CN Volume Paper Cable RG5 2281 000CN RG5 2433 000CN Front Panel Control Panel Display Lifter Sensing Switch SW31 RG5 4198 000CN RG9 1150 000CN Diverter Assembly RG9 1150 000CN Diverter Assembly D 0 Dv LE 2k E NI N N mo mo m O O O O NO O O
164. emory Security Control Panel Lock DISABLED Control Panei Password DISABLED Disk Lock DISABLED Paper Handling Options Envelope Feeder Duplex Unit PH Controlier 01 963 Device i HEWLETT PACKARD 2000 SHEET INPUT TRAY C3763 Input Trays 1 TRAY 4 2000 Sheets Device 2 HEWLETT PACKARD MULTIBIN MAILBOX C3764A BNP3636 Dj Dutput Bins Face Up Bin 125 Sheets Face Up Mailbox 1 250 Sheets Face Down Mailbox 2 250 Sheets Face Down Mailbox 3 250 Sheets Face Down Mailbox 4 250 Sheets Face Down Majlbox 5 250 Sheets Face Down Device 3 Eh tn amp G3 by e Configuration Page HEWLETT PACKARD STAPLER MODULE C3766A 3 22 40 34 Output Bins 1 Stapler 300 Sheets Face Down Je5528 MOVELL STATUS A 05 06 AM Hi ADORESS DBOQOSASCEOE MODE PORT SELECT JOBASE TIMODE NAME HFG 10 3528000709010315 LYNN SSMOPIER PS M SERVER WAHE KPR TECH IT READY TCPJIP STATUS QUEUE SERVERI 1 0 CARD READY i NOVELL RETRANS IMETSOR FRAME TYPE 3 IP ADORESS RCD SUBNET MASK 100052112 En_B02 3 2951 DiF GATCURY WK MON EN M02 2 NETWORK STATISTICS IUMEMOKN EN SNAP UNICAST PACKETS RCVD QR M M 9528 APPLETALK STATUS READY O CTALK WET 315 MODE 1a P2 D LTALE MET 9 MOL ide S12 APPLETARK MAME HP Laserjet 5 ESIC Gi ETALE ZORE Boise Off 3 Defa DLCALLC STATUS WIT LATE COLLISIONS duit CONFIG GY FRONT PANEL TE
165. en paper is supplied by Tray 3 SMTl rotates in the reverse direction and drives the Pick Up roller for Tray 3 Funcional Overview 5 11 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Image Formation System Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies such as electronics optics and electrophotographics to provide a printed page E ach process functions independently and must be coordinated with the other printer processes Theimage formation process consists of six steps Drum Cleaning Drum Conditioning I mage Writing I mage Developing Image Transferring and Media Separation I mage Fusing au bb UN HE lt Paper Path Laser Scanne Formatte Job lt Signal Control Path Amb DC Controller oi mm Image Control Signals Writing Drum Toner Cartridge nditionin Developin Conditio 3 Primary T iil HVPS Charging Developing HVPS Roller Roller Drum Cleaning gt Cleaning Ends MO Output m E Z Regist Paper Input Bins Se Aan Assembly M sema gt Input Unit Sources Image Media Transfer YN Image Fusing Separation N 7 Transfering Duplex Unit Image Formation Block Diagram Figure 5 6 Image Formation Block Diagram 5 12 Functional Overview Figure 5 7 Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is the heart of the I mage Formation System It houses the cleaning conditioning and developing steps of the process Thetoner cartridge contains the
166. eneath the staple cartridge slot moves freely If itis damaged replace the stapler s top cover Replace the Stapler Assembly OUTPUT DEVICE Attendance One of the printer s interlock switches is not Ensure the mailbox is installed DELIVERY PATH OPEN Required set properly This message displays for one tightly against the printer of two reasons especially at the top of the 1 An external output device such as the mailbox Carpeting and or Multi Bin Mailbox is disrupting the paper uneven flooring may cause the path Switch SW1 the interlock switch is not top of the mailbox to move away depressed callout 3 Figure 7 12 from the printer which causes this error to occur Verify that Switch 2 The stapler s top cover is open Two SW1 is working properly callout interlock switches detect whether the 3 Figure 7 12 stapler s top cover is closed refer to Figure Close the stapler s top cover The 5 21 printer will reset Verify that the switches in the stapling unit are correctly wired and functional Perform continuity checks with the switches Troubleshooting 7 29 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message Message OUTPUT OPERATION Attendance CONDITION x yy Required Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description An external output device has a condition that needs to be corrected before printing can resume X output device 0 Paper Handling Controller Recommended Action Cycle power and prin
167. ently asked questions by HP Laser et printer users Helpful System Maps tothe HP AUDIO TIPS recordings are available by fax through HP FIRST HP FIRST HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology is a phone in fax service providing technical information for HP Laser et users as well as service personnel Receiving a fax requires a type 3 facsimile machine or fax card Service related information includes Service notes HP Authorized dealers Application notes Product Data Sheets Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS Typeface and accessory information Printer support software information Toner information Driver request form and Software Matrix HP FIRST U S Call the HP ASAP system 1 800 333 1917 and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST HP FIRST Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers U K 0800 96 02 71 Netherlands 06 02 22 420 Belgium Dutch 078 11 19 0 Germany 0130 810061 Switzerland German 155 1527 Austria 0660 8128 For English service outside the above countries 31 20 681 5792 Product Information 1 25 L uoneunojJu jonpoJd HP CompuServe Forum CompuServe members can download a variety of support materials including product data sheets software application notes and printer drivers for many popular software applications Members may also post and reply to questions in an interactive format To access the HP Forum type GO HP at any prompt For more information
168. eoa e llle e eon 7 19 Verify Communication 2 5 7 19 Verify Host System Operation 7 20 Verification 2 ll less hans 7 21 Paper Path Test i owce ok x how OX YO OX A 7 21 Customer Print ob lt lt 7 22 Reference ll e e e e hoo eh on nn 7 23 Control Panel Messages and Errors 7 23 Error bog Table v ua ceo ode Y ee eR ROC EC 7 24 General Paper Path Troubleshooting 7 37 Image Formation Troubleshooting 7 63 Check the Toner Cartridge ee ee 7 63 Faulty Image Examples ee 7 63 Image Quality Tables 0 7 64 Image System Troubleshooting eee 7 74 Troubleshooting 7 1 Troubleshooting Checks 71 7 Paper jas 2 25 5 d e a a cue rea ees d 7 11 General Troubleshooting Information 7 80 Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions 7 80 Paper CUB v aea dada me i Sia ie Dou ee Aue ae SM GLA e ara ta 7 85 Diada oos di d d tos sube uds Veto de ud rer Au SEP tn ee NL EC M ues 7 86 7 2 Troubleshooting Display Page 7 9 Configuration Page 7 10 Image Quality Page 7 15 Error Log Page 7 17 Communication Page 7 19 Verification Page 7 21 Reference Page 7 23 Troubleshooti ng Process Thetroubleshooting process is a
169. eplace the drive belt on the motor drive gear before installing and tightening the screws Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Motor Screws 6 96 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement 6 97 Paper Bins and Blind Cover The procedure for removing the paper bins and the blind cover is the same Each bin rests in its labeled slot 1 Removethe paper bins and the blind cover from the top down 2 Lift up on the outer edge of the bin or blind cover to dear the retaining notch and pull it forward out of the frame Figure 6 86 To Reinstall Replace the paper bins from the bottom up Place the blind cover between Bin 1andtheFace Up Bin Slidethe bin into its designated slot and lower it into its retaining notch Figure 6 86 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Bin Removal 6 98 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 87 PCA Controller 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 2 Lay theMulti Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler over onto its right side 3 Remove 1 grounding screw CH 112 Figure 6 87 callout 1 and four self tapping screws CH 113 Figure 6 87 callout 2 4 Unplug all of the connectors from the PCA 5 Removethe PCA from its metallic box Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler PCA Removal Removal and Replacement 6 99 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay Figure 6 88 pl Strings Anti Curl The Anti C
170. equests or extra page eject commands 2 Network Configuration Some sharing devices Check with the network administrator on networks may generate a blank page as a separator 3 Multiple Feeds The printer may be feeding Remove the paper from the tray and fan the paper two or more pages at once because the paper is edges to separate the pages see HP LaserJet difficult to separate Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide ALL PAGES BLANK 1 Sealing tape left in toner cartridge Remove the sealing tape 2 Empty or defective toner cartridge 1 If unsure weigh the cartridge Full weight 2 3000 grams 106 oz Empty weight 2300 grams 80 5 oz NOTE Some toner may reside in the waste toner cavity affecting the weight of the cartridge 2 Perform the Drum Rotation Functional Check described later in this chapter or try a known good toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if necessary 3 Defective or contaminated Transfer Roller Check roller installation and contact Perform Without a functional Transfer Roller toner the Half Self Test Functional Check described cannot be pulled from the photosensitive drum later in this chapter If there is an image on the to the paper drum but not on paper replace the Transfer Roller 4 High voltage connector springs are dirty or Check the springs for functionality Clean if dirty defective The high voltage connectors are replace if defective or missing mounted on the
171. er Head assembly ThelR Sensor detects when the paper arrives in the stapler The Retainer a shaft holding two rubber flexible fingers or anti curl fingers rotates once to apply pressure down and backward This action forces the paper to register against the rear wall of the Stapling Bed as well as reduces paper curl The Registration Pusher located in the right side of the Top Assembly registers the paper against 5 36 Functional Overview U N kB 4 5 0 JO the left wall of the Stapling Bed This cycle is repeated until the amount of sheets to be stapled is reached with a maximum of 20 Stapling Cycle TheSliders move the stack of sheets to the stapling position The Registration Pusher applies slight pressure to the stack of sheets toward the left wall of the Stapling Bed where the stapler is located Then the stack of sheets are stapled Eject Cycle The stapling bed sliders offsets the stacks or jobs The Off Set Pusher located in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly pushes the stack towards the right side of the Stapling Bed whenever it applies The Sliders move the stack of paper from stapling position to eject position which is out of the Stapling Bed reaching the Wire Frame level The Wire Frame directs the stack of paper The Exit Flap Assembly moves down to prevent the job from returning to the Stapling Bed TheSliders retract to home position letting the stack of sheets fall into the output bin The capac
172. er Tray SW601 SW602 Paper Quantity Switches Lower Chassis behind Back Cover SW701 SW704 Paper Size Switches Lower Chassis behind Back Cover 5 24 Functional Overview Paper Jam Sensor P532 Registration sensor PS31 Registration Clutch CL32 Lifter Clutch CL31 Main Motor M1 Transfer Assembly Closed P 535 Paper Surface PS 34 Paper Tray Empty P 533 Feed Roller Pick Up Roller Separation Roller 7 Z Lifter Sensing Switch SW31 Controller PCA Paper Quantity Switches SW601 SW602 Paper Size Switches SW701 Figure 5 17 Power Supply 2000 Sheet Input Unit Sensors Switches Clutches and Motors Funcional Overview 5 25 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny 2000 Sheet Input Unit Operation All communication and control of the 2000 Sheet Input Unit and the Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox With Stapler is through the External Paper Handling EPH PCA mounted on the Formatter Assembly These instructions are sent to the 2000 Sheet Input Unit controller PCA located behind the back cover The main components of the 2000 Sheet I nput Unit and their functions are listed in Table 5 2 Power is provided to the 2000 Sheet Input Unit by an internal power supply located behind the back cover When the Tray 4 paper tray has been loaded and closed the paper stack is lifted into position sensed by PS34 under the pickup feed and separation rollers If PS34 is not activated within a predetermine
173. er that paper has passed through the PIU and is present at the Registration Assembly When the Laser Scanner and Fuser are ready the DC Controller sends the IN SREQ signal to the Formatter When the Formatter has processed the print data it sends the VSYNC and VDO signals to the DC Controller The paper is then released from the Registration Assembly by CL 1 and fed to the photosensitive drum starting the image transfer and fusing processes After the paper passes through the F user it triggers PS1403 and PS1402 to the specified type size and destination of the paper being fed through the printer 5 38 Functional Overview Printing from Tray 1 The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor PS1301 The lifting plate pressurization solenoid SL 2 is then activated releasing the plate which applies upward pressure on the paper causing it to contact the Tray 1 pickup roller TheTray 1 Feed Clutch CL 3 turns on at this time and feeds the paper from Tray 1 tothe registration position Theremainder of the Tray 1 print process is identical tothe Tray 2 and 3 process described above Printing from the Envelope F eeder The Envelope F eeder mounts in slots above Tray 1 The printer can print from Tray 1 when the Envelope F eeder is installed When the print job calls for an envelope it is fed directly to the Registration Assembly From there the print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 proce
174. er will pull from Tray 1 If thereis no paper in Tray 1 and Tray A is installed and loaded with the Cold Reset Paper Size the printer will pull from Tray 4 If thereis no paper in Tray 1 and Tray 4 is not installed the printer will pull from the first tray containing the Cold Reset Paper Size If none of thetrays contain the Cold Reset Paper Size the printer will prompt the user to put letter or A4 in Tray 1 Operating Overview 3 5 e MINIMO Bunerado Caution pl Restoring Factory Defaults If possible print a PCL Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset This will document current settings for later reference Performing a Cold Reset resets the J etDirect configuration To avoid making changes to your configuration remove the etDirect card before performing a cold reset Press and hold On Line while powering the printer ON Hold down On Line until RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS message appears This message is followed by the power on NTERNAL TEST message The printer then re displays RESTORI NG FACTORY SETTI NGS until the power on initialization is completed The factory defaults are listed in Table 3 3 Setting the Display Language Press and hold Select while powering ON Hold Select until CONFI G LANGUAGE appears Release Select INTERNAL TEST appears briefly Wait for LANGUAGE ENGLI SH to appear Press repeatedly until the desired language appears Press Select to save your cho
175. ery 350 000 images 250 000 images with HP Laser et 5Si Heavy Media printers e Use of non HP toner cartridges see the following explanation memory boards or interface boards Product Information 1 27 L uoneunoju jonpo4d Note The use of non H ewlett P ackard toner cartridges alone does not affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you may have purchased However if an HP Laser et printer failure or damage is found to be attributable directly to the use of a non HP toner cartridge HP will not repair the printer free of charge In this case standard time and materials charges will be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or damage Operation of the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle printing greater than the equivalent of 100 000 images per month shall be deemed printer abuse and all repairs thereafter will be billed on a time and materials basis If you are using a mechanical switch box ensure that it is equipped with a surge protector Damage to your printer could occur from the use of unprotected mechanical switch boxes Warranty Limitations The warranty set forth above is exdusive and no other warranty whether written or oral is expressed or implied Hewlett Packard specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Service During the Warranty Period If your hardware should fail during the warranty period contac
176. ery head senses paper arrival and starts the delivery head roller motor PSExit2 senses that paper has been placed into the bin After ejecting the sheet into the assigned bin the eject roller is retracted and the head moves to the next delivery location before the next sheet is accepted from the printer 5 32 Functional Overview Figure 5 20 Stapling Unit Components The components of the Stapling Unit paper path are illustrated in Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 and Table 5 6 illustrate and describe all of its sensors and motors EJECT CYCLE STACKING Stapling Unit Paper Paths Functional Overview 5 33 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Table 5 6 Stapling Unit Sensors Switches and Motors Control Device M1 M2 M3 M4 IR Sensor STL Sensor PSRack PSSlider PSRetainer PSBinFull PSNBinFull STLout SW1 Title Location Stapler DC Motor Stapler Assembly Rack Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly Slider Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly Retainer DC Motor Stapling Bed Assembly Infra Red Sensor Stapling Bed Assembly Stapler Sensor Stapler Assembly Rack Sensor Top Cover Assembly Slider Sensor Stapling Bed Assembly Retainer Sensor Stapling Bed Assembly Output Bin Full Sensor Stapling Bed Assembly Next Bin Full Sensor Housing Staples Out Stapler Assembly Top Cover Interlock Right Hinge Switches 2 in serial 5 34 Functional Overview STL Sensor STL Out PS Bin Full PS Slider Next
177. es All others will be counted and discarded EN 8023 EN II EN 8022 Limit frame types to IPX over IEEE 802 2 frames All others will be counted and discarded EN SNAP Limit frame types to IPX over SNAP with Ethernet frames All others will be counted and discarded 6 Press Select to save the selection An asterisk appears 7 f other protocols will be used continue with the next section Otherwise skip to Disable Network Protocols at the end of this appendix I O Information B 7 uoneuuoju oj E Configuring TCP IP Parameters TheHP J etAdmin utility for UNIX sold separately may be used to configure TCP IP parameters If you do not havethe HP J etAdmin utility for UNIX or you are using a UNIX system other than HP UX Solaris or SunOS you may usethe control panel of the printer to configure these TCPAP parameters manually U sage of the bootp file for configuration parameters the default is to use the bootp file IP address 4 bytes Subnet mask 4 bytes e Syslog server IP address 4 bytes Default gateway 4 bytes UN B 10 11 12 B 8 I O Information TCP connection timeout in seconds To manually configure TCP IP parameters Press tem CFG TCP PzNO appears Press CFG TCP PzYES appears Press Select CFG TCP P YES appears Press Item to manually configure TCP IP parameters BOOTP YES appears If you keep BOOTP YES then the values for the TCP IP parameters will be pro
178. et new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing Menus or Items before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing Menus returns printer to the main menu system Pressing tems moves to the next menu item 3 22 Operating Overview Note Note Setting Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number The page count maintenance count and printer serial numbers are stored in Non Volatile Memory PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer MAI NTCOUNT is the pagecount when the next preventive maintenance should be performed every 350 000 images and S N isthe printer serial number also located on the printer back cover Laser et 55i HM C3124A has a 250 000 images user preventive maintenance interval due to heavy media usage If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine The procedures for setting these values are listed in Table 3 15 Before removing the old Formatter PCA print a PCL or PostScript Configuration Page to verify the current values if possible If itis not possibleto print a PCL Configuration Page try to verify the values before replacing the F ormatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3 below After verifying the page count maintenance count and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA replace it with the new PCA 1 Ente
179. ewdrivers 6 6 screws descriptions 6 16 Select key 3 sensor paper input unit 6 61 registration 6 62 separation pad tray 1 6 58 separation roller tray 2 6 tray 3 6 serial number l setting 3 service approach l service mode 3 settings and defaults 3 shipping print media 1 site requirements 2 SL3 See solenoid assembly 6 63 slots cartridge 1 3 SME Support Materials Europe 1 21 1 24 SMO Support Materials Organization 1 21 solenoid assembly 6 63 space requirements 2 4 specifications adhesive labels 1 12 electrical 1 9 paper 1 11 1 24 printer 1 8 standard interfaces 1 3 standard printer memory 1 3 storing print media 1 13 Support Materials Europe 1 21 Support Materials Organization 1 21 T technical assistance 1 25 temporary settings 3 5 test menu 3 12 tests printer 3 23 Index 4 toner cartridge cleaning spills 4 defective 4 detector 5 hvps contacts 5 13 image formation system 5 13 life expectancy 1 22 photosensitive drum 5 13 print quality l recycling l refilled troubleshooting 7 used 1 1 6 6 Y UU 1 63 GO Uy QN UY Uy Oo warranty tools top cover training media l transfer roller assembly 6 64 transparency specifications 1 12 2 2 2 1 2 2 6 2 2 4 4 tray 1 assembly 6 65 feed roller 6 58 media guidelines 1 4 separation pad 6 58 tray 2 adjustment procedure assembly 6 66 media guidelines 1 5 rollers 6 6 tray 3
180. execution is disabled The printer continues its normal initialization process STAPLER ALIGN ERROR The paper is misaligned in the stapler and Remove the paper from the cannot be stapled stapler and resend the job Check for paper in the actuator near the stapler bed Replace the stapler Troubleshooting 7 31 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued TONER LOW Attendance Required TRAY n EMPTY Status 7 32 Troubleshooting Description The stapler has reached its maximum of 20 sheets to be stapled The toner cartridge is running out of toner NOTE Check the Configuration Menu If TONER LOW CONT the printer will continue printing but if TONER LOWZSTOP displays the printer will stop printing and go off line The paper tray is empty Paper is sensed in the tray by triangular shaped black plastic flags and photosensors If paper is not in a tray the flags will rotate through an access in the paper tray When paper is present the flags are blocked from rotating through this access Recommended Action Remove the 20 sheets from the bin The printer will automatically continue and staple the remaining pages separately Shake the toner cartridge or replace it If TONER LOW remains displayed and no other conditions are present printing will automatically continue but the print quality will gradually degrade If the message persists check the contact points on the left end of th
181. g of HVPS and HVPS ground contacts on the toner cartridge 2 Check for proper seating of toner cartridge 3 Replace the toner cartridge 2 Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS 3 Leaking toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge 4 Paper does not meet specs The paper moisture content conductivity or surface finish may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process White Stripes parallel to path Possible Cause Recommended Action Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 1 Toner cartridge is nearly empty This can Remove the toner cartridge and shake it gently cause uneven toner distribution The cartridge will soon require replacement 2 Toner cartridge has been exposed to too much Store the toner cartridge in a darkened light 3 Foreign objects in beam path Any foreign objects will block the light from developing an image on the Photosensitive drum environment for several days This may restore the photosensitive potential Remove the toner cartridge and check for damage Replace the toner cartridge if it is damaged Remove the printer cover and inspect the path from the Laser Scanner to the toner cartridge drum looking for foreign objects in the beam path 7 71 BuljooyusajqnoiL L Table 7 20 Partial Blank Page Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Page too complex The printer can not create the image fast enough to keep pace
182. g temperature of 392 F 200 C 215 C for HP Laser et 5Si Heavy Media printers for 0 1 second without deterioration Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced Pre printed forms must be printed with non flammable heat resistant inks that do not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature of 392 F 200 C 215 C for HP Laser et 5Si Heavy Media printers for 0 1 second A small sample of a new print media should be tested before purchasing large quantities Envelopes To prevent severe printer damage do not use envelopes that have windows clasps snaps or synthetic materials Print Envelopes to the F ace U p Bin only Envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 and from the optional Envelope Feeder Choose envelopes that are well constructed They should lay flat and be sharply creased They should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Envelope adhesive must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process Product Information 1 11 L uoneunoju onpoJd Caution Caution Adhesive L abels Usethe following guidelines when selecting labels Tray 1 is required for printing adhesive labels Print labels to the F ace U p Bin only This printer does not support use of labels with any exposed spaces Do not attempt to print on label sheets after any of the labels have been removed from the sheet Damageto the printer ma
183. ger 11x17 13 ppm ledger 11x17 or A3 or A3 or A3 15 ppm legal or B4 15 ppm legal or B4 15 ppm legal or B4 Duplex Speed 9 5 ppm letter or A4 9 5 ppm letter or A4 9 5 ppm letter or A4 6 5 ppm ledger or A3 6 5 ppmledgeror A3 6 5 ppm ledger or A3 7 5 ppm legal or B4 7 5 ppm legal or B4 7 5 ppm legal or B4 Text amp Graphics 600 dpi plus 600 dpi plus 600 dpi plus Resolution Resolution Resolution Resolution Enhancement Enhancement Enhancement technology REt technology REt technology REt Printer Language s Standard Enhanced PCL 5 Enhanced PCL 5 Enhanced PCL 5 Adobe PostScript Adobe PostScript Level 2 Level 2 Optional Adobe PostScript Level 2 None None Duty Cycle Monthly Up to 100 000 images Up to 100 000 images Up to 100 000 images Usage Memory 12 Mbyte Standard 4 Mbyte 12 Mbyte 76 Mbyte total Optional 132 Mbyte total 76 Mbyte total maximum Internal Typefaces 45 PCL 45 PCL 35 PostScript 45 PCL 35 PostScript Standard Interfaces IEEE 1284 ECP IEEE 1284 ECP IEEE 1284 ECP Parallel Parallel Parallel JetDirect MIO JetDirect MIO Power Control PowerSave Mode PowerSave Mode PowerSave Mode Control Panel 5 Keys LCD Display 5 Keys LCD Display 5 Keys LCD Display 2 line 20 characters 2 line 20 characters 2 line 20 characters per line per line per line EconoMode toner saving Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement technology MEt 2 SIMMS available for use include 2 4
184. gure 6 82 4 Remove theJ am Access Door see Figures 6 74 through 6 76 5 Removethe 2 inside screws closest to the front of the unit CH 112 Figure 6 70 callout 2 6 Unplug the ground wire from the Flipper Roller Motor Figure 6 71 callout 3 7 Tilt theright end of the assembly a few inches out of the frame unplug the cable see Figure 6 69 and rotate the assembly free while feeding the motor cable out through the access opening on the left side To Reinstall Do not over tighten the screws Figure 6 70 callout 2 when replacing the Flipper Assembly The nuts in the Flipper Assembly will rotate in their retaining slots Removal and Replacement 6 83 9 jueuiooejdey pue enouiay 6 84 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 72 Input Paper Guide 1 Removethe paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 2 Open the am Access Door and disconnect the ground wire from the bottom of the Flipper Roller Motor Figure 6 71 callout 3 3 Fromtherear of the unit releasethe Paper Guide retaining tabs Figure 6 72 callout 1 4 Carefully pull the paper guide free of the frame while routing the ground wire through the access hole Figure 6 72 callout 2 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Input Paper Guide Removal and Replacement 6 85 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay Interlock Switch 1 Removethe left cover see Figure 6 65 2 Disconnec 2 wires from thelnterlock Switch Figure 6 73 callout
185. hat is stored on the optional Disk Accessory will be lost Table 3 13 I O Menu Items I O Menu Items Item Choices Action Required Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice 10 TI MEOUT Xxx SECONDS xxx any value between 5 to 300 9 SECONDS ex 207 seconds as set by user with PJL If timeout is reset to one of the standard values the PJL value will disappear Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice 300 SECONDS 10 BUFFER Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice 10 Si ZE nnnnnk Displayed only if 0 BUFFER 0N Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice Asterisk indicates printer default Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated Operating Overview 3 19 MINIMO Bunerado MIO 1 and 2 Menus Note Items displayed depend upon the MIO card that is installed in the printer Table 3 14 MIO 1 and 2 Menu Items MIO 1 and 2 Menu Items Item Choices Action Required Items displayed depend The actions required depend upon the items displayed upon the MIO card that is on the Menu installed in the printer Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated 3 20 Operating Overview N Service Mode The Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel While in Service M ode you can Verify and set the Page Count and serial number These are
186. he mage F ormation System with the Paper Input and Output Systems and then signals the F ormatter to send the print image data The Formatter sends the print image data dots in the form of a VIDEO signal to start the printing process TheFormatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for two MIO cards additional memory SIMMs the PostScript SIMM the Disk Accessory and the External Paper Handling controller PCA for the 2000 Sheet Input Unit and the Multi Bin Mailbox M ailbox With Stapler PowerSave This user adjustable feature Configuration M enu conserves power by shutting down the fuser and exhaust fans after the printer has been idle for 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 2 or 3 hours A 10 second interval is also availablein Service Mode The printer retains all printer settings downloaded fonts and macros while in PowerSave mode The default setting is PowerSave ON with a 1 hour idletime PowerSave can also be turned OFF from the control panel The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs e A print job valid data or a PML or PJ L command is received at the parallel port or an MIO card e A Control Panel key is pressed e When any printer door except the front access door is opened and then closed e A paper tray is opened and then closed When the Engine Test microswitch is pressed 5 8 Functional Overview Note Note Note Figu
187. he DC Controller PCA via thermistor TH1 The DC Controller maintains a temperature of about 190 C during print mode If the fusing system overheats about 230 C TH 1 opens interrupting power to the fusing heater causing a 50 X FUSER ERROR If the fusing system exceeds 240 C the thermal fuse opens moving power away from the fuser Halogen heater Upper fixing roller Toner Paper Lower fixing roller Image Fusing Funcional Overview 5 19 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Paper Paths and Components Printer Duplex Unit and Envelope F eeder The components of the printer paper path are illustrated in Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 and Table 5 1 illustrate and describe all of the printer sensors solenoids clutches motors and fans Laser Scanner Toner Cartridge Photosensor Drum Transfer Roller Registration Assembly Tray 1 Feed Roller Face Down Delivery Assembly Face SEA Envelope Feeder Face Up Bin Output to Multi Bin c VIGO i Fusing Assembly cs E wes AP zt ray 1 Drive Assembly b O Diverter Assembly 3 ra S yo Upper PIU Feed Roller a 2000 Sheet Input Unit Path Turnover Path Tray 3 Pick Up Roller Tray 3 Feed Roller Paper Path 3 Tray 3 Separation Roller Paper Input Unit PIU Figure 5 14 Printer Paper Paths 5 20 Functional Overview Table 5 1 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans PS1 Registration Assembly center PS2 Paper Input Unit top center beh
188. he cable connections between Main Motor M1 the Tray 4 Controller PCA and the Tray 4 Power Supply refer to Figure 6 58 callout 1 and Figure 6 56 callout 1 Verify the lift cables are not broken refer to Figure 7 24 Replace only the 2000 Sheet Input Tray Assembly if the lift cables are broken Tray 4 is not seated into the gear when lifting Check the white bushing on Tray 4 which is located on a steel locating pin If the bushing is cracked or broken replace the bushing and replace the gear assembly Remove any paper from the left side of Tray 4 Replace the paper surface sensing switch SW31 located at the center top of the 2000 Sheet Input Unit callout 2 Figure 7 23 The printer will still function Close the tray if desired Reseat or replace adjustable plate Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Message WARMING UP Status The Fuser is warming up and the printer is not ready It may be necessary to display the error log to determine if more information is available to assist you in troubleshooting Recommended Action Wait until the printer signals ready to accept data The user may access the menus before the printer goes online If this message remains displayed separate all accessories from the printer Cycle power and recheck messages If no error replace accessories one at a time Recycle power lf message persists replace the Formatter Replace the DC
189. he top surface of the black roller goes through its normal power on sequence refer to Figure 7 21 Verify the Multi Bin Mailbox Head assembly The head assembly in the mailbox moves to can move freely If the preceding the bottom most position on the mailbox actions do not correct the error then it travels up to its home position Any replace the Multi Bin Mailbox fault condition in the mailbox prevents it from going through its normal power on sequence 66 2 4 DEVICE ERROR Transport Belt stopped at power on Too Verify proper installation of CYCLE POWER many retries to start Multi Bin Mailbox to printer Check site requirements See recommended action for Error Log message 13 03 32 66 2 5 DEVICE ERROR Transport Belt stopped Too many retries to See recommended actions for CYCLE POWER start Multi Bin Mailbox may not be Error Log message 13 03 32 attached aligned completely to printer 66 2 6 Communication or protocol error Cycle Power Verify that the 66 2 7 DEVICE ERROR C Link cables are installed CYCLE POWER 02 correctly Check cable connections for bent pins and reseat connections refer to Figure 7 7 Replace as required Replace the External Paper Handling PCA Replace the Multi Bin Mailbox Controller PCA See recommended action for errorlog code 66 00 01 Check the ground connections on anti ESD brushes Delivery Head and Flipper the Input Paper Guide the Multi Bin Mailbox Controller PCA the Flipper shaf
190. hoice Press Select to activate choice POSTSCRI PT AUTO CONTI NUE ON Press to display choice OFF Press Select to activate choice RESOURCE SAVE Appears only if PostScript is installed and then only if at least 13 Mbytes of memory are installed Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice PCL PS MEM nnnnnk nnnnnK possible memory sizes Press to display memory size choice Press Select to activate choice TONER LOW STOP Press to display choice CONTI NUE Press Select to activate choice PAGE PROTECT AUTO Displayed only after a partially printed page eject ON Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice Asterisk indicates printer default Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated 3 16 Operating Overview Print Quality Menu Table 3 10 Print Quality Menu Items Print Quality Menu Items Action Required ECONOMODE OFF Press to display choice ON Press Select to activate choice RESOLUTI ON 600 300 DOTS PER INCH Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT OFF Press to display choice ON Press Select to activate choice Lighter Press to display choice PRINT DENSI TY 1 gt Press Select to activate choice 3 To make print darker chooe a higher number to make it 4 lighter choose a lower number 5 Darker FUSI NG Press Menu to displa
191. ht Lower Door Assembly 4 Remove 2 screws CH 102 Figure 6 4 callout 3 from plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover 5 Carefully release the cover around the AC input connector Figure 6 4 callout 4 at the lower right of the back cover and slidethe right side of the cover slightly forward 6 Carefully releasethe retaining tabs Figure 6 4 callout 5 on the plastic panel tothe left of the metal back cover by gently pulling the cover to the left while moving both pieces away from the printer chassis Back Cover Removal and Replacement 6 19 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Front Cover 1 Open all access doors and remove the Duplex Unit if installed Open front access door and remove 3 screws CH 102 Figure 6 5 callout 1 3 Open the Diverter Access Door and release the two plastic retaining tabs inside the Duplex Unit cavity Figure 6 6 callout 2 N Caution Be careful the plastic upper retaining tabs will break off if the cover is tilted too far out 4 Carefully pull the bottom of the cover away from the chassis while moving it to the right to release the retaining tab Figure 6 5 callout 3 5 Carefully tilt the bottom edge of the cover away from the chassis to release the upper retaining tabs 6 20 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Front Cover 1 of 2 Front Cover 2 of 2 D d m9 aem pu E all Ead D E E d pr pen am E am am Removal and Re
192. ice An asterisk will appear beside your language selection 3 6 Operating Overview Table 3 3 Factory Default Settings DISPLAY LANGUAGE PAPER DESTINATION ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE ORIENTATION PERSONALITY RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT PRINT DENSITY 2 SIDED BINDING PRINT POSTSCRIPT ERRORS JAM RECOVERY PAGE PROTECT RESOLUTION AUTO CONTINUE TONER LOW POWER SAVE DELAY RESOURCE SAVING PARALLEL I O SPEED SETTING lO BUFFER lO SIZE COLD RESET PAPER SERVICE MESSAGE Operating Overview 3 7 M9IAI9AQ Dunejiedo Heavy Media Fuser Mode Explanation The Laser et 55i HM Heavy Media provides users the capability to enhance toner adhesion for heavier media The fuser mode choices can be made at the printer s control panel or with PJ L commands Press MENU until you seePRI NT QUALI TY MENU Press TEM until you seeFuser STD PAPER Make your choice by pressing and then SELECT to save the selection At the control panel the menu choices are as follows STDPAPER HEAVYPAPERI HEAVYPAPER 2 CARDSTOCKI CARDSTOCK2 CARDSTOCK3 The explanation below is to help determine the best fuser mode for specific media types Table 3 4 is provided as a quick reference tool and should be used as a guideline STDPAPER The best mode for typical copy bond type paper transparencies labels or envelopes A selection other than STDPAPER should not be necessary for this type of media The best media weight for
193. ify that the contacts are not dirty or corroded and that the spring action is functional If dirty clean using alcohol only if damaged replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA see Chapter 6 for procedure Figure 7 26 Primary Toner Registration Toner Sensor Drum Grou nd eis ol Developing Post Transfer Bias i Transfer Roller l E High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 7 76 Troubleshooting Checks Paper J ams Paper jams occur most often when Paper trays are not correctly loaded Make sure the paper is loaded with the arrow pointing UP in Tray 1 and DOWN in Trays 2 3 and A The print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP Laser et Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide The media is in poor condition The printer needs cleaning The printer monitors the timing of four sensors to determine that a paper jam has occurred PS2 PS1 PS1403 and PS1402 If a paper jam occurs the printer will display al x PAPER AM message on the control panel Seethe Printer Messages section earlier in this chapter for detailed descriptions of the 13 x messages and the recommended actions to resolve the messages 7 11 Dunoouse qnoJ L Figure 7 27 7 78 Figure 7 27 shows the possible locations for most of the paper jams Paper Path Jam Locations 1 loner cartridge area 6 2 Tray 1 pick up roller and feed area 7 3 Right door 8 4 Tray 4 transfer
194. igure 6 53 callout 1 and pull cover back from the chassis To Reinstall 1 Make sure the tab on the left lower corner is inserted in its alignment slot 2 Insert the star lockwasher under the lower right screw Figure 6 53 Tray 4 Back Cover Removal and Replacement 6 67 Left Cover 1 Remove 2 screws CH 108 Figure 6 54 callout 1 2 Pull out on the top of the cover and lift up on the right side of the cover to dear the retaining tabs along the bottom edge 3 Pull out on cover at the lower left corner Figure 6 54 callout 2 to release the plastic retainer tab and lift the cover off To Reinstall 1 Place the left side of the cover in place first and tilt the right side down and inward to place the lower retaining tabs over the chassis rail Figure 6 54 Tray 4 Left Cover 6 68 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 55 A WNP N Right Cover Remove the Transfer Assembly see Figure 6 64 Remove 2 screws CH 109 Figure 6 55 callout 1 Release plastic retaining tab Figure 6 55 callout 2 Carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to dear the retaining tabs along the inside bottom of the cover To Reinstall Make sure that the retaining tabs along the bottom of the cover are placed over the chassis rails Replace the Transfer Door Assembly Tray 4 Right Cover Removal and Replacement 6 69 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay Main Drive Assembly 1 Remove
195. igure 6 79 Unlock the cable dip Figure 6 66 callout 1 and unplug the ribbon cable Figure 6 66 callout 2 from the left end of the Delivery Head Assembly Raise the Delivery Head Mechanism to the top of the frame Support the Delivery Head M echanism and remove 4 screws CH 111 Figure 6 67 callout 3 Rotate the right end of the assembly forward while guiding the left end through its access opening Release the Anti Curl Strings from the pulleys on the back of the assembly Figure 6 68 callout 4 by removing the mounting pin form the center To Reinstall Replace the Anti Curl Strings into the pulleys on the back of the assembly Y ou may need torelease the Anti Curl String Springs at the bottom of the frame to have enough slack Carefully replace the ribbon cable into its connector Insert the left end of the assembly through its access opening and position the assembly onto its elevator mounts Make surethat thelocating pins arein place Replace the 2 screws CH 111 Reattach the Anti Curl String Springs at the bottom of the frame Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Ribbon Cable Removal and Replacement 6 81 9 jueuiooejdey pue enouiay 6 82 Removal and Replacement Caution Figure 6 69 Flipper Assembly 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 2 Remove the Left and Right Covers see Figure 6 65 3 Removethe Delivery H ead Position Motor see Fi
196. ilbox Y ou can move the Delivery Head Assembly downward gently with your hand 3 Disconnect the cable going from the stapling unit to the mailbox 4 Removethe Left Output Bin 5 Lift up on the outer edge of the stapling unit to clear the retaining notches and pull the stapling unit forward out of the frame Figure 6 91 ToReinstall Slidethe stapling unit intoits designated slot and lower it into its retaining notches Replace the Left Output Bin Connect the cable from the stapling unit to the mailbox Turn the printer ON Figure 6 91 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 102 Removal and Replacement Caution Caution Figure 6 92 Back Plate 1 Removethe Stapling Unit Assembly see Figure 6 91 2 Removethe Scan Bar by carefully pressing the tab on the scan bar backwards and downwards through the hole of the Stapling Bed see Figure 6 92 with a flat tip screwdriver then lift the bar 3 Removethe torx screw joining the Back Plate with the Stapling Unit see Figure 6 93 callout 2 4 Release the ground cable that is connected to the Back Plate see Figure 6 93 callout 1 ToReinstall Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly Do not overtighten the screws when replacing the Back Plate Do not touch the metallic plate edges Removal and Replacement 6 103 9 jueuiooejdey pue
197. ind diverter door Functional Overview 5 21 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny PS1401 PS1402 PS1302 SW1401 PS1301 PS1403 Multi Purpose Tray PCA Switch Sensor PCA MT1 Tray 2 SW1601 SW1604 Fan 3 SMT1 Fan 2 Tray 3 SW1601 SW1604 PS1206 PS1208 PS1205 PS1202 PS1203 PS1201 PIU PCA Figure 5 15 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans 5 22 Functional Overview Figure 5 16 2000 Sheet I nput Unit Tray 4 Components The components of the 2000 Sheet Input Unit paper path are illustrated in Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 and Table 5 2 illustrate and describe all of its sensors switches clutches and motors Upper Transfer Assembly Rollers Transfer Assembly A Lower Transfer stack gt gt Assembly VA Rollers Lifting A P ate Separation Roller 2000 Sheet Input Unit Paper Path Funcional Overview 5 23 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Table 5 2 2000 Sheet Input Unit Sensors Switches Clutches and Motors CL31 Transfer Assembly Clutch Transfer Assembly CL32 Main Drive Clutch Lower Chassis behind Back Cover MT31 Main Motor Lower Chassis behind Back Cover PS31 Paper Entry Sensor Transfer Assembly PS32 Paper Exit Sensor Transfer Assembly PS33 Paper Tray Empty Sensor Paper Pick Up Assembly PS34 Paper Tray Raised Sensor Paper Pick Up Assembly PS35 Transfer Assembly Closed Sensor Paper Pick Up Assembly SW31 Lifter Sensing Switch Upper Chassis above Pap
198. ing 3 21 6 40 media selection guidelines 1 11 media separation 5 18 memory printer 1 3 upgrade 6 7 memory requirements 1 20 menu map 3 9 menus control panel 3 8 selecting 3 8 Menus key 3 3 MIO Jet Direct 1 3 MIO 1 and 2 menus 3 18 model number 1 7 motors 5 11 fan 5 11 6 33 6 35 main 5 11 main assembly 6 46 scanner 5 11 tray 2 amp 3 pick up5 11 multi bin mailbox 6 80 blind cover 6 98 components 5 28 COVers 6 80 delivery head assembly 6 81 encoder assembly 6 96 flipper assembly 6 83 input paper guide 6 85 interlock switch 6 86 jam access door assembly 6 87 lower elevator pulley assemblies 6 90 metallic tape and housing assembly 6 92 motor 6 96 motor delivery head position 6 95 operation 5 31 paper bins 6 98 paper paths 5 28 PCA controller 6 99 replacing 6 14 strings anti curl 6 100 transport belt 6 96 N NARC 1 26 North American Response Center NARC 1 26 O On Line key 3 3 operating environment 2 3 optional printer memory 1 3 ordering parts 1 21 related documentation 1 24 overcurrent protection 5 6 overhead transparency specifications 1 12 overvoltage protection 5 6 P page count setting 3 21 6 40 verification 3 19 page usage monthly 1 3 paper capacities 1 4 paper curl 7 85 paper input unit sensor 6 61 paper input unit PIU 47 paper jam detection 5 40 paper jams 177 paper motion monitoring and control 5 10 paper paths 2000 sheet input un
199. ing Verify that the Retainer Motor bed This action along with the registration connect is connected to the pusher correctly aligns the paper prior to Control PCA refer to callout 2 on stapling Figure 6 91 If all connections are secure on the Control PCA yet the retainer fingers are still stuck replace the stapling assembly 20 MEMORY OVERFLOW Error The printer received more data from the Press Select to continue To DATALOST computer than can fit in its available user increase memory remove some memory Only the data currently in the fonts macros or any other data available memory will be printed Some data from memory or simplify the may be lost page sent to the printer or install additional memory NOTE The printer will automatically resume printing after this error occurs if AUTO CONTINUE ON is set 7 48 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Message Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message 21 PRINTOVERRUN DATA Error 22 PARALLEL IO ERROR CHECK SETUP 22 HP MIO 1 IO ERROR CHECK SETUP 22 HP MIO 2 IO ERROR CHECK SETUP 30 1 1 DISK FAILURE 30 1 2 FAILURE Message Description The data dense text rules raster or vector graphics sent to the printer was too complex An I O buffer overrun error For parallel PAR configurations the computer and printer are not communicating because of improper signal protocols The upper slot HP MIO buffer has overflowed The lower slot HP MIO b
200. intenance shows the number of pages the printer has printed since a maintenance kit was installed Installed Personalities and Options lists printer languages and all accessories that are installed Note HP LaserJet 5Si HM will show 1 Meg ROM when Thermal Control PCAis installed The PostScript key SIMM uses the same identifier Error Log shows the number of errors currently in the error log and the last three errors that occurred Memory shows the total amount of installed memory and indicates the amount of available memory for PCL applications such as font downloading software Information about the current I O Buffering and Resource Saving configuration appears here If the printer does not have enough memory installed to enable these two features the amount of additional memory needed appears Security lists whether the control panel is locked whether the control panel has a security password and if the Printer Hard Disk optional in 5Si 5Si MX has been write protected Paper Handling Options lists the installed paper handling accessories These accessories may include the Duplex Unit Envelope Feeder 2000 Sheet Input Tray Multi Bin Mailbox or Mailbox with Stapler Operating Overview 3 27 e MINIMO Bunerado IAWISCUNVT LIWALYOd LIVALUOd NOTIWLINAIYO L NISInO IVNOILdO 9 NIGLNO TWNOILdO S NIGLNO IWNOILdO Y NIGLOO IVNOILdO NIGLNO IVNOILdO NISLNO TWNOILdO T NIGLOO TWNOILGO NIH lL dl O dOL gt N
201. ion 5 26 see tray 4 6 67 A ac access cover 6 19 ac power distribution5 6 accessories user installable 6 7 accessories and options 1 17 acoustic emissions 1 10 adding memory 6 7 personalities 6 7 adhesive labels 1 1 anti static wrist wrap 6 7 B back cover 6 20 black lines 7 67 blank white page 7 64 bubble print 7 11 C cartridge slots 1 3 character voids 7 70 cleaning printer 4 3 spilled toner 4 5 clutches 5 10 cold reset 3 6 printer memory 3 28 cold reset default paper size 3 22 components 2000 sheet input unit tray 4 5 23 multi bin mailbox 5 28 configuration menu 3 13 consumables printer 1 22 control panel 3 3 6 18 configuration menu 3 13 features 1 3 I O menu 3 17 job menu 3 11 keys 3 3 layout 3 3 lights 3 4 menu map 3 9 menus 3 8 MIO 1 and 2 menus 3 18 printing menu 3 5 selecting a menu 3 8 setting defaults 3 5 test menu 3 12 tray menu 3 10 covers 6 19 ac access 6 19 back 6 20 front 6 21 lower left 6 23 top 6 24 D de controller system 5 10 default settings 3 5 defaults factory 3 5 delivery unit 6 26 detector toner cartridge 5 7 determining memory requirements 1 20 dimensions printer 1 8 disk drive replacing 6 8 display language 3 6 diverter assembly 6 28 documentation related 1 24 door assembly diverter 6 29 right lower 6 30 draft mode see EconoMode 5 9 dropout 7 67 drum cleaning 5 4 drum conditioning 5 15 drum rotation functional check 7 75 duplex printi
202. is recommended This language is standard in the HP LaserJet 5Si MX printer Duplex Unit C3762A Provides the printer with two sided printing capability HM Duplex Unit C4178A Heavy media duplexer Only compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si HM C31244 Envelope Tray 4 HP 2000 Sheet C3763A Adjustable for Letter Legal Ledger ISO A4 ISO Input Unit R77 1002 000CN for A3 JIS B4 Includes C3768A External Paper LJ 5Si amp 5Si MX only Handling PCA C3773A for LJ 5Si Mopier only Feeder C3765A Attaches to printer above Tray 1 holds up to 100 envelopes Supports Commercial 10 C5 DL Monarch ISO B5 Multi Bin Mailbox Features eight bins holding 250 sheets of paper each Supports the same paper sizes as the printer Envelopes labels and transparencies must be sent to the Face Up Bin Mailbox with Stapler C3774A Features five bins holding 250 sheets of paper each Supports the same paper sizes as the printer Provides stapling of jobs for both letter and A4 paper sizes Envelopes labels and transparencies must be sent to the Face Up Bin Tray 2 500 Sheet Input C2931 A Holds 500 sheets adjustable for Letter Legal R77 0004 000CN ISO A4 JISB4 Tray 3 500 Sheet Input C2930A Holds 500 sheets adjustable for Letter Legal R77 0003 000CN Ledger ISO A4 ISO A3 JIS B4 HP parallel printer cable C2951A HP recommended IEEE 1284 Cable with Aand B 3 meter connectors 1 18 Product Information Ta
203. isis the top bin of the unit It replaces the printer s F ace U p bin e Mailbox Mode This mode uses the remaining eight five in the Mailbox with Stapler bins Up to eight five in the Mailbox with Stapler users can be assigned their own bin e ob Separator Mode Different print jobs are placed in separate bins starting from the top Bin 1 to the bottom Bin 8 in the MBM and Bin 5 in the Mailbox with Stapler e Virtual Stacker Mode Printed sheets are stacked in the bins from the bottom Bin 8 in theMBM and Bin 5 in the Mailbox with Stapler to the top Bin 1 regardless of print job Thefirst sheet is sent to the bottom bin until it is full the next sheet is sent to the next upward bin etc In Mailbox and J ob Separator Modes when power is applied tothe unit the delivery head first moves to the bottom of the frame and then upward to the top home position It then checks that all the bins areinstalled and if any are full with PSBinFull H ead Position After these checks the delivery head returns to the top or home position In Virtual Stacker M ode after counting the bins the delivery head moves to the lowest numbered empty bin using PSBinE mpty The printer delivers the paper to the MBM at its speed of 107 mm per second The paper sheets are moved through the MBM transport and delivery systems approximately five times faster 500 mm per second than the printer delivers them in order to maintain print speeds The sheet del
204. it 5 23 duplex unit 5 20 envelope feeder 5 20 multi bin mailbox 5 28 printer 5 20 paper paths and components 5 20 paper size switches 5 38 paper sizes 1 4 paper specifications 1 11 parts HPD 1 24 ordering 1 21 PDO Parts Direct Ordering 1 24 SME Support Materials Europe 1 24 parts and diagrams 8 1 8 32 pca de controller 6 48 output paper sensor 6 49 paper size 6 52 PCL configuration page 3 23 PDO Parts Direct Ordering 1 24 personality upgrade 6 7 phone numbers parts sources 1 21 technical assistance 1 25 photosensitive drum 5 13 cleaning 5 14 conditioning 5 15 pick up motor 5 11 pickup roller tray 2 6 60 tray 3 6 60 PIU See paper input unit 6 47 power control 1 3 power distribution system 5 5 power save 5 8 power save mode 1 3 1 9 3 22 power supply high voltage 6 54 low voltage 6 55 preventive maintenance 4 6 print capacity toner 1 22 print density adjustment 5 7 print media shipping 1 13 specifications 1 11 storing 1 13 print quality cleaning printer 4 3 HP LaserJet toner cartridges 1 23 refilled toner cartridges 1 23 transfer roller 4 3 print resolution 1 3 print speed 1 3 printer accessories and options 1 17 adjustments 4 cleaning 4 external view 1 fonts 1 formatter assemblies 1 16 functional block diagram 5 4 functionality 5 3 identification 1 7 input sources 5 38 maintenance 4 1 4 10 model number 1 7 optional memory 1 3 paper paths 5 20
205. it is rotated into place 1 Observethe gear assembly position from inside the toner cartridge cavity Figure 6 28 callout 2 2 First tilt thetop of the assembly inward and insert the upper back part of the assembly in place Figure 6 29 callout 3 3 Continue rotating the assembly upwards into place 4 Make surethat the locating pins are properly aligned and that the gear assembly fits tightly against the chassis before replacing the screws Figure 6 27 callout 4 6 42 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 27 Removal and Replacement Main Gear Assembly 1 of 3 00 ed Figure 6 Main Gear Assembly 2 of 3 Removal and Replacement 6 43 Figure 6 29 Main Gear Assembly 3 of 3 6 44 Removal and Replacement Caution Figure 6 30 Main Motor Assembly 1 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 4 2 Removethe HVPS seeFigure 6 40 3 Unplug the connector Figure 6 30 callout 1 Be careful when removing the Main Motor The steel drive shaft can damage the plastic gears 4 Remove 4 screws CH 103 Figure 6 30 callout 2 To Reinstall Align the Main Motor to the chassis with the locator tab Figure 6 30 callout 3 and the machined ring around the output shaft Main Motor Removal and Replacement 6 45 9 juaua9e doy pue eno0uay Caution Figure 6 31 Note N P 3 Paper Input Unit PIU Remove both Tray 2 and Tray 3 to prevent damage to the PIU plastic sensor flags
206. ity of the output bin is 300 stapled sheets in jobs of five sheets or equivalent combinations Power On or Reset Sequence At power on or reset events are performed in the following sequence Stapler Assembly is set to a ready state Retainer Assembly is turned to its initial position Rack Assembly is moved to find its home position which is in theleft side of the Top Cover Assembly Slider Assembly is moved to find its home position which is inside of the Stapling Bed Slider Assembly is moved fully out from the Stapling Bed to the eject position Rack Assembly is moved to activate the E xit Flap Assembly Slider Assembly is moved to its home position Rack Assembly is returned to its home position Functional Overview 5 37 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Printer Input Sources Paper Size Switches The paper guides in Trays 2 and 3 operate four levers at the back of the trays which activate the size sensing switches SW1601 through SW1604 mounted in the printer chassis Table 5 8 compares paper sizes to switch conditions Table 5 8 Paper Size Switches ke andscape Printing from Trays 2 and 3 The Pickup F eed and Separation rollers start rotating when the DC Controller receives the PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA Then the DC Controller activates the Pickup Solenoid SL 1 and starts feeding paper through the Paper Input Unit PIU triggering photosensors PS2 and then PS1 These sensors inform the DC Controll
207. ivery speed for Bins 1 through 8 Bins 1 thorugh 5 in the Mailbox with Stapler is reduced to 200 mm per second just prior to release to prevent uneven stacking Transport Belt speed is monitored by PSBelt When paper is to be delivered the delivery head moves to the bin indicated by the commands from the EPH PCA The Eject roller is inserted into the bin and starts rotating The MBM then signals the printer that it is ready toreceive paper The printer feeds the paper sheet through the face up delivery slot to the MBM input guide Paper arrival is sensed by PSEntry If the paper is designated for the face up bin the MBM feeds it through the flipper assembly and releases it into the top bin at 350 mm per second If the sheet is designated for one of the face down bins bins 1 through 8 or 5 in the Mailbox with Stapler it is fed through the flipper assembly until the Funcional Overview 5 31 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny trailing edge is sensed by PSFaceUp TheFlipper Roller motor M3 then reverses and feeds the sheet down between the transport belt and the metallic tape into the delivery head at the accellerated speed of 500 mm per second Thereis a magnetic strip on the guide behind the transport belt When a sheet of paper is fed down the transport belt the magnetic attraction between the metallic tape and the magnetic strip holds the paper against the transport belt as it is pulled downward to the delivery head PSExit1 in the deliv
208. k with the network administrator to determine the correct P Address for the printer Verify Host System Operation Try to print to another known working printer or movethe failing printer to a known working location Verify that the correct driver is installed and operating properly Check with HP Service and Support in the User s Manual to obtain thelatest Windows and PostScript drivers Note Todisplay the printer driver version In the printer driver select the Print Quality tab and dick on About to display the printer driver revision level Verify Network and Server Operation e Try to print the job to the printer s parallel port Trytoprint from the host system through the network to another printer Contact the network administrator for assistance 7 20 Troubleshooting Note Note Verification Paper Path Test Usingthe error trend information from Step 5 Error Log you may verify a specific printer paper path with the paper path test Y ou must first set the desired paper destination in the configuration menu and then select the paper path test The paper path test menu will allow you to select the desired paper source and number In order to perform the paper path test the printer must be configured to mailbox mode If the printer is not in mailbox mode ask the J etAdmin administrator to change the configuration to mailbox mode to complete this test Multi Bin Mailbox and Stapler are not supported with the Lase
209. l Block Diagram 5 4 Power Distribution System 5 5 AC Power Distribution 0 5 6 Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection 5 6 High Voltage Power Distribution 5 7 Formatter System 2 2l el e lees n 5 8 DC Controller System 2 57 5 10 Laser and Scanner Drive 5 10 Paper Motion Monitoring and Control 5 10 Ar IIA 5 10 Engine Test Microswitch e 0 eee 5 11 MOLOG sos Rm woB umm ded eeeeo eae aa 5 11 Image Formation System 2 5 12 Toner Cartridge a 5 13 DrumCleaning seres 5 14 Drum Conditioning 4 25 2 5 5 15 Image Writing ers 5 16 Image Developing rrr 5 17 Image Transferring and Media Separation 5 18 Image Fusing lll esee s 5 19 Paper Paths and Components 5 20 Printer Duplex Unit and Envelope Feeder 5 20 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 Components 5 23 2000 Sheet Input Unit Operation 5 26 Multi Bin Mailbox Components sls 5 28 Multi Bin Mailbox Operation 5 31 Stapling Unit Components 5 33 Mailbox with Stapler Operation 5 36 Mai
210. le 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 Table 7 20 Table 7 21 Table 7 22 Table 7 23 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 Table 8 9 Table 8 10 Table 8 11 Table 8 12 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table B 1 DEVICES P a a dd ros ir di ae A 7 11 Image Quality 7 15 Printer Control Panel Messages 7 24 Blank White page nonoo e a en 7 64 Blac Page gh Goce oen RA t Due A 7 65 Fading PRUE 23 3 Ac a A AO Ade 7 66 POD OU co T PL Bene ee de te 7 67 Black Lines parallel or perpendicular to path 7 67 TORS SITIO dci abia e os tt AR aa Ue ae hc UTERE e doa 7 68 Background Scatter or Leading Edge Halo 7 68 Repetitive Defects cles 7 69 LineatEdgeof Paper 7 69 Improperly Formed Characters Character Voids 7 70 Faulty Registration 7 70 ImageSkew 2 e 4 7 71 BUDbDIG PHINC pra cho ro a odo x 53 7 71 White Stripes parallel to path 7 71 Partial BlankPage ccn 7 72 Compressed Print 7 72 Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page Tray 4 Input Only uu ue e ee cR ee t ee EG 7 72 Paper GUE Ge a Sta eevee e NCC aede a ems Sd e Seg 7 85 Printer and Paper Handling Components 8 8 P
211. leaning blade inside the toner cartridge is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times As the drum rotates during printing excess toner is removed from the drum surface and stored in the waste toner receptacle inside the toner cartridge Figure 5 8 Primary charging roller Developing cylinder Transfer charging roller Static charge eliminator Drum Cleaning 5 14 Functional Overview Figure 5 9 Drum Conditioning After the drum is physically cleaned it is conditioned by applying a uniform negative charge across the surface of the drum with the primary charging roller located in thetoner cartridge The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber charged with an AC current which erases any residual charges and produces a uniform drum surface potential The AC current is centered around a negative DC bias which changes according to the Print Density setting Primary charging r _ rolle Photosensitive Drum DC bias Primary Charging Roller Functional Overview 5 15 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Figure 5 10 I mage Writing During the writing process a modulated laser diode projects a beam onto a rotating six sided scanning mirror As the scanning mirror rotates the beam is directed through a set of focusing lenses to a direction changing mirror which reflects it through a slot on the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum The beam sweeps across the drum and
212. lic Tape Delivery Head Eject Rollers Controller PCA Transport Belt Motor Figure 5 18 Multi Bin Mailbox Paper Paths 5 28 Functional Overview Table 5 5 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Sensors Switches and Motors Paper Bin below is full Sensor Delivery Head left end Sw IRLed Infrared Light Emitter Diode for stapling Delivery Head left end assembly Functional Overview 5 29 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny PSFaceUp Flipper Roller Motor M2 Delivery Head Position Motor M1 IRLED PSExit PSEject Interlock S witch SW1 Delivery Head Roller Motor M3 PSBinFull Head Position PSBinE mpty PSExit 2 Ejector Motor M4 Controller PCA PSBelt Transport Belt CQ Motor M5 Figure 5 19 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler Sensors and Motors C Z7 T 5 30 Functional Overview Multi Bin Mailbox Operation All communication and control of the Multi Bin Mailbox and the 2000 Sheet Input Unit is through the External Paper Handling EPH PCA mounted on the F ormatter Assembly These instructions are sent to the Multi Bin Mailbox controller PCA located at the bottom of the frame The main components of the Multi Bin Mailbox and their functions are listed in Table 5 5 Power is provided to the Multi bin Mailbox MBM by an external 24V dc power supply that plugs into the MBM controller PCA The Multi Bin Mailbox MBM provides four output modes e 125 sheet face up bin Th
213. lines Media Type Weight Capacity Feed Orientation Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 in Single sided 16 to 28 Ib 500 sheets of 20 Ib bond Landscape 216 x 279 mm 60 to 105 g m paper Paper ISO A4 8 3 x 11 7 in j Two sided 16 to 28 lb bond letter and A4 for Trays 2 3 Landscape 210 x 297 mm 60 to 105 g Im and 4 Paper Legal 8 5 x 14 in Portrait 216 x 356 mm Paper JIS B4 10 12 x 14 33 in Portrait 257 x 364 mm Paper Ledger 11 x 17 in Portrait 279 x 432 mm Paper ISO A3 11 7 x 16 5 in Portrait 297 x 420 mm Tray 4 2000 Sheet I nput Unit Table 1 5 Tray 4 Media Guidelines Media Type Weight Capacity Feed Orientation Paper Letter 8 5 x 11 in Single sided 16 to 28 Ib 2000 sheets of 20 lb bond Landscape 216 x 279 mm 60 to 105 g m paper Paper ISO A4 8 3 x 11 7 in l Two sided 16 to 28 lb bond letter and A4 for Trays 2 3 Landscape 210 x 297 mm 60 to 105 g m and 4 Paper Legal 8 5 x 14 in Portrait 216 x 356 mm Paper JIS B4 10 12 x 14 33 in Portrait 257 x 364 mm Paper Ledger 11 x 17 in Portrait 279 x 432 mm Paper ISO A3 11 7 x 16 5 in Portrait 297 x 420 mm 1 6 Product Information Figure 1 1 Identification Model and Serial Numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as C3166A for the HP Laser et 5Si printer The serial number contains
214. lopes and heavier papers Background Scatter at Leading Edge Only Leading Edge Halo 1 This problem is caused by toner buildup in the Clean Fuser Inlet Guide Fuser Inlet Guide Table 7 13 Repetitive Defects Possible Cause Recommended Action AaBbCc 1 Toner cartridge is damaged If the defect Inspect the drum for scratches or damage repeats at any of the following intervals and in Replace the toner cartridge Use the Repetitive AaBbCc the direction of paper movement it is associated defect Ruler Figure 7 25 AaBbCc with a component inside the toner cartridge See note below AaBbCc rinted side defects ACBOC amp Toner cartridge drum 94mm 3 3 4 inches Developing roller 51mm 2 inches Back side defect Charging roller 38mm 1 1 2 inches 2 Transfer Roller has toner on it If defects Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry lint free occur on the back of the page at intervals of cloth DO NOT touch the Transfer Roller with 61mm 2 3 8 inches the Transfer Roller may be your fingers If the problem persists replace the dirty This problem sometimes corrects itself Transfer Roller Assembly after a few pages 3 Dirty Rollers Any dirty roller in the paper path Examine and clean rollers in the paper path may result in a repetitive print defect refer to Chapter 4 4 Fusing Assembly is dirty or defective Clean the Fusing Assembly using alcohol If the problem persists replace the Fusing Assembly 5 Gears
215. ly front back and side at the top and bottom of the tray Does the printer need Inspect paper path and paper path rollers Refer to cleaning cleaning procedures in Chapter 4 When was the User Determine from PCL Configuration Page the number of pages Maintenance performed on since the last maintenance refer to Figure 7 5 The User the printer Maintenance Kit should be installed every 350 000 images 250 000 images with HP LaserJet 5Si Heavy Media printers by the customer Troubleshooting 7 37 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message 13 0 PAPER JAM CLEAR PRINTER 13 x PAPER JAM CLEAR n PAGES OR 13 xx PAPER JAM CLEAR n PAGES 7 38 Troubleshooting Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description Message Attendance Required Paper is jammed somewhere in the paper path or a sensor flag may be stuck causing a false paper jam warning The jam was detected immediately after a power cycle See Figure 7 13 for sensor flag locations Attendance Required Paper is jammed in the specified Paper Handling Device Troubleshoot the Error Log message either Show or Print the Error Log n number of pages inside the print mechanism cause of Jam e g 13 3 PAPER JAM would indicate a jam in the Fuser Assembly X Recommended Action Refer to the General Paper Path Troubleshooting Remove jammed paper see Clearing Paper Jams in the User s Manual Troubleshooting Hints
216. m occurs in the Envelope F eeder Duplex Unit 2000 Sheet Input Unit or Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler the 13 x Paper Jam message will indicate the approximate location Refer to Table 7 1 for more details Printer Timing TheFormatter PCA and the DC Controller PCA share information during printer operation This information consists of printer status command and dot image data Figure 5 22 and 5 23 show the general timing of the printer events The following events take place during normal printer operation Table 5 9 Printer Timing WAIT From power ON to the end of Main Motor initial Clear the drum surface potential and clean the rotation Transfer Roller STBY From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period Maintain the printer in the READY state standby until the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA Or from the end of the LSTR period to power OFF INTR From the input of the PRNT signal from the Stabilize the photosensitive drum sensitivity in initial rotation Formatter PCA until the laser diode intensity has preparation for printing Clean the Transfer been stabilized Roller From the end of the initial rotation until the Form images on the photosensitive drum based Scanner Motor stops on the VDO signal from the Formatter PCA Transfer the image to the media LSTR From the primary voltage DC OFF until the Deliver the last sheet of paper and clean the last rotation Main Motor stops Transfer Roller
217. matter External Paper 00 Control PCA 2000 Multi Bin Sheet Mailbox Input Tray ee ee ee e d di v Long C Link Cable dnek Cable 70 inches 178 cm 39 inches 97 cm Communications Link C Link Cables Supported Daisy Chain Connections All C Link cables have a single dot molded into the device output connector cable end and two dots molded into the device input connector cable end The devices may not be recognized by the External Paper Handling Controller if the cables are not connected exactly as shown in Figure 7 7 Note It is important that the C Link cables are installed in the supported daisy chain configuration as shown in Figure 7 7 This is sothat the devices are recognized and correctly reported on the error log Example In the error log message 13 12 03 the last two digits 03 indicate that Device 3 has failed in the supported configuration Device 1 2000 Sheet Input Tray Device 2 Multi Bin Mailbox Device 3 Stapler Module Note It is possible but not recommended to attach the C Link cables in other configurations This will rearrange the supported device numbering Keep in mind this configuration when evaluating the error log 7 14 Troubleshooting Image Quality When you are working with customers obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting their printer Ask the customer to explain th
218. matter Test the disc by selecting PRI NT DI SC DIRECTORY from the test on the control panel Troubleshooting 7 49 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action 31 1 1 DISK NOT An optional disk accessory is not properly Press Select to continue INITIALIZED initialized If the proper initialization Refer to the Windows JetAdmin command is sent to the disk the message Utility or Macintosh LaserJet may be removed Utility to initialize the disk Replace the Disk Cable Assembly Replace the Disk Assembly Replace the Formatter 40 x MIO ERROR An abnormal connector break in the specified Press Select to continue Data MIO card occurred while transferring data will be lost The current print job from the computer to the printer at the port in question will be canceled The physical port will 1 HP MIO port 1 upper slot be removed from the list of active 2 HP MIO port 2 lower slot ports The system will continue operating with all other active ports Cycle the printer s power to replace the port on the list of active ports X X 41 x ERROR A temporary non fatal printing error Remove the page from the output occurred This error is saved in the error log message bin then press Select to continue The page containing x 1 GENERAL MISPRINT ERROR the error will automatically reprint x 2 BEAM DETECT MALFUNCTION If the printer is set to AUTO x 3
219. n Functional Cycles of the Stapler 5 36 Functional Overview 5 1 Printer INHU Soul C8s i o uoce d xo e ado nx Ste CU a ye d 5 38 Paper SizeSwitches 4 5 38 Printing from Trays2and3 lens 5 38 PINUNO EOD T ray T a bm a OEC ata A ee RO he Sed 5 39 Printing from the Envelope Feeder 5 39 Printing from Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit 5 39 TWO SITOCI PANDENG c ca uc a rne bct a IRE EE he de MCA 5 39 Paper J am Detection llle 5 40 Pinte TIMING o optic oe ci ze cir Dic De AL C ca tc e Dc e ok Cr ci A ER ie Dun 5 40 5 2 Functional Overview Basic Printer Functionality This chapter presents a functional overview of the printer and the printing processes The following topics functions and systems are discussed Basic Printer Functionality Power Distribution System Formatter System DC Controller System mage Formation System Paper Paths and Components Funcional Overview 5 3 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Printer Functional Block Diagram Figure 5 1 is a functional block diagram of the printer showing the basic paths for signal control and media lt Media Path Signal Control Path Formatter System Memor SIMMS Disk p Parallel ality Accessor i Port g YF PCA o ry Envelope Feeder 1 Face Down Delive Laser Tray 1 MP Face Up Registration Left Output Assembly Bin C
220. n Motor uon be Rok POR X ROYXOEOE 0 out faa ee ew es 6 32 Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS a 6 33 Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing 6 34 Fan Motor 22 ok 2er A 6 34 Fan Housing SeeFan 2 6 34 Fan 4 Exhuast Delivery Unit 6 35 Feeder Assembly nnn 6 36 Removal and Replacement 6 1 Formatter Assembly ccn 6 38 FusingAssembly rrr n 6 40 Laser Scanner Assembly 6 41 Main Gear Assembly ele 6 42 Main Motor Assembly ee 6 45 Paper Input Unit PIU o 6 46 PCA DC Controller 2 6 47 PCA Output Paper SenSsO a a a 6 48 PCA Papa SZE vu us doo code uc d Ote o ea POE epe T a 6 51 Power Supply High Voltage HVPS 6 53 Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS 6 54 Registration Assembly e e 6 55 Roller and Separation Pad Tray 1 6 58 Peed ROUGH soni sap de decr Be Re Se an 6 58 Separation Pad a ae eee Ok ee AA e Dd 6 59 Rollers Tray 2 3 Pickup Feed and Separation 6 60 Sensor Paper Input Unit PS2 6 61 Sensor Registration PS1 6 62 Solenoid Assembly SL3 FaceUp 6 63 Transfer Roller Assembly
221. n line 3 24 Operating Overview WN e Testing the Printer PCL Configuration Page When you print a PCL Configuration Page the printer checks its internal controller and I O interface then prints two pages one showing the overall printer configuration see Figure 3 2 and one showing the current menu settings see Figure 3 3 You can review these printouts to verify proper installation of installed accessories options and personalities Press Menus until TEST MENU appears Press Items until PCL CONFI GURATI ON PAGE appears Press Select to print the configuration pages Paper Path Test Y ou can test printer operation with the Paper Path Test in the Test Menu It will print 1 10 100 or 500 single or 2 sided pages from any of the paper trays or the Envelope feeder and deliver them to a previously specified output bin First select PAPER DESTI NATI ON and2 SI DED printing if installed in the Configuration M enu Table 3 9 and then run the Paper Path Test from the Test Menu Table 3 8 Operating Overview 3 25 e MINIMO Bunerado HEWLETT Configuration PACKARD Page O Memory Total Memory 4 MBytes Available Memory 2 19 MBytes I 0 Buffering O KBytes Allocated of 100 KBytes Available Resource Saving Not Enabled Need ES Control Panel Lock DISABLED Control Panel Password DISABLED O Paper Handling Options Duplex Unit PH Controller 01 62 Device 1 HEWLETT PACKARD 2000 SH
222. n physical and electrical characteristics of the printer For information on the printer site and environmental requirements such as operating temperature and humidity ventilation etc see Chapter 2 Table 1 6 Printer Dimensions Descipion Dimension Height 21 3 in 541 mm Height of 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 18 9 in 480 mm Width printer only 46 75 in 1187 mm with Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 66 25 in 1683 mm attached Width of Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler 19 5 in 495 mm Depth body 20 5 in 520 mm Weight without toner cartridge and with paper trays 99 lbs 45 kg Toner cartridge weight Full 106 oz 3000 g Empty 80 5 oz 2200 g 1 Add 5 5 inches 140 mm for the Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox With Stapler Refer to Chapter 2 for more details 2 Some quantity of toner will reside in the waste toner area of a toner cartridge when the toner supply is exhausted Therefore toner cartridge weight may be an unreliable indication of remaining toner supply 1 8 Product Information Table 1 7 Electrical Specifications Volts Freq Amps watts typical 120 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz printing 500 100 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz standby 135 PowerSave Mode LaserJet 5Si 21 LaserJet 5Si MX 24 220 Vac 10 50Hzzw 2 Hz printing 500 240Vac 10 50 Hz 2 Hz standby 135 PowerSave Mode LaserJet 5Si 21 LaserJet 5Si MX 24 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray
223. n pusher refer to Figure 7 20 As registration pusher arms Verify viewed from the rear the registration pusher that nothing interferes with their arms apply slight pressure against the right movement You should be able to edge of the paper registering the paper easily slide the arms back and against the left side wall of the stapling bed forth with a slight amount of Registration is necessary to ensure that all resistance Remove any paper in the stapling bed is square prior to obstruction s Cycle power See stapling The rack motor and PS Rack if the printer completes its photosensor control the motion of the pusher power on sequence Check the arms refer to Figure 5 21 top cover assembly pushers and cables If the pushers are stuck or Power on sequence the following stapler the cables are damaged replace mechanisms are exercised and returned to the entire assembly The top their starting positions refer to Figure 7 20 cover assembly includes the registration pusher offset pusher exit flap cables Replace the entire retainer arms and slider arms stapling unit as required Troubleshooting 7 47 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action 13 12 PAPER JAM A slider jam occurred The slider arms are To remove the paper on the stuck or something is interfering with their stapling bed Cycle power See if movement refer to Figure 7 20 Two slider the
224. n the current transformer detects a failure in the sub heater For 200 V model only When the FSRD2E signal is output and this signal is L the sub heater turns on For 200 V model only When the FSRD2E signal is output and this signal is L the sub heater turns on L when the relay turns off L when the rated power of the power supply is different from that of the fixing unit 200 V model only H when the power supply outputs 24V to the DC controller L when the 200 V main heater is installed L when the 200 V sub heater is installed Troubleshooting 7 93 Dunoouse qnoJ L Figure 7 35 Printer Main Wiring Diagram 7 94 Troubleshooting Registration paper sensor Paper jam sensor Tray paper out sensor Door sensor Paper surface sensor Lifter abnormal position sensing switch Paper level sensing switch Paper size sensing switch Figure 7 36 PS31 4107 3 J102 1 J101 10 J207 1 2 2 9 5 PS32 108 3 J102 4 J101 7 J207 4 2 5 6 5 PS33 11 3 J110 1 J109 9 J208 3 1 3 7 5 2 2 8 4 PS35 1413 3 J110 4 J109 3 J208 9 2 5 2 10 PS34 112 3 J110 7 J109 3 J208 6 IA 8 O O 7 SW31 m J121 1 J120 2 Paper level sensing switch PCB gem an w uu a we Ss AD UD a a e a au mu a i I 2 SW601 1 J601 1 J210 2 2 SW602 2 3 1 3 1 l 1 i La aa ws aaa a Paper size sensing switch PCB FT AAA dri 1 i rc 9W701 J701 1 J209 5 t m SW702 i 2 4 2 SW703 3 3 1 M SW704 1 4 2 i
225. nal destination is these steps Inspect the Metallic either the stapler or one of the mailboxes Tape remove any obstructions paper moves from the Flipper Assembly to that may be in its path Remove the Transport Belt Magnetic attraction holds the left side cover of the MailBox the paper between the transport belt and a Verify that the Encoder Disc is magnetic strip affixed to the moving head securely mounted to the assembly See Figure 7 22 Transport Motor shaft and the Encoder photosensor is positioned correctly to read the segmented encoder disc see Figure 7 19 If the error persists replace the Multi Bin MailBox 13 12 PAPER JAM A paper jam occurred in the delivery head Clear the paper jam The delivery head receives paper as it moves Inspect the delivery head from down the Transport Belt The delivery head the output side of the mailbox It delivers paper to either the designated may be necessary to remove the mailbox slot or to the stapling assembly The stapling assembly and or some of PSExit 1 photosensor flag detects paper as it the mailbox slots Refer to Figure enters the delivery head refer to Figure 7 18 Verify that PSExit 1 and 7 18 Once paper is sensed the eject motor PSExit 2 sensor flags can move rotates and moves paper to the bin The freely The PSExit1 flag should PSExit 2 photosensor flag detects the rotate towards the output bins paper s trailing edge as it moves from the and the PSExit 2 flag should head ass
226. ng 5 39 duplex unit paper paths 5 20 replacing 6 10 Duty Cycle 1 28 P U E EconoMode 1 3 5 9 electrical specifications 1 9 electrostatic discharge sensitive ESD 6 5 emissions acoustic 0 engine test 1 1 7 8 button location 7 8 7 8 printing engine test microswitch 5 11 envelope feeder paper paths 5 20 replacing 6 11 envelope specifications 1 11 environment operating 2 3 environmental requirements 2 4 ESD caution 6 5 exchange program 1 21 exhaust fan 1 6 32 fan 3 6 35 fan 4 6 36 exhuast fan 2 6 34 external paper handling controller replacing 6 12 F factory defaults 3 5 settings list 3 7 factory settings restoring 3 6 fan 1 6 32 fan 1 housing 6 32 fan 1 housing assembly 6 32 fan 1 motor 6 33 fan 2 Ivps 6 34 fan 3 formatter 6 35 fan 3 housing 6 35 fan 3 housing assembly 6 35 fan 3 motor 6 35 fan 4 delivery unit 6 36 fan motors 5 11 faulty image examples 7 16 7 63 faulty registration 7 70 fax information service HP Index 1 Xepul FIRST 1 2 features 1 3 control panel 1 3 feed roller tray 1 6 58 tray 2 6 60 tray 3 6 60 feeder assembly 6 37 fonts internal 1 3 formatter assembly 6 39 formatter system 5 8 front cover 6 21 functional block diagram 5 4 functional overview 5 1 5 42 fusing assembly 6 41 G guidelines media selection 1 11 H half self test functional check 7 74 hardware table 6 16 high voltage power distribution 5 7 high voltage
227. not be stapled the entire stapler as required CLEARING PAPER FROM Status The printer is attempting to remove unusable No action required THE PRINTER paper This may occur after you clear a paper jam CLOSE PRINTER COVER Attendance One of the printer s doors or its cover is not Ensure the following are closed i latched or seated properly Interlock switches Top Cover Rear Fuser Access are connected to each door and the cover Door and Right Paper Path For the Top Cover and Fuser Door close Access Door below Tray 1 SW1 The Right Paper Path Door enables photosensor PS3 on the Pickup PCA of the Paper Input Unit PIU COPIES XX OF Y Status This message indicates the progress of the No action required current job 7 24 Troubleshooting Figure 7 11 NOTE Do Not Rernove the flat wires staples that are in the path of the stapler If they are removed up to 12 documents may not be stapled Clearing Staple Jams Figure 7 12 Home position gap When the output bin is full the flag blocks the gap Scanbar and MBM Interlock Switch SW1 land 2 Scanbar gaps 3 Multi Bin Mailbox Interlock Switch Troubleshooting 7 25 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message ENGINE TEST FORMFEEDING The On Line LED flashes HP MIO 1 INITIALIZING HP MIO 2 INITIALIZING HP MIO 1 NOT READY MIO CARD NOT READY 7 26 Troubleshooting slot the card is in Printer Control Panel
228. nsor 1 PS1206 Tray 2 paper level sensor 2 PS1207 Tray 3 paper out sensor Dunoouse qnoJ L Figure 7 28 TRAY 2 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 1 UPVS1 TRAY 2 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 2 UPVS2 TRAY 2 SENSE signal UDECKC TRAY 2 PAPER OUT SENSE signal UDECKS REGISTRATION PAPER SENSE signal REGS TRAY 1 PAPER SENSE signal MPTPS LIFTING PLATE SENSE signal MPTLS PICK UP UNIT PAPER SENSE signal FEEDS TOP LEFT DOOR OPEN signal UDOORS PS1208 Tray 2 paper out sensor PS1301 Tray 1 paper present sensor PS1302 Lifting plate position sensor PS1401 Face down tray paper full sensor PS1402 Face down tray delivery sensor PS1403 Fixing unit delivery sensor SW1601 Paper size sensing switch SW1602 Paper size sensing switch SW1603 Paper size sensing switch SW1604 Paper size sensing switch SW1401 Doors open switch Printer Sensors and Switches Print Engine Only Troubleshooting 7 87 DC Controller PCA Switch Sensor PCA H o A C sa rp H Le im m MEN S Flapper CO d fixing la I A roller Photosensitive f Sisi anda feeding Q l drum egistration pick up roller le C CH lO L3 i C TOv a CN 1 PON la Face up Fusing unit mui po e Lifting plate delivery roller E a Tran amp ter Feed ET roller Lower charging roller 2 fusing roller roller Al AAA EA EEE Feed roller 1 Separation roller rr rr rr rr rr rr rr
229. nstalled If the toner level drops below a predefined level theTONER LOW message will appear on the display panel If the toner cartridge is missing NSTALL TONER CARTRIDGE will be displayed Print Density Adjustment TheHVPS also controls the image density by varying the voltages applied to the developing cylinder in the toner cartridge These voltages determine the amount of toner applied to the photosensitive drum Print density is adjusted from the control panel Print Quality Menu or from the driver software Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias PostTransfer Blas Transfer Roller Fuser Bias High Voltage Power Supply Contacts Funcional Overview 5 7 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Formatter System TheFormatter PCA is responsible for the following Controlling the PowerSave mode Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status information through the Control Panel and the Bi Directional 1 0 Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine e Storing font information e Communicating with the host computer through the Bi Directional Interface The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the Bi Tronics nterface and separates it into image information and instructions which control the printing process The DC Controller synchronizes t
230. nstalling 2 Hold the sensor flag out of the way hook the tabs on the left end in first and snap the right end of the sensor upward into place Paper Input Unit Sensor PS2 Removal and Replacement 6 61 9 jueuiooejdey pue enouiay Sensor Registration PS1 1 Removethe following components in the order listed e Toner Cartridge e Trays 2 and 3 Transfer Roller see Figure 6 51 Registration Assembly see Figure 6 43 Front Cover see Figure 6 5 Tray 1 Assembly see Figure 6 52 Right Lower Door Assembly see Figure 6 14 Paper Input Unit see Figure 6 31 Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above and the sensor is removed and replaced from inside the Paper I nput Unit cavity 2 Releasethe retaining tabs Figure 6 49 callout 1 on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end of the sensor 3 Unplug the connector from the sensor To Reinstall 1 Plugin the connector 2 Hold the sensor flag out of the way hook the tabs on the left end in first and snap the right end of the sensor upward into place Figure 6 49 Registration Sensor PS1 6 62 Removal and Replacement Caution Figure 6 50 Solenoid Assembly SL 3 F ace U p 1 Remove the top cover see Figure 6 8 2 Removethe Delivery Unit see Figure 6 10 3 Remove 1 self tapping screw CH 107 Figure 6 50 callout 1 Be careful not to damage the plastic arm when removing the
231. o configure the AppleTalk name and assign a preferred EtherTalk Zone After completing this guide refer to the HP J etDirect Interface Configuration Guide for further configuration instructions on using the HP Laser et Utility I O Information B 9 uoneuuoju oj E Disable Network Protocols Optional Press On Line totakethe printer offline Press Menu repeatedly until MI 0 MENU appears Press Item CFG NETWORKzNO appears Press CFG NETWORK YES appears Press Select CFG NETWORK YES appears Press Item to scroll through each network protocol NOVELL 0N appears O U RUHNJ HE To Disable Novell NetWare pl Press to change to NOVELL zOFF Press Select to save the new status NOVELL 0FF appears 3 Press ltem to continue configuring DLC LLC 0N appears N ToDisable DLC LLC pl Press to change to DLC LLC Press Select to save the new status DLC LLC appears 3 Press ltem to continue configuring TCP PZ0N appears N ToDisable TCP IP pl Press to changetoTCP PzOFF Press Select to save the new status TCP Pz0FF appears 3 Press ltem to continue configuring ATALK 0N appears N To Disable Apple EtherTalk and L ocalTalk Press to changetoATALKzOFF Press Select to save the new status ATALK 0FF appears 3 Press ltem to continue configuring N B 10 l O Information Regulatory Information Laser Safety U S A
232. ocated in the upper portion of the Multi Bin Mailbox the assembly receives paper from the printer via the Input Paper Guide and directs paper into either the face up bin or into the transport belt of the mailbox PSEntry detects paper entering the Flipper Assembly NOTE Power off the printer Position the mailbox away from the print engine Hold down the mailbox interlock refer to Figure 7 12 callout 3 Then power on the printer The mailbox goes through its normal power on sequence the head assembly in the mailbox moves to the bottom most position on the mailbox then travels up to its home position Any fault condition in the mailbox prevents it from going through its normal power on full down and up sequence A paper jam occurred at the Face Up Bin output of the Flipper Assembly The Flipper Assembly located in the upper portion of the Multi Bin Mailbox receives paper from the printer via the Input Paper Assembly refer to Figure 7 20 The assembly directs paper to either the Face Up Bin or to the mailbox s transport belt PSFaceUp sensor flag detects paper as the paper moves from the Flipper Assembly into the Face Up Bin refer to Figure 7 17 Recommended Action See all recommendations listed for Error Log Message 13 27 11 and follow these steps Cycle power to clear the error Replace vertical transfer door assembly Clear the paper jam Ensure the Multi Bin Mailbox is seated adjacent to the printer an
233. ollowing check list to ensure that the toner cartridge is still operable Ensurethat the toner cartridge has toner Full toner cartridge weight 23000 grams 106 oz Empty weight 2200 grams 80 5 oz Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge stamped on the cartridge box Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled Ensurethat thetoner cartridge is seated properly in the printer cavity nspect the cartridge for leaking toner through worn seals If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner spills may result Toner Cartridges are rated for 15 000 images at 5 coverage It is possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals beforeTONER LOW is displayed if the 15 000 image expectancy is exceeded Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for toolong If white areas appear stop the printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most defective images If not the toner cartridge may be placed in a dark environment for several days which may restore some life to the drum Faulty Image Examples The Reference section contains mage troubleshooti ng and sample image defects and their possibl
234. omponents 2 of 3 8 26 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 10 Mounting Shaft e Clip C3764 60517 CH111 screw lorx T20 M4X12 C3764 60520 not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown Stepper Motor Encoder Kit includes Transport Stepper C3764 67904 Motor Assy C3764 60532 Encoder Assy C3764 60533 Encoder Cable C3764 60549 not shown Interlock Switch Kit includes Interlock Switch C3764 67905 C3764 60556 Interlock Switch Cable C3764 60548 not shown Attachment Beam Kit includes Attachment Beam Assy C3764 6790 C3764 60558 Attachment Clips C3764 60559 Attachment Bracket C3764 60560 i 1 2 1 1 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 2 of 3 Delivery Head Assembly for Mailbox with Stapler C3766 60514 Lower Pulley Spring C3764 60531 Anti Curl String Spring C3764 60563 Pulley small C3764 60564 Metallic Tape Housing Kit includes Metal Tape Holder C3764 6790 C3764 60515 Metallic lape amp Housing Assy C3764 60521 0 Hardware Kit includes Mounting Shaft e Clip 5 C3764 67901 C3764 60517 L Spring Right C3764 60518 L Spring Left C3764 60522 Mount Screw Machined T20 MAX10 C3764 60519 Plastic Spacer C3764 60524 Mount Screw Machined T20 MAX12 C3764 60520 Gasket Cable Clamps C3764 60565 Lower Pulley Assembly C3764 60530 Lower Pulley Spring C3764 60531 PCA Mounting Screw C3764 60525 Paper Guide Kit includes Paper Guide String C3764 67902 C3764 60562 Paper
235. oner cartridge box Product Information 1 23 L uoneunoju 19NPOId Related Documentation and Training Media Table 1 11 lists where to order related documentation See Ordering Parts earlier in this chapter for the phone numbers of each organization Table 1 11 Helated Documentation HP LaserJet 5Si Family Service Manual C4077 99015 Bundle HP LaserJet 5Si Family User Bundle C3166 99018 HP LaserJet 5Si MX Mopier User Bundle C4077 99001 x HP JetDirect Print Server Software J2552 90051 X Installation Guide HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference 5021 0369 X X Service Guide HP PCL5 Printer Language Technical 5021 0330 X X Reference Information Package HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper 5010 6394 X Specifications Guide HP LaserJet 5Si HM User s Guide Erata C3124 90901 X Sheet Network Printing forte Enterprise Video 5961 0650 X x AAA MO Available from LDC 1 800 544 9976 Specific Application Drivers a i Shipped with printer English version part number is shown Other translations are available X 1 24 Product Information Technical Assistance HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program provides free technical support information 24 hours a day 7 days a week The ASAP system indudes HP AUDIO TIPS and HP FIRST both explained below The ASAP service requires a touchtone phone HP AUDIO TIPS HP AUDIO TIPS is an interactive voice response system providing prerecorded answers to the most frequ
236. opier Engine 1 14 External View of HP Laser et 5Si Mopier 1 15 Formatter Assemblies 0 1 16 Accessories and OPti0NS 1 1 17 Hard DISK 4x bd bw abr daa KR xoc E A 1 19 Determining Memory Requirements 1 20 Service Approach nn 1 21 Ordering Parts 1 21 Exchange Program 2 2 1 21 Consumables ceres 1 22 Toner Cartridge Life 5 1 22 Refilled Toner Cartridges Non HP Staple Cartridges 1 23 Product Information 1 1 Recycling Toner Cartridges 0 1 23 Related Documentation and Training Media 1 24 Technical Assistance e 1 25 HP AUDIOSPTIBS sm RO E go AAA A Ros 1 25 AP Ry ive a e i See ha AS ec nh ES e de Eds 1 25 HP CompuServe Forum 2 5 1 26 MECH INGE 6 co TETTE A a a 1 26 World Wide Web anaoa a 1 26 HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line 1 26 ORDER ArI c oy a Ss BE Dock AO EURO e Ee HC C HERO ORUM sg 1 26 Warranty m 1 27 1 2 Product Information Printer Features Table 1 1 Printer Features LaserJet 5Si LaserJet 5Si MX LaserJet 5Si Mopier C3166A C3167A C4076A C4077A C4176A Print Speed 24 ppm letter or A4 24 ppm letter or A4 24 ppm letter or A4 13 ppm ledger 11x17 13 ppm led
237. or Log Message 13 27 11 longer than expected see Figure 7 15 13 11 PAPER JAM Error A paper jam occurred at the Vertical Transfer See all recommendations listed Message Assembly exit Paper stays in PS32 longer for Error Log Message 13 27 11 13 43 11 than expected see Figure 7 15 13 11 PAPER JAM Error A paper jam occurred at the Vertical Transfer See all recommendations listed Message Assembly entrance while powering on the for Error Log Message 13 27 11 13 49 11 printer or after opening the Vertical Transfer Assembly Paper in PS31 at power on See Figure 7 15 7 42 Troubleshooting 1 PSFaceUp 2 PSFaceUpFull 3 PS Entry Sensor 1 PSExit1 Detects paper entering head assembly 2 PSExit2 Detects paper exiting head assembly Troubleshooting 7 43 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message 13 11 PAPER JAM 13 12 PAPER JAM 13 12 PAPER JAM 7 44 Troubleshooting Error Log Category Message Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description A paper jam occurred at Vertical Transfer Assembly exit or after opening the Vertical Transfer Assembly Paper in PS32 see Figure 7 14 at power on flush routine not implemented at power on If Error Log Message 13 59 1y is followed by 66 00 19 or 66 00 20 in the printer s error log this means the printer was printing a long job and a time out occurred A paper jam occurred at the Flipper Assembly s input refer to Figure 7 17 The flipper assembly is l
238. orrectly The Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test This test is very useful for isolating printer problems The engine test prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire printable area and is also useful for checking and adjusting registration The engine test prints from Tray 3 only and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed Tray 3 must be installed and loaded with paper to perform an engine test Also ensure that the EP toner cartridge is installed in the printer Engine Test Button Location The engine test button is located on the DC Controller PCA It is accessible through a hole at the right rear of the printer Printing an Engine Test To print an engine test use a non metallic object to press the engine test button see Figure 7 4 A singletest page will print Button Access Engine Test Printout Engine Test Button 7 8 Troubleshooting Note ul UN HE 10 Display Overview Usethe printer s Control Panel to access the error log to troubleshoot the printer With the printer s test menu you can access the printer s error log to display more information about the current error The error log retains the printer s last 50 error messages Refer tothe section titled Reference for more information about correcting printer error log messages The error log codes and the error
239. out 3 is on the following page Removal and Replacement 6 93 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 81 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Housing 6 94 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 82 Motor Delivery Head Position 1 Removethe left cover see Figure 6 65 2 Unplug the cable connector Figure 6 82 callout 1 3 Remove 2 screws CH 112 Figure 6 82 callout 2 slide the motor downward to release it from the frame and lift it straight out of the frame To Reinstall Make sure that the motor is positioned in the frame with the cable grommets facing down Make sure that the motor cable connector is plugged into the correct mating connector Removal and Replacement 6 95 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay Figure 6 83 ul Bb UN kH Motor Transport Belt and Encoder Assembly Remove the left cover see Figure 6 65 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 Remove the Controller PCA see Figure 6 87 Remove 2 screws CH 112 from the motor assembly Figure 6 83 callout 1 Remove the small drive belt Figure 6 84 callout 2 from the motor drive gear Pull the motor and Encoder Assembly dear of the frame while guiding the cables through the access hole in the bottom of the frame To Reinstall Make sure that the segmented disk at the back of the Transport Belt M otor is approximately centered in the Encoder Assembly photosensor Figure 6 85 callout 3 R
240. out 4 release the plastic retaining tabs Figure 6 10 callout 5 and remove the metal mounting bracket F igure 6 10 callout 6 Remove 2 screws CH 102 Figure 6 11 callout 7 and 1 screw CH 101 Figure 6 11 callout 8 Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit Lift the left end of the Delivery Unit approximately 1 8 inch to dear the aligament pin and carefully rock it forward and backward while sliding it out of the chassis To Reinstall Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit First place the plastic edge on the right end of the Delivery Unit into the chassis Make sure that the plastic support tab on the right end of the Delivery Unit slides on top of the chassis Make sure that the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit are properly positioned not jammed Replace the metal mounting bracket Figure 6 10 callout 6 before replacing the Delivery Unit screws Make sure that the plastic clips Figure 6 10 callout 5 are snapped into place before tightening the mounting screws Figure 6 10 callout 4 Removal and Replacement 6 25 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Delivery Unit 2 of 2 6 26 Removal and Replacement Caution Note Figure 6 12 Diverter Assembly Support the Diverter Assembly access door du
241. paper movement can result 5 Worn Pickup or Registration Rollers Paper is not being picked up consistently Verify that the paper guide is adjusted for the correct paper size and is locked into position Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Replace the defective gear or Main Drive Inspect all paper path rollers looking for wear cracks or glazing Replace the worn rollers Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 nDiL MNA D I NS OS NARA zz AaBbCc 1 VM LINGE uus MADIAKMSA WALJKZ NN Image Skew Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Paper is loaded incorrectly If the paper is not installed flush into the paper tray a skewing problem will result 2 Bad Paper Lot Paper that is manufactured poorly or inconsistently or that has too smooth or too rough a surface texture can cause an image skew problem 3 Worn Pickup and or Registration Rollers Paper is not being picked up consistently Bubble Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Photosensitive drum inside toner cartridge is not grounded Remove paper from the tray and install paper correctly Position the paper guide correctly for the paper size being used Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Inspect all paper path rollers looking for wear cracks or glazing Replace the worn rollers 1 Check for proper mountin
242. paper surface photosensor determines when the paper stack is lifted to its feed position Mechanically Tray 4 lifts when the tray is closed When closed a drive gear on Tray 4 engages with the drive mechanism located on the back side of the 2000 Sheet Input Unit A pilot locating pin and bushing are present to ensure that the gear from Tray 4 and the drive motor gear assembly engage properly Once engaged the rotating gears use a cable lift mechanism to lift Tray 4 s paper stack Tray 4 is not lifting and or makes abnormal noises Tray 4 is partially lifting or not lifting at all because paper loaded on the left side of the tray is blocking upward movement Microswitch SW31 is defective or disconnected callout 2 Figure 7 23 TRAY 4 EMPTY Status TRAY n OPEN TRAY 4 OPEN Status The indicated paper tray is open Status Tray 4 Open message may occur if the paper size Adjustable Back Plate is missing or not seated properly 7 34 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Verify the 2000 Sheet Input Tray is present under the Paper Handling Options of the PCL configuration pages To watch Tray 4 lift Open the transfer door Open and close Tray 4 With the transfer door open defeat the transfer door closed photosensor PS35 by pushing in on the sensor flag callout 1 Figure 7 15 See if Tray 4 is lifting The white drive gear on the right hand side of the transfer door should be rotating If it is not rotating verify t
243. photosensitive drum primary charging roller developing station toner cavity and cleaning station Including the components that wear degrade or are consumed in a customer replaceable toner cartridge eliminates the need for a service call when replacement is required Toner Cartridge High Voltage Power Supply Contacts Thetoner cartridge has three contacts which route voltage from the HVPS PCA They are e Upper Primary Charge e Middle Developing Bias e ower Toner Sensing Toner Recognition The Photosensitive Drum Theimage from the Laser Scanner Assembly is written on the drum surface developed and transferred to the media The drum is an aluminum cylinder The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is electrically connected to ground potential The outside of the cylinder is coated with a layer of non toxic organic photoconducti ve material OPC The OPC material becomes electrically conductive when exposed to light The drum surface is first cleaned of excess toner then conditioned with a uniform negative charge When an area on the drum surface is exposed to the laser light beam the negative charge in that area is conducted to the ground potential of the drum base and thus becomes more positive Areas not exposed to light remain non conductive and maintain their negative charge Photosensitive Layer Aluminum Base Photosensitive Drum Funcional Overview 5 13 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Drum Cleaning The c
244. place the Multi Bin Mailbox 66 2 2 DEVICE ERROR One or more bins were not found Make sure that all bins are CYCLE POWER properly installed Check the bins for damage refer to Figure 7 12 7 56 Troubleshooting Figure 7 21 AA a Mmo 1 Exit Roller Figure 7 22 Flipper Assembly Input Paper Delivery Head Belt Metallic Tape Delivery Head Interlock Switch Eject Rollers Transport Belt Motor and Encoder Disk Multi Bin Mailbox T ex F A Ex T f d mn m i 1 TH l P h Delivery Head Exit Roller 2 GuideFingers i C 0 o i Hil L Ly Y y Face Up Bin Delivery Head Motor Face Down Bins Troubleshooting 7 57 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 Printer Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action Message 66 2 3 DEVICE ERROR Delivery Head rollers are not sliding One or Watch the mailbox delivery head CYCLE POWER more fingers on the delivery roller from the rear It may be 66 02 03 mechanism in the mailbox s Delivery Head necessary to first remove the Assembly is out of position stapler If it is present you should see four pairs of white rollers A NOTE Power off the printer Position the black roller is sandwiched mailbox away from the print engine Hold between the white rollers Asmall down the mailbox interlock then power on plastic finger should be riding on the printer refer to Figure 7 12 The mailbox t
245. placement 6 21 9 jueuiooejdoy pue enouiay Caution Figure 6 7 N 1 2 Left Lower Cover Be careful not to damage the plastic guides on the inside of the lower left cover They are part of the Duplex Unit paper path Remove the Diverter Assembly access door see Figure 6 13 Remove 2 screws CH102 Figure 6 7 callout 1 Press down firmly on the top cover outer ends to release the retaining tabs on the inside of the cover Figure 6 7 callout 2 and the retaining tabs at the lower edge of the cover Figure 6 7 callout 3 Pull the cover away from the chassis left side first To Reinstall Tuck the right side of the cover behind the plastic edge piece first Slide the cover toward the chassis and insert the two retaining tabs into position Lift up to snap the cover into place Left Lower Cover 6 22 Removal and Replacement Caution Caution Top Cover Remove Control Panel see Figure 6 2 and remove 1 screw CH 102 Figure 6 8 callout 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and remove 1 screw CH 102 Figure 6 8 callout 2 Open the top cover door and remove 1 screw CH 102 Figure 6 9 callout 3 Be careful not to damage the F ace Down Bin Full sensor flag Figure 6 9 callout 4 when removing the top cover Lift and hold the top cover door up and carefully pull out on the cover to release the retaining tab Figure 6 8 callout 5 Hold the F ace Down Bin Figure 6 8 callout 6
246. power supply 6 54 high voltage power supply check 7 16 HPASAP 1 25 HPAUDIO TIPS 1 25 HP CompuServe Forum 1 26 HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology 1 25 HP Resller Sales and Service Support Line 1 26 HP s Distribution Center 1 21 HPD HP Distribution Center 1 21 1 24 hvps 5 7 see high voltage power supply 6 54 I I O menu 3 17 identification printer 1 7 image developing 5 17 fusing 5 19 transfering 5 18 writing 5 16 image defaults white stripes 7 71 Index 2 image defects black lines 7 67 blank white page 7 64 bubble print 7 71 character voids 7 70 dropout 7 67 faulty registration 7 71 improperly formed characters 7 70 line at edge of paper 7 69 partial blank page 7 72 repetitive defects 7 69 image formation system 5 12 troubleshooting 7 63 image skew 7 71 image skew specification 7 8 indicator lights 3 4 input sources 5 3 interfaces standard 1 3 internal typefaces 1 3 Items key 3 3 J job menu 3 11 L labels adhesive 1 12 languages setting the display 3 6 languages printer 1 3 laser drive 5 10 laser scanner assembly 6 42 fan 6 32 left cover 6 23 lights control panel 3 4 low voltage power distribution system 5 5 low voltage power supply 5 6 6 55 lower left cover 6 23 Ivps 5 5 see low voltage power supply 6 55 M main gear assembly 6 43 main motor 5 11 main motor assembly 6 46 maintenance 4 4 10 preventive 4 6 maintenance count sett
247. printing it displays PRESS SELECT TO CANCEL JOB Press Select again Printer displays CANCELLI NG J OB until all data for current job has been processed Can take up to 5 minutes to cancel job Printer returns to READY when finished Press ltem to display alternate menu items Press Select to activate formfeed Printer returns to READY when finished Operating Overview 3 13 M9IAI9AQ Dunejiedo Test Menu Test Menu items can be selected only from the printer control panel Y ou cannot change or override them from your software application See Testing the Printer later in this chapter for detailed information about running printer tests and interpreting their results Table 3 8 Test Menu ltems PCL CONFIGURATION PAGE None Press Select to print Printer displays PRI NTI NG CONFI GURATI ON PAGE Printer returns to READY when finished POSTSCRIPT CONFIGURATION PAGE None Press Select to print Printer displays PRI NTI NG CONFI GURATI ON PAGE Printer returns to READY when finished PCL FONT LIST None Press Select to print Printer displays PRINTING FONT LIST Printer returns to READY when finished POSTS CRIP TERON TAUST None Press Select to print Printer displays PRINTING FONT LIST Printer returns to READY when finished DISK DIRECTORY PAGE None Press Select to print Printer displays PRI NTI NG DI SK DI RECTORY Printer returns to READY when finished DEMO PAGES None Press Select to print Printer
248. r et 55i HM C3124A To perform a paper path test Set Destination and Duplex first Press Menu until CONFI GURATI ON MENU appears Press Item until PAPER DESTI NATI ON appears Press to cycle selections until the desired paper destination appears Press Select to select the desired destination for the Paper Path Test To set duplex press Menu until CONFI GURATI ON MENU appears Press Item until 2 SIDED XX appears Press to select duplex or single side Set Source and number of pages last Press Menu until TEST MENU appears Press Item until PAPER PATH TEST appears Press Select Press to cycle selections until the desired paper source appears Press Select Press to cycle selections until the desired number of images appears Y ou can choose 1 10 50 100 or 500 copies e Press Select to perform the Paper Path Test Troubleshooting 7 21 Dunoouse qnoJ L Figure 7 10 DUPLEX AND OUTPUT URCE SET SECOND SET FIRST BRE cre ES Configuration Menu Items Paper Path Test gt Items Destination Top Output Bin Tray 1 Mailboxes 6 8 Optional Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection Customer Print J ob Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source s to the problem destination s Try to recreate the paper jam errors by having the customer do typical print jobs and thetype of print job that has been
249. r see Figure 6 53 Open the paper tray and pull it out to the stops Unplug the connector Figure 6 63 callout 1 from the Controller PCA and free the cable Remove 1 screw CH 108 Figure 6 63 callout 2 and remove the metal retaining spring Figure 6 63 callout 3 Slide the switch assembly backward out of its cavity Switch Assembly Paper Size Remove the back cover see Figure 6 53 Open the paper tray and pull it out to the stops Unplug the connector Figure 6 63 callout 4 from the Controller PCA Remove 1 screw CH 108 Figure 6 63 callout 5 and remove the metal retaining spring Figure 6 63 callout 6 Slide the switch assembly backward out of its cavity Tray 4 Switch Assemblies Removal and Replacement 6 77 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay A WNP WARNING WARNING Switch Assembly Lifter Sensing Lift the printer clear of the HCI and place it on a smooth sturdy surface Remove the top cover 2 screws Remove the back cover 4 screws Figure 8 7 reference 5 Disconnect the outside cables connector with two cables to release Microswitch Assembly from the back top of the frame Remove the screw that holds the Microswitch mounting metallic bar to the frame Take out the Microswitch Assembly switch and metallic bar by sliding the bar towads the front of the assembly Figure 8 7 reference 66 Installation of the Microswitch Assembly is the reverse order Transfer Assembly Open
250. r Lock Lever Right Fuser Lock Lever Left Feeder Assembly 8 04D Sensor Arm PS1 8 04D 8 04D 8 04D 8 04D 6 8 3 10 13 Sensor Cable 14 Compression Spring Front 16 Compression Spring Rear 18 Photo Interrupter 3 3 3 0 0 Paper Input Unit PIU 8 04E 1 8 04E 8 04E NEN o EN ME 8 04E Pickup Roller ME ME O5 ME ME Torque Limiter 103 PIU PCA Feed Separation Rollers 8 04E 4 Sensor Arm PS2 8 04E 4 8 04E 5 8 04E 5 8 04E Paper Pickup Cable 8 04E Pick Up Motor 8 1 7 7 1 Sensor Arm Spring 1 0 2 5 E 0 0 8 9 Sensor Cable 2 Photo Interrupter O ER Jg D 0 O O O Parts and Diagrams 8 15 8 sweibeig pue Sued CH106 CH105 AS 6 la 1001 FANT 187 Figure 8 5 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 8 16 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 5 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 LaserJet 5Si HM C3124A only Parts and Diagrams 8 17 QT Y 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 sweibeig pue Sued 12 uoa 11 Dora 12A e 5 J13 FAN3 J56 J222 J10 2 NA J50 N 3 op A J213 GRO d CH101 nM m J1601B 2 J215 13B J14 415 by 178416 19 13A J209 J10 J204 CH101 15 CH104 Figure 8 6 Printer Internal Components 4 of 4 8 18 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 6 Printer Internal Components 4 of 4 Fag rn Parts and Diagrams 8 1
251. r end of the new cable next to a connector box on the network 4 Unplug one cable from the connector box on the network Figure B 4 A Pa A o Connecting to the MIDDLE of a Local Talk Network 2 of 2 5 Insert the new cable into the connector box on the network 6 Insert the cable you removed from the network into the new connector box Then reconnect the printer to its power source B 4 I O Information Figure B 5 Note Connecting to a Network The printer supports up to four different cables IEEE 1284 parallel Figure B 5 callout 1 BNC ThinLAN Figure B 5 callout 2 10Base T RJ 45 Figure B 5 callout 3 and DIN 8 LocalTalk Figure B 5 callout 4 Select the appropriate interface cable from those shown below for the system and connect the cable or cables to the printer I O Connector Locations The cable used to connect the printer to the network a BNC T connector and a 50 Ohm terminator are not provided with the printer They must be purchased separately Y ou may attach either a ThinLAN cable or a 10Base T cable but not both at the same time BNC Interface Attach one section of the ThinLAN cableto one side of the BNC T connector Attach another ThinLAN cable section or a 50 Ohm terminator to the other side If you are attaching the printer to the end of your network you must connect a 50 Ohm terminator lOBase T Interface Plug the connector of the twisted pair network cable into th
252. r leaking toner through worn seals If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner spills may result Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensiti ve surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for toolong If white areas appear stop the printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most defective images If not the toner cartridge may be placed in a dark environment for several days which may restore some life to the drum Faulty Image Examples This section illustrates some image defects and their possible causes Since there are many variables in the printing process it is possible to encounter image defects that are not shown in the following illustrations If you find a defect that is not illustrated record the probable cause along with the printing environmental conditions and save a copy of the defect for future reference E ach example includes a table that lists in order the probable causes of the image defect and the recommended repair action 7 63 Dunoouse qnoJ L Image Quality Tables Table 7 6 Blank White Page Possible Cause Recommended Action OCCASIONAL BLANK PAGES 1 Software Configuration Make sure the application software is not sending incorrect page length r
253. r the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter 2 When SERVI CE MODE is displayed press Menus to access the Service Menu 3 Press items todisplay PAGECOUNT MAI NTCOUNT and S N 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item 5 Press On Line to exit Service M ode Operating Overview 3 23 e MINIMO Bunerado Note U N he vx OU A ul bb UN rm Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size When replacing a Formatter PCA with a default paper size setting of A4 set COLD RESET PAPER to AA Enter the Service M ode as previously described in this chapter Press Menus to access the Service Menu Press Items to step through the menu until COLD RESET PAPER LETTER is displayed Press to toggle between Letter and A4 paper Press Select to activate your choice Press On Line to exit Service M ode Perform a Cold Reset to activate new choice PowerSave An additional 10 second time interval is added to the PowerSave function in the Service Menu With Service Mode displayed press Menus until CONFI GURATI ON MENU is displayed If you have changed the PowerSave Delay be sure to change it back to the user s preference at the completion of the service call Press Items until POWER SAVE DELAY is displayed Press until the desired time interval is displayed Press Select to save your selection Press Items to return to the Service M ode Press On Line to placethe printer back o
254. re 5 5 Printer error messages override the PowerSave message The printer will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate ti me but the error message will continue to be displayed Resolution Enhancement REt TheFormatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology REt which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC Controller to produce smoothed black to white boundaries REt is user controllable ON or OFF from the control panel or from some software applications The default setting is ON REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override the control panel settings EconoMode The EconoM ode setting uses approximately 75 less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density However E conoM ode does not extend toner cartridge component life EconoM ode which can also be thought of as draft mode is user selectable via the control panel Print Quality M enu and some software applications The default setting is OFF E conoM ode does not affect print speed memory usage or extend toner cartridge life Normal Mode Medium Density EconoMode Medium Density Normal Mode vs EconoMode Funcional Overview 5 9 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny DC Controller System The following systems and functions are controlled by the DC Controller PCA DC Power Distribution 25V DC 42V DC 24V DC Laser and Scanner Drive Paper Motion Monitoring and Control
255. reseat cabling between the main motor and DC Controller PCA J218 Replace the main motor Replace the DC Controller NOTE To determine if the Main Motor is rotating turn on the printer and see if the top face down stacker rollers are rotating Cycle power If the message persists Verify that the SIMM module is installed correctly Turn off the printer remove the SIMM module then turn on the printer If the message does not display replace the defective SIMM If the message continues turn off the printer and remove the next SIMM module then turn on the printer Repeat this step for the remaining SIMM modules until the problem is isolated If the message continues with no SIMMs installed replace the Formatter PCA Troubleshooting 7 53 Dunoouse qnoJ L Table 7 5 Message 62 x PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER 64 PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER 65 PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER 66 0 1 through 66 0 45 DEVICE ERROR CYCLE POWER 7 54 Troubleshooting Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description The printer encountered a problem when accessing an internal memory CRC error x device 0 Formatter 1 4 SIMM Module A scan buffer error occurred A dynamic RAM controller error occurred The printer is unable to communicate with the External Paper Handling PCA 66 00 15 power failure or AC power supply disconnected 66 00 31 66 00 35 are related to non supported printers 66 00 41 66 00 4
256. rethat the locating tabs in the pulley halves fit exactly into their mating notches When properly assembled the pulley halves will not rotate relative to each other 2 Make sure that the pulley housings are positioned with the shaft protrusion toward the outside of the frame 3 Make sure to reconnect the lower tension springs 6 90 Removal and Replacement WFEPARETNFULLE gt Removal and Replacement 6 91 9 jueureoejdeu pue jeaowy Metallic Tape and Housing Assembly Remove all of the paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 Lower the Delivery Head to the bottom of the frame Release the tape retainer by pushing the tab see Figure 6 79 callout 1 Carefully rewind the tape into its housing Do not allow the tape to freely snap back into the housing see Figure 6 80 callout 2 5 Removethetape housing by releasing the retaining tabs Figure 6 81 callout 3 and rotating it upward bb WNP To Reinstall pl Replace the tape housing by inserting the top of the housing into position and snapping the housing down into place Make sure that the tape is in direct contact with the Transport Belt by routing it underneath the small plastic guide 2 Insert the top end of the tape into its retainer slot and gently push it upward to engage the retainer tab Before replacing the tape holder make sure that the tape is in direct contact with the Transport Belt 6 92 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 81 with call
257. rew TP M3X6 Screw TP M4X6 Screw TP M4X6 Screw TP M4X6 XJ XXIX X KL KK KI Xx o jujujujo oujuju wu al Ses cial Rial eee sd T NI N I NINISNIN N B ARleleljojo B olejejeleolo cl dl ea a dl a px ololjoljololo O eole ejojoeljelo O olo x x xl 3 O OJojojoJljolo ZIZIZ IZIZIZ Z 8 08 8 08 P O RO E O O O O Z b E P T T O O O c E E E Oi EY Oo o17 gt lt UJ T N BA O p O O N O Z A 18 Parts Index I O Information IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information ThelEEE 1284 parallel interface is compatible with Centronics parallel interfaces Totake advantage of its enhanced capabilities such as bi directional communication between the computer and printer faster transmission of data and auto configuration of printer drivers the customer must have e Support in software applications for these features A parallel cable with the correct pin configuration see Figure B 1 on the following page I O Information B 1 Parallel Cable Pin Configuration For best results use the C2951A cable or equivalent Caution Ensurethat all power and interface cables on the printer and host computer are properly grounded in compliance with local codes Figure B 1 l l Signal Name Printer Pin IBM Port Pin nSTROBE DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 DATA 7 DATA 8 nACKNLG BUSY CALL PE SELECT nAutoFd No Connect 15 34 LL O VDC GND 16
258. ring this procedure to prevent damage to the plastic hinge pins 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and release the support struts Figure 6 12 callout 1 by sliding the strut ends forward and downward 2 Remove 6 self tapping screws CH 106 Figure 6 12 callout 2 The access door support struts will fall free when the Diverter Assembly is lifted away from the access door 3 Lift the Diverter Assembly up and away from the access door Diverter Assembly Removal and Replacement 6 27 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Door Assembly Diverter 1 Open the Diverter access door and release the support struts Figure 6 13 callout 1 by sliding the strut ends forward and downward 2 Rotate the door up to align the flat sides of the right hinge pin with the retaining slot Figure 6 13 callout 2 and lift upwards to release it from the retaining slot 3 Continue lifting up on the right side of the door while pushing it to the left to rotate the left hinge pin out of its locating cavity To Reinstall 1 Insert the left side of the door into position first and then rotate the right side down to snap the hinge pins into position 2 Reconnect the support struts to the chassis Figure 6 13 Diverter Door Assembly 6 28 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 14 Door Assembly Right Lower 1 Remove the back cover assembly see Figure 6 4 2 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3 3 Open the Right Lower Door and release th
259. rint process to work The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the Main Drive assembly To verify whether the drum is rotating 1 Open thetop cover 2 Removethe toner cartridge 3 Mark the cartridge s drive gear with a felt tipped marker Note the position of the mark 4 Install the toner cartridge and dose the top cover The start up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark 5 Open theprinter and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3 Verify that the mark moved If the mark did not move inspect the Main Drive assembly to ensure that it is meshing with the toner cartridge gears If the drive gears appear functional and the drum does not move replace the toner cartridge This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges have been used 7 715 BullooyusajqnolL L High Voltage Power Supply Check The High Voltage Power Supply PCA provides the necessary voltages for the electrophotographic processes A method for verifying the high voltage system is given below Toner cartridge connection points Visually inspect the four connection points on the inside right end of the toner cartridge If they are dirty or corroded clean the connections Clean using alcohol only If damaged replace the toner cartridge High voltage contacts Thehigh voltage HVPS contact springs mount on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude through the toner cartridge cavity to contact the toner cartridge Ver
260. rinted paper or torn worn or irregular paper Check the media specifications if outside of the recommended specifications problems may occur Printer may be dirty Clean the printer as described in the first section of this chapter Check that paper loaded in Tray 1 is NOT longer than 17 7 in 450 mm or wider than 11 7 in 297 mm These are the maximum dimensions that the printer can feed otherwise the printer will jam Ensure that Tray 4 is set for the size of paper installed and that the tray is not overloaded with paper Laser et 55i HM supports 20 53 b bond paper from trays 2 3 and 4 The Laser et 5Si HM also supports index paper up to 110 Ib index media from Trays 2 3 and 4 When using 16 b media the fusing mode can only be STD PAPER Otherwise overheating of media will cause performance issues such as paper jams 7 79 Dunoouse qnoJ L 7 80 General Troubleshooting Information Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions The following lists symtoms and typical solutions to those problems Abnormal noises are evident grinding or chattering when main motor energized From EP Area 1 Replace Toner Cartridge 2 Replace Main Gear Assembly From Tray 2 or 3 1 Verify proper paper loading acceptable media 2 Inspect fingers on paper trays to assure proper paper size detection 3 Replace Paper Input Unit 4 Replace Main Gear Assembly From 2000 Sheet F eeder 1 Check white plastic bushing on Tray 4 Th
261. rinter Control Panel Messages continued Message Description Recommended Action Message HP MIO 2 NOT READY Status The lower MIO card is not ready One of two The problem may be a bad MIO situations may occur First the parallel port card bad cable or connection on and the upper MIO card may continue to the network or a network operate nominally If the lower MIO card is problem For more information operating correctly and communicating with about the MIO card refer to your the network this message will disappear network documentation Verify after approximately one minute No action is that the product numbers for the required Second if the lower MIO card is MIO card is supported by printer unable to communicate with the network this message will display for five minutes and then disappear In this case the printer is not communicating with the network even though the message is no longer displayed INPUT DEVICE FEED Attendance An external input device such as the Check feed path covers and PATH OPEN Required 2000 Sheet Input Tray Tray 4 is disrupting doors on external input device s the paper path The opening and closing of Check PS35 on the vertical the Tray 4 Vertical Transfer Door should transfer assembly cause this message to be displayed the closed door blocks PS35 INPUT OPERATION Attendance An external input device has a condition that Check the indicated input device CONDITION xx 1y Required needs
262. rinter Covers and Doors 8 11 Printer Internal Components 10f4 8 13 Printer Internal Components 20f4 8 15 Printer Internal Components 3of 4 8 17 Printer Internal Components 40f4 8 19 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components 3 21 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components 8 23 MBM MwS Components 10f3 8 25 MBM MwS Components 203 8 27 MBM MwS Components 3 of 3 aa 8 29 Stapling Unit Internal Components 8 31 Alphabetical Parts List A 2 Numerical Parts Index A 11 Novell NetWare Frame Types on an Ethernet Card B 7 Product Information Chapter Contents Printer Features ee lens 1 3 Paper Capacities andSizes leen 1 4 M aia a a e RA ee 1 4 Duc ZA aaa EA AAA 1 5 J a ee sas Aa 1 6 Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit 1 6 Identification llenos 1 7 Model and Serial Numbers 1 7 Spedfications 1 8 Media Selection Guidelines 1 11 PODS P erreta 1 11 Envelopes 1 11 AdhesiveLabels cres 1 12 Transparendes ll s e o oes 1 12 Storing Print Media ee 1 13 Shipping Print Media aoaaa a 1 13 Product Overview ll eon 1 14 External View of HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX NX and M
263. riveGear 6 97 MBM MwS Transport Belt Encoder 6 97 MBM MwS BinRemoval 6 98 MBM MwS PCA Removal 6 99 MBM Mws Anti Curl String Lower Connection 6 100 MBM Mws Anti Curl String Upper Connection 6 101 MBM M wS Anti Curl String Middle Connection 6 101 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 102 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 103 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 104 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 105 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 106 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 106 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 107 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 108 Figure 6 99 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 Figure 7 36 Figure 7 37 Figure 7 38 Figure 7 39 Figure 7 40 Figure 8 1a Figure 8 1b Figure 8 2 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 6 109 HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier Troubleshooting Process
264. ror occurred x Hardware Type 0 ROM 1 RAM y Hardware Device 0 Internal Memory 1 SIMM Slot 1 4 SIMM Slot 4 zz Error Number Unsupported memory Unrecognized memory Unsupported memory size Failed RAM test Exceeded maximum RAM size Exceeded maximum ROM size Invalid SIMM speed SIMM RAM parity error Not used 10 SIMM address conflict 11 ROM out of bounds 00 Y0O00d2o0n CO 12 Could not make temporary mapping A malfunction occurred in the duplexer SIMM reporting information incorrectly Recommended Action Press Select to resume operation NOTE If the printer is set to AUTO CONTINUE ON the printer will automatically continue printing when this error occurs If error persists reseat or replace cables from the DC Controller to the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the DC Controller PCA Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the error continues reseat or replace cables from the DC Controller to the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly Replace the DC Controller PCA Make sure the SIMM is installed correctly Verify all memory SIMMs are HP products or remove non HP memory and retry Problems caused by non HP products are NOT covered by this product s warranty or any applicable maintenance contract Replace the SIMM that caused the error NOTE If no replacement SIMM is available press Sel
265. rs General Timing Diagram 1 of 2 for LJ 5Si 5Si MX General Timing Diagram 2 of 2 for LJ 5Si 5Si MX Phillips vs Posidrivscrewdrivers Control Panel amp s oom mo ko m mom om B n ROG X mmo odes Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 AC Access Cover Back Cover Front Cover 1 of 2 Front Cover 2 of 2 Left Lower Cover Top Cover 1 of 2 Top Cover 2 of 2 Delivery Unit 1 of 2 Delivery Unit 2 of 2 Diverter Assembly Diverter Door Assembly Right Lower Door Assembly 1 of 3 Right Lower Door Assembly 2 of 3 Right Lower Door Assembly 3 of 3 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 1 of 2 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 2 of 2 Fan 2 LVPS Fan 3 Formatter Fan 4 Delivery Unit Feeder Assembly 1 of 2 Feeder Assembly 2 of 2 Formatter Assembly Fusing Assembly Laser Scanner Assembly Main Gear Assembly 1 of 3 Main Gear Assembly 2 of 3 Main Ge
266. sed and re evaluate the paper curl results 7 85 Dunoouse qnoJ L 7 80 Diagrams This section contains the following diagrams Printer Sensors and Switches Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids DC Controller nputs and Outputs 5 sheets Main Wiring Diagram 1 sheet fold out 2000 Sheet nput Unit Controller PCA Inputs 2000 Sheet nput Unit Controller PCA Outputs 2000 Sheet nput Unit Main Wiring Diagrams Multi Bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram Mailbox with Stapler Main Wiring Diagram DC Controller PCA Pick up PCA y AS QV CS d VPs1302 vV Switch Sensor PCA SW1401 TE ae bs SW1601 1 Sie eresrirstevubime T4 Sy PS1202 Sw1602 7 SW1603L 7 V 7 PS1205 SW16041_ Xx 7 PS1206 M Rx eem dis sea O Q sw16017 m SW16020 PS1201 Se eee PS1203 iliam PS1204 FACE DOWN TRAY DELIVERY SENSE signal FDOUTS FACE DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL SENSE signal FDDULS FUSING UNIT DELIVERY SENSE signal FPOUTS TRAY 2 PAPER SIZE SENSE signal TRAY 3 PAPER SIZE SENSE signal TRAY 3 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 1 LVPS1 TRAY 3 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 2 LVPS2 TRAY 3 SENSE signal LDECKC TRAY 3 PAPER OUT SENSE signal LDECKS PS1 Registration paper sensor PS2 Pick up unit paper sensor PS1201 Tray 3 present sensor PS1202 Tray 2 present sensor PS1203 Tray 3 paper level sensor 1 PS1204 Tray 3 paper level sensor 2 PS1205 Tray 2 paper level se
267. service message To select a menu item 1 Press Menus repeatedly until the desired menu appears 2 Press tems repeatedly until the desired item appears 3 Press repeatedly or hold down to scroll until the desired setting appears 4 Press Select to save the selection An asterisk appears next to the selection indicating that it is now the default 5 Press Menus or On Line to exit the menus 3 10 Operating Overview Note Shaded items appear only if the associated option or function is activated Table 3 5 Control Panel Menu Map TRAY JOB CONTROL TEST CONFIGURATION PRINT QUALITY MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE CANCEL JOB PCL SERVICE MESSAGE ECONOMODE CONFIGURATION PAGE ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE PRESS SELECT POSTSCRIPT 2 SIDED DUPLEX RESOLUTION TO FORMFEED CONFIGURATION PAGE TRAY 1 TYPE PCL FONT LIST BINDING RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT TRAY 1 SIZE POSTSCRIPT FONT LIST PAPER DESTINATION PRINT DENSITY CEC E CECI onewmon ET pane ewomass eowenswecks sra men meae IE CICERO ETA CTN A armenios mocowmu Jaen Y rest resounce swe eosmooc OO ooo osoo po fo stscriptiveory caro stocks LLL ETT o o do AS 0f POSTSCRIPT l O MENU SERVICE MODE MENU MENU Lewmcoem qemexr fro e O e o A ee YA TT les AAA OT Ts PCL MENU See Table 3 11 SOURCE Only shown on menu map for HP LaserJet 5Si HM Operating Overview 3 11
268. signal FEDBND 1 l 24VA 9 Trays 2 3 aoe feed solenoid PUPSLD L to lower the arm 1 SL1 AH 1 F lutch eed clutc FEEDCLD L to turn the feed roller ai Figure 7 33 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 4 of 5 7 92 Troubleshooting Lifting plate solenoid Manual feed clutch Face up solenoid Fusing unit switch Figure 7 34 J51 3 J10 3 TB101 4 4 6 E 1 2 J50 3 Fusing main heater J52 1 Fusing sub heater J1302 2 SL2 1J1301 5 J214 5 I l i J1303 2 1 oo Switch Sensor PCA J1402 2 11 1 J1401 13 J205 10 i 24VA MPTSLD MTPCLD 24VA FUSLD RLD FSRDIE FSRCT1 FSRD1 FSRD1R FSRD2E FSRCT2 FSRD2 FSRD2R RLDSNS PSTYP REMT24 FSRTYP1 FSRTYP2 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 5 of 5 DC Controller PCA L to raise the lifting plate L to rotate the manual feeding pick up roller L to deliver printed paper with face up L to turn the relay off and cut power to the fixing heater Fusing main heater drive signal pulse L when the current transformer detects a failure in the main heater For 200 V model only When the FSRDIE signal is output and this signal is L the main heater turns on For 200 V model only When the FSRDIE signal is output and this signal is L the main heater turns on Fusing sub heater drive signal pulse L whe
269. ss see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 4 Bad transparencies Transparencies can have Turn EconoMode OFF Use Hewlett Packard this problem because they are not designed for approved transparencies see HP LaserJet proper toner adhesion Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 5 Bad Transfer Roller If the Transfer Roller has Turn EconoMode OFF Clean the Transfer Roller finger oils on its surface is dirty or is worn out using a dry lint free cloth DO NOT touch the this problem can result Transfer Roller with your fingers If the problem persists replace the Transfer Roller Assembly Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly 6 Bad Laser Scanner Assembly Table 7 16 Faulty Registration Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Overloaded paper tray If the tray is overloaded Reload proper amount of paper squarely in the the Pickup Rollers may not pick correctly tray Review paper loading with the customer 7 70 2 Paper guide on the paper tray is incorrectly adjusted If the guide is pushing too tightly against the paper it may be delayed in being pulled into the printer If the guide is too loose it may cause image skewing 3 Paper does not meet specs The surface of the paper may be too smooth for the Pickup and Feed Rollers to correctly feed paper into the printer 4 Worn or broken drive gears If any gear within the drive train or paper path becomes excessively worn or dirty erratic
270. ss described above Printing from Tray 4 2000 Sheet Input Unit Tray 4 feeds the paper upward through a guide slot in the Lower Right Door Assembly to the Paper Input Unit Oncethere the operation is the same as printing from Trays 2 and 3 Two Sided Printing The Duplex Unit mounts inside the printer below the F using Assembly The back side of the paper is printed first the paper is turned over and then fed back to the Registration Assembly for front side printing When the print job calls for 2 sided printing a solenoid in the Duplex Unit operates the duplex flipper in the Diverter Assembly and routes the paper tothe Duplex Unit The paper does not exit the printer when being turned over for 2 sided printing It is routed through a slot in the back of the Duplex Unit down inside the left cover and under Tray 3 When the Duplex Unit senses the trailing edge of the paper it reverses direction and feeds the paper back through the Duplex Unit to the Registration Assembly Functional Overview 5 39 G M9IAI9AQ euonouny Paper J am Detection The PIU Sensor PS2 the Registration Sensor PS1 the Fuser Delivery Sensor PS1403 and the F ace Down Delivery Sensor PS1402 detect when paper is moving through the printer see Figure 5 15 for sensor locations If a paper jam is detected the DC Controller immediately stops the printing process and causes a 13 x PAPER J AM message to be displayed on the control panel If a paper ja
271. ssembly 6 70 lay 4 Paper Tray s amp i Seek amp Baw aoe A RE 6 71 Tray 4 PCAController 6 72 Tray 4 Pickup Assembly 6 73 Tray 4 Pickup Assembly Photosensors 6 74 Tray 4 Power Supply 6 75 Tray 4 Rollers Pickup Feed and Separation 6 76 Tray 4 Switch Assemblies ls 6 77 Tray 4 Transfer Assembly ae 6 79 Multi Bin MailBox Mailbox with Stapler Covers 6 80 MBM MwS Delivery Head Ribbon Cable 6 81 MBM MwS Delivery Head Mounting Screws 6 82 MBM MwS Delivery Head Pulley Detail 6 82 MBM MwS Flipper Assembly Connector 6 83 MBM M wS Flipper Assembly Mounting Screws 6 84 MBM M wS Flipper Assembly Ground Wire 6 84 MBM MwS Input Paper Guide 6 85 MBM MwsS Interlock Switch 6 86 MBM MwS JamAcceess Door Springs 6 88 MBM MwsS J am Access Door E Clip 6 88 MBM MwsS J am Access Door String Connection 6 89 MBM MwS Elevator Pulley Tension Spring 6 91 MBM MwS Pulley Housing Release 6 91 MBM MwS Metallic Tape Retaining PIN 6 93 MBM MwS Metallic Tape Release 6 93 MBM MwS MetallicTapeHousing 6 94 MBM MwS Delivery Head Motor 6 95 MBM MwS Transport Belt Motor Screws 6 96 MBM MwS Transport Belt D
272. stapler completes its arms hold the rear edge of the paper stack in power on sequence see Error position during the stapling process The Log Message 13 11 03 sliders help remove paper from the stapling Determine if the wire bail on the bed during the eject cycle During the stapler s output paper path is not power on sequence the motion of the sliders installed upside down The is highly visible since they extend and return stapler s sliders should not hit the to their start position Motor M3 and the bail Check the stapling bed PSSlider photosensor control the motion of assembly which includes the the slider arms refer to Figure 5 21 sliders and cables If the sliders are stuck or the cables are damaged replace the entire stapler 13 12 PAPER JAM A retainer jam occurred The retainer is a To clear the retainer jam rotating shaft containing two flexible rubber Remove the stapling assembly fingers and is located in the front upper Inspect the retainer fingers to portion of the stapling assembly The retainer determine if anything is fingers rotate up as the stapling bed receives preventing them from rotating paper from the head assembly of the Remove any obstructions that Multi Bin Mailbox Once paper is in the may be present Remove the stapling bed the retainer arms rotate stapling assembly s back plate counterclockwise to hold the back edge of refer to Figures 6 88 and 6 89 the paper against the rear wall of the stapl
273. stem successfully Describes how to determine if the printer is communicating properly with the host system Will the printer print from all sources to all destinations and have all of the errors in the errorlog been addressed Contains procedures for verifying the overall printer system operation Contains detailed reference material such as the complete error code list system schematics a list of miscellaneous problems and solutions and a list of all system sensors and their functions Troubleshooting 7 3 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Figure 7 1 Power On Is the printer on and displaying a readable message Power On Checks B After control panel display becomes functional Go to Step 2 HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier Troubleshooting Process 7 4 Troubleshooting Does the display indicate any of the following READY OFFLINE POWER SAVE A Show Error Log to display information on Current Error and correct it B After correcting all messages and errors Go to Step 3 Configuration Will it print Configuration Pages A Show Error Log to display information on Current Error and correct it B Verify information on PCL Configuration Page C After verifying configuration pages Go to Step 4 Image Quality Does the print quality meet customer requirements A Compare configuration pages to samples B After meeting print quality requirements
274. supported configuration this should be the Multi Bin MailBox The known individual error log messages are documened in this Reference Table in numerical order refer to the error log column of this table Table 7 5 Message 13 x PAPER JAM Continued 13 11 PAPER JAM Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description Stapler Assembly Errors 13 FUSER ACCORDION JAM 14 PRINTER COULD NOT AUTO EJECT PAPER A paper jam occurred at the Vertical Transfer Assembly entrance Paper did not reach entry sensor PS31 on time If the feed rollers are not working properly the paper will not advance or it will arrive at sensor PS32 late see Figure 7 14 Recommended Action This group of errors are related to the third device on in the C Link daisy chain see Figure 7 6 in the supported configuration this should be the Staple Assembly The known individual error log messages are documened in this Reference Table in numerical order refer to the errorlog column of this table Fusing Assembly related paper jams Inspect paper path before and after the Fusing Assembly Inspect entire paper path for paper or debris refer to Figure 7 16 Verify that PS31 and PS32 sensor flags are not blocked and that the sensors are free of dust and debris Using the Paper Path Test initiate a print job using Tray 4 as the paper input source Open the Transfer Door then override PS35 refer to Figure 7 15 Ensure th
275. t Verify the driver revision is the most current Y ou may find the most current driver in various electronic locations Check with HP Service and Support 7 83 Dunoouse qnoJ L Note 7 84 If the paper path test works it may be a software or user related issue Perform the following steps 1 Define the media types which are loaded in each paper tray This can be done from either J etAdmin or the front control panel of the printer From J etAdmin Select the Trays tab Select the correct media type for each tray listed e Click on OK save your changes and exit J etAdmin From Control Panel Scroll tothe TRAY MENU o Presstheltem button to select a specific tray Press until you get to the correct type of media o Press the Select button Repeat this step for each paper tray o PresstheONLINE key 2 From inside your application choose the page setup option for that application 3 Select the paper source type option 4 Select the correct media source type for the first page 5 Select the correct media source type for all other pages You must have the 5Si printer selected in your application in order for your application to provide you with the correct paper tray media type selections Caution Table 7 23 Do not make changes to the driver unless the application does not provide this option Print job settings selected through your application always override settings made through theprinter
276. t 420 MB Disk Right Mounting Bracket 5 Bin Mailbox for Stapler AC Access Cover Adjustable Size Plate Back Adjustable Size Plate Middle Adjustable Size Plate Front Adjustable Tip Feet Anti Curl String Anti Curl String Spring Attachment Beam Assembly Attachment Bracket Attachment Clips in kit BD Cable 8 pak Bin Individual Blind Cover only with 8 bin MBM Block Shaft Holding Front Block Shaft Holding Rear Brushes ing Plastic Cable Assembly A 2 Parts Index Bean Fo re C3766 69515 jer77e6 0000N ea crees 89 creme e gt Cares 0587 9 COCA CT ETC TT Cares osos 12 RB1 7834 000CN 807 07 07 08 10 10 09 07 12 09 09 07 Table A 1 Alphabetical Parts List continued Cab Hole Edge O frases S eu 9 C C2 N O ia O O al R C1 al J 3 J OJo w amp SI N olo R S olo oe Ro ala A gt olo J ssette Size Labels Size Plate p Q w or gt 212 co co SIR SIs OIO 0 10 S 2 OIOIOIOTIOIO S BEIE E E 218 ololo os oO o 2 2 2 eee o 8 S 9 p ees E 5 Lja ja o 2lol5 O ei3 lt O S gt I 0 0 o l g9 o olele D ololo 2 S o o 9 lol 2 Dici jojo Vit liz oluj a gt Ol u lo gt JJ U e Co oO mnl e e e O Z C Link Cable Assembly 178 cm HCI to MBM C Link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to HCI C Link Cable Assembly 97 cm MBM to Stapler
277. t PCL configuration pages to verify all devices are shown in printout See Figure 7 5 Check the indicated output device and correct its condition Check 2 Multi Bin Mailbox 3 Stapler C Link Cables for proper connection For the Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler ensure that the Face Up Bin is properly installed yy condition code For the Multi Bin Mailbox 01 Face Up bin not installed PAPER DESTINATION Status The printer will output paper to all available No action required ALL BINS bins PERFORM USER The printer requires a formal maintenance Perform the required MAINTENANCE procedure maintenance in accordance with chapter 4 Access the Configuration Menu and select SERVICE MESSAGE OFFE PRESS SELECT TO CANCEL JOB This message displays to confirm that you canceled the currently active job Press Select to cancel a print job This may take up to 5 minutes to cancel the print job Press any other key to continue PRINTING Status This message displays while the printer No action required CONFIGURATION PAGE prints the configuration pages PRINTING DEMO PAGE Status This message displays while the printer No action required prints a demo page PRINTING DISK Status This message displays while the printer No action required DIRECTORY prints an optional disk accessory directory PRINTING ERROR LOG Status This message displays while the printer No action required prints the error log PRINTING F
278. t an authorized HP dealer or an HP Customer Service Center Service After the Warranty Period If your hardware fails after the warranty period contact an authorized HP dealer or your local Customer Service Center If you have an HP Maintenance Agreement request service under your agreement 1 28 Product Information Site Requirements Chapter Contents Operating Environment TTL 2 3 Space Requirements 2 2 2 5 2 4 Environmental Requirements 0 a a a 2 4 Site Requirements 2 1 2 2 Site Requirements Operating Environment The electrical specifications listed in Chapter 1 must be maintained to ensure proper operation of this printer Consider the following points before installing the printer Install in a well ventilated dust free area Install on a hard flat and continuous surface with all four printer feet level Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces Ensure adequate power is supplied Printer power requirements are listed under Specifications in Chapter 1 Install wherethereis stable temperature and humidity away from water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances see T able 2 1 Install away from direct sunlight open flames or ammonia fumes If the printer is placed near a window make sure the window has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight Install with enough space around the printer for proper access
279. t job starts Table 3 9 listing the Configuration Menu items is located on the following page Operating Overview 3 15 e MINIMO Bunerado Table 3 9 Configuration Menu Items Configuration Menu Item Choices Action Required Items SERVI CE MESSAGE Displayed only after approx 350 000 250 000 for HP LaserJet 5Si Heavy Media printers images and only when PERFORM USER MAI NTENANCE message is displayed Set to OFF after performing maintenance to turn off PERFORM USER MAI NTENANCE message Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice 2 SI DED ON Displayed only if duplex option is installed UTE Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice BI NDI NG LONG EDGE Displayed only if duplex option is installed and only if SHORT EDGE 2 sided printing is enabled 0N Places top of backside image the same as the front LONG EDGE or at opposite end SHORT EDGE Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice PAPER DESTINATI ON TOP OUTPUT BIN Press to display choice LEFT OUTPUT BIN Press Select to activate choice OPTIONAL OUTPUT BIN OPTIONAL OUTPUT BIN ORI ENTATI ON PORTRAIT Press to display choice LANDSCAPE Press Select to activate choice l n POWER SAVE DELAY 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 3 HOURS Press to display choice OFF Press Select to activate choice 10 SECONDS SERVI CE MODE ONLY 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES PERSONALI TY Press to display c
280. t the retaining springs and the tape retainer are properly positioned as you insert the shaft into the frame Make sure that the retaining springs e clip and copper grounding plate are properly replaced on the shaft in the same position in which they were removed Removal and Replacement 6 87 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door E Clip Note Figure 6 76 with callout 3 is on the following page 6 88 Removal and Replacement Figure 6 76 Ki Hn j p A JL i a a J L NE eE AS A EM E Ae 2 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door String Connection Removal and Replacement 6 89 9 jueuieooejdey pue ernouiay Lower Elevator Pulley Assemblies 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 2 Fromthe front of theunit disconnect 2 tension springs Figure 6 77 callout 1 3 From the back of the unit release 2 lower pulley assemblies by pushing down on the assembly and then pushing it forward Figure 6 78 callout 2 Note that the protrusion on the side of the pulley housing is positioned toward the outside of the frame 4 Releasethe elevator belt from the pulley assembly by pushing downward on the pulley until the pulley shaft falls free Notethat the flattened end of the pulley shaft is positioned toward the outside of the frame To Reinstall 1 Make su
281. tches Print Engine Only 7 87 Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids 7 88 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs lof5 7 89 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 20f5 7 90 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 3 of 5 7 91 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs A4of 5 7 92 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 50f5 7 93 Printer Main Wiring Diagram 7 94 2000 Sheet Input Unit Controller PCA Inputs 7 95 2000 Sheet Input Unit Controller PCA Outputs 7 96 2000 Sheet input Unit Main Wiring Diagram 7 97 Multi Bin Mailbox Main WiringDiagram 7 98 Stapling Unit Controller PCA Main Wiring Diagram 7 99 LJ 5Si Family Printer and Paper Handling Components 8 6 LJ 5Si Mopier Family and Paper Handling Components 8 7 Printer Covers and Doors 8 10 viii Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure B 1 Figure B 2 Figure B 3 Figure B 4 Figure B 5 Figure C 1 Printer Internal Components 10f4 8 12 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 8 14 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 8 16 Printer Internal Components 4 0f 4 8 18 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components 8 20 2000 Sheet Input Unit Internal Components 8 22 Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Components 10f3
282. terial Safety Data Sheet MSDS for toner or any other chemical used in the printer is available through Hewlett Packard s Customer Information Center by either mail or fax By mail To obtain an MSDS for the HP C3909A toner cartridges through the mail call the Customer Information Center CI C at 1 800 752 0900 U S Only between 6 A M and 5 P M Pacific Standard Time By fax To obtain an MSDS for the HP C3909A toner cartridges by fax call HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program at 1 800 333 1917 U S Only and follow the instructions for using the HP FIRST fax service See Technical Assistance in chapter one for more information on the HP FIRST service Ozone E mission These printers do not use high voltage corona wires in the electrophotographic process and therefore generate no measurable ozone gas O3 The printers instead use charging rollers in the toner cartridge and in the print engine Regulatory Information C 3 J uoneunojul toje nboy Note Figure C 1 FCC Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio
283. test diagnostic which bypasses the F ormatter PCA and then prints a full page of black parallel lines This test is useful for troubleshooting printer problems because it isolates the print engine from the Formatter PCA The enginetest printout prints from Tray 3 and can be activated with the F ormatter PCA removed For more information see EngineTest in Chapter 7 Motors Refer to the General Timing Diagram Figure 5 22 at the end of this chapter for specific timing details for the printer motors TheMain Motor MT1is controlled by the DC Controller PCA TheMain Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during the Initial Rotation period following power ON the Print period the Last Rotation Period or whenever the printer front door is opened and closed The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the DC Controller It rotates the scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period and the Print period TheFan Motors are controlled and monitored by the DC Controller PCA All four fans operate at full speed during the printing modes All four fans turn off in the PowerSave mode after the F user cools down The drive signal for the Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pick up Motor SMT 1 is provided by the DC Controller PCA through the PIU PCA mounted on the right side of the Paper Input Unit PIU When the job instructions call for paper to be supplied by Tray 2 SMT1 rotates in a forward direction and drives the Pick Up roller for Tray 2 Wh
284. th Stapler Toner Cartridge Maintenance Kit 100 120V Maintenance Kit 100 120V Maintenance Kit 220 240V Maintenance Kit 220 240V O C OIO w amp c N ol orn gt i gt ik oO l o Co ho ho po C C2 do N I O co e O not shown not shown not shown not shown OJO OLO I c51 c C O10101 IW N N N NINNIN 2 olPlol P O O O O no bh 3 Way Power Adapter not shown JJ o D gt o P o e e O Z Sensor Arm Spring Block Shaft Holding Front Block Shaft Holding Rear Sensor Arm PS1 dl Dra ole eic RB1 6414 000CN JJ o um a o e e O Z N Transfer Guide Bushing Damper Holder Front a 8 03 8 03 Cover Left Lower Special Order 8 02 8 02 Damper Holder Rear RB1 6468 000CN Clutch Cover RB1 6484 000CN Oo N U Open Close Stopper JJ VDividivd ojo mw o oOlo ololo IN BRIRIRIE Co oOloiri c e a al oO olololo e olelele e oeoleliele O OOOO Z ZIZIZI Z o D oo T olo ele elio OJO Z RB1 AC Access Cover 8 02 RB1 6490 N Face Up Bin Special Order 8 02 RB1 6492 000CN Cover Switch Special Order 8 02 A 14 Parts Index Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued Pickup Roller 53 Left Access Door Struts 02 I z Plate Shield Formatter Shield Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 not shown Adjustable Size Plate Back 67 DiDiDi vai nai nai vai D TI OW D1 OW DW DO Oy T SEKE Kaa Kaa Kaa Kaa Kai Ka D RA a
285. th Tray 1 Open 1 Face Up Bin 2 Control Panel 3 Face Down Bin 4 Adjustable Paper Stop 5 Toner Cartridge Access Door 6 Tray 1 7 Tray 1 Extensions 8 Tray 1 Paper Width Guides 9 Input Slot for 2000 Sheet Input Tray 4 10 Tray 1 Pickup Roller 11 Tray 2 12 Tray 3 13 ON OFF Switch 14 Front Access Door 1 14 Product Information Figure 1 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 External View of HP Laser et 5Si Mopier Uu wu u HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open L eft Output Bin Control Panel Top Output Bin Adjustable paper stop Top cover Envelope F eeder optional Tray 1 multi purpose Tray 1 extensions Tray 1 paper width guides Front door Tray 2 HP 2000 Sheet Input Tray Tray 4 Tray 3 Mailbox with Stapler On Off switch Duplexing Unit internal Stapler Unit Product Information 1 15 L uoneunoju 19NPOId Formatter Assemblies Figure 1 4 Rear and Left Side View 1 Formatter Printed Circuit Assembly Hard Disk Accessory Location optional for LJ 5Si bSi MX 5Si NX and standard for LJ 5Si Mopier and Mopier Engine MIO Card 1 Location Parallel IEEE 1284 Interface Port MIO Card 2 Location External Paper Handling Controller Board Location SIMM Slots AC Power Connector Model and Serial Number L abel N o o JO U RU 1 16 Product Information Figure 1 5 DU N EP Accessories and Options The accessories and optional equipment for th
286. the Transfer Assembly see Figure 6 64 2 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 53 and the right cover see Figure 6 55 3 Unplug 2 connectors Figure 6 56 callout 1 4 Remove 4 screws CH 108 Figure 6 56 callout 2 and pull the assembly straight out of the chassis Figure 6 56 Tray 4 Main Drive Assembly 6 70 Removal and Replacement Paper Tray 1 Remove all unused paper from the tray 2 Removethe Transfer Assembly see Figure 6 64 3 Remove the left cover see Figure 6 54 and the right cover see Figure 6 55 4 Remove 1 screw CH 108 Figure 6 57 callout 1 and the metal retaining tab from each side of the chassis Caution Support the rear of the tray when removing it 5 Slidethetray straight out of the chassis Figure 6 57 Tray 4 Paper Tray Note If the print starts too close to the edge of the paper see Tray 4 Adjustment Procedure in Chapter 4 to adjust the paper Removal and Replacement 6 71 9 jueuieoejdey pue eno0uay PCA Controller 1 Remove the back cover see Figure 6 53 and the left cover see Figure 6 54 2 Unplug 8 connectors from the PCA Figure 6 58 callout 1 3 Remove 2 screws CH 108 Figure 6 58 callout 2 4 Release 2 plastic retaining posts Figure 6 58 callout 3 and pull the PCA free of the chassis To Reinstall Make surethat the PCA is firmly locked onto the plastic retaining posts Figure 6 58 Tray 4 PCA Controller 6 72 Removal and Repla
287. the printer OFF and unplugged loosen 2 captive screws and remove the Formatter Assembly Remove MIO card No 1 if installed 3 Placethe Formatter Assembly face down on a level surface There are 2 small latches and 2 largelatches Push the 2 small latches through the holes to unlatch the drive 4 FliptheFormatter Assembly over unlatch the ribbon cable and remove the drive 6 8 Removal and Replacement To Reinstall Disk Drive Locate the four disk drive mounting holes on the Formatter Assembly Remove the drive from the packaging and align with to the mounting holes Tilt the drive up and insert latch A nearest the board edge in the hole then slide the drive toward the center of the formatter board Push down firmly on the cover of the disk drive nearest the cable until the latch B dicks into position Carefully align the cable to connector 3 on the Formatter board and press firmly into place Reinstall the Formatter Assembly reconnect the cables and print a Disk Directory Page from the Control Panel Test Menu to verify proper installation Removal and Replacement 6 9 9 juau99e doy pue eno0uay Duplex Unit 1 With the printer turned OFF and unplugged open the Diverter door on the left side of the printer 2 Push down the green release lever located at the lower right of the Duplex Unit and slide it straight out of the printer 6 10 Removal and Replacement Envelope Feeder
288. treaked photosensitive drum Clean printer AaBbcc see Chapter 4 and replace cartridge AaBbCc 3 Fusing Assembly is contaminated or Inspect the Fusing Assembly for toner build up AQBoC damaged or scratches on the fuser rollers Try cleaning aBbCc with alcohol Replace the Fusing Assembly if damaged 4 Static Eliminator Strip teeth are contaminated Clean using compressed air or defective 5 Repetitive defect If the lines are repeated at Refer to the Repetitive Image Defect Ruler a consistent interval down the page this is a Figure 7 25 repetitive defect 7 67 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 11 MaABoCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Table 7 12 7 68 Toner Smear Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Paper does not meet specs The moisture Try a different paper lot or other media see HP content conductivity or surface finish of the media LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications being printed may not work correctly with the Guide electrophotographic process 2 Dirty Fusing Rollers Toner build up can cause Remove and inspect the Fusing Assembly for the print on a page to smear excessive toner build up Clean using alcohol 3 The Static Eliminator Strip is dirty or is not Clean the Anti Static Brush Use compressed air grounded allowing a static charge to remain on to clean the page 4 Fusing Assembly is defective The print will Replace the Fusing Assembly smear if the Fusing
289. troubleshooting checks and tools 8 Parts and Diagrams Contains exploded view drawings and part number listings for all replaceable parts in the printer 2000 Sheet Input Unit Multi Bin Mailbox and Mailbox with Stapler A Parts Index Contains two replaceable parts tables one sorted alphabetically by part name and one sorted numerically by part number Both tables are cross referenced to the diagrams in Chapter 8 B NO Information Contains basic cabling and configuration information for connecting the printer to supported networks C Regulatory Information Contains required safety and compliance statements Subject Index Contains an alphabetical cross referenced listing of information found in the main body of the manual List of Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 2 1 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Sample Model and Serial Number Labels HP Laser et 5Si 5Si MX NX and Mopier Engine Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open HP Laser et 5Si Mopier Front and Right Side View with Tray1Open
290. ts and the Stapler retainer shaft and wire bail 7 58 Troubleshooting Table 7 5 Message Message 66 2 14 DEVICE ERROR CYCLE POWER Message 66 02 14 67 PRINTER ERROR 68 NVRAM 68 ERROR CHECK CONFIGURATION Printer Control Panel Messages continued Description Multi Bin Mailbox C Link is not responding A miscellaneous interface hardware error occurred The NVRAM has reset or the Formatter firmware has been replaced An NVRAM reset sets some parameters to their default settings For example the page count is set to 0 the S N is set to AAXXYY9999 the MIO Card s configuration and the printer s error log are cleared Reconfigure the MIO cards with HP JetAdmin to work again Non volatile memory NVRAM error occurred Recommended Action Cycle power Print the PCL configuration pages Note which installed devices are NOT present on the configuration pages refer to Figure 7 5 Verify that the C Link Cables are installed correctly Check cable connections for bent pins and reseat connections Check to make sure that the MBM DC Power supply is connected refer to Figure 7 7 Replace the External Paper Handling Controller If problems persist reduce the printer to minimum configuration For example start with the Formatter PCA only and print the PCL configuration pages Then add the External Paper Handling Controller without the cable and print the PCL configuration pages Add the
291. uffer has overflowed An optional disk accessory has failed its self test This error is saved in the error log Recommended Action Press Select to resume printing If AUTO CONTINUE ON the printer will stop printing display the error for 10 seconds then clear the error and resume printing Some data loss may occur Try to simplify the print job If you must print the job as is set PAGEPROTECT 0N from the Configuration Menu Then print the job Reset PAGEPROTECT AUTO otherwise the printer s performance will degrade Press Select to clear the error message Data will be lost If the error continues check for loose cables and use a high quality cable HP C2951A or equivalent NOTE Some non HP parallel cables may be missing pin connections necessary for bi directional communications If the printer is using an I O other than the HP supplied I O refer to the manual for that device Press Select to continue Data will be lost Pressing Select will cancel the current print job at the upper port If a non HP MIO device is installed refer to the manual for that device Press Select to continue Data will be lost Pressing Select will cancel the current print job at the lower port If a non HP MIO device is installed refer to the manual for that device Press Select to continue Inspect the cable connector for the disk drive Replace the disk cable assembly Replace the disk assembly Replace the For
292. uired ready to use REMOVE PAPER FROM Attendance The destination output bin is full and the Remove the paper from the TOP OUTPUT BIN or Required printer will not send anymore pages to that indicated output bin For a REMOVE PAPER FROM bin mailbox with a stapler Check the OPTIONAL OUTPUT BIN n bin full actuator at the bottom of the stapler housing Replace as required Check the stapling bed and cables Replace as required The stapling bed includes cables Replace the entire stapler RESTORING FACTORY This message displays during a COLD No action required SETTINGS RESET All printing environment parameters personality and device defaults return to their factory default settings When it is completed the printer displays On Line or Ready SELECT LANGUAGE Status This message displays after pressing and Press to scroll through the holding Select while powering on the avallable languages Press printer Select to activate the displayed language SERVICE MODE Status This message displays after accessing the To display the Service Mode Service Mode menus press Item Press Online to exit the Service Mode For more information about the Service Mode refer to Chapter 3 SKIP DISK LOAD Status This message displays for approximately one To reset the printer cycle power second after powering on the printer while and do not press and hold Menu pressing and holding Menu Indicates that the disk based system
293. under discussion Bold is used for emphasis particularly in situations whereitalic type would be confusing Italictypeis used to indicate related documents or emphasis Notes contain important information set off from the text Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury Chapter Descriptions 1 Product Information Contains printer features and product overview tray capacities and sizes media specifications service approach and how to get technical assistance 2 SiteRequirements Contains space and environmental requirements 3 Operating Overview Contains details about control panel menus restoring factory defaults and resetting and testing the printer 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Contains cleaning and preventive maintenance information and adjustment procedures for Tray 2 Tray 3 and Tray A 5 Functional Overview Contains block diagrams and basic theory of operation for the printer systems paper paths and paper handling accessories 6 Removal and Replacement Contains step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units FRUS in the printer 2000 Sheet Input Unit Multi Bin Mailbox and the Mailbox with Stapler 7 Troubleshooting Contains a preliminary troubleshooting table a table with descriptions and recommended actions for all control panel messages image defect samples and
294. url Strings are attached to the am Access Door Assembly at the top of the frame routed through small pulleys at the back of the Delivery H ead Assembly and then around pulleys near the bottom of the frame where they are attached to tension springs Remove all of the paper bins and the blind cover see Figure 6 86 Disconnect the Anti Curl String tension springs at the bottom of the frame Figure 6 88 callout 1 and remove the strings from the lower pulleys by snapping them free Figure 6 88 callout 2 Remove both covers see Figure 6 65 Remove the J am Access Door Assembly see Figures 6 74 through 6 76 Disconnect the upper ends of the Anti Curl Strings from the am Access Door Assembly F igure 6 89 callout 3 Remove the Delivery Head Assembly see Figures 6 66 through 6 68 Remove the strings from the pulleys at the back of the Delivery H ead by rotating the flat side of the pulley toward the outside of the frame Figure 6 90 callout 4 Remove the strings from the tension springs Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Lower Connection 6 100 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement 6 101 Stapling Unit Assembly The Stapling Unit Assembly is mounted in the Mailbox with Stapler replacing the three top output bins 1 Turn OFF the printer 2 Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly is not in the stapler area It should be in the bottom portion of the ma
295. vel of warranty service Y ou should contact the local HP Service Center to check for the applicable local warranty in your country or province One Year On Site Limited Warranty Hewlett Packard warrants its computer hardware products against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from purchase by the end user During the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective The warranty period begins ether on the date of delivery or where the purchase price includes installation by Hewlett Packard on the date of installation Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a reasonable amount of time you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price if you return the product To have your printer serviced by HP you should contact the closest HP Service Center Exclusions The warranty on your HP Laser et 5Si family printer shall not apply to defects resulting from Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer Customer supplied software or interfacing Unauthorized modification or misuse Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the produc Operation of non supported printing media Duty cyde abuse maxi mum see the note on the following page Using a mechanical switchbox with the printer without a designated surge protector Improper site preparation and maintenance e Failureto perform key operator maintenance ev
296. vided by the bootp file no other TCP IP configuring is necessary Press to change the value of the BOOTP parameter BOOTP NO appears Press Select to save the selection BOOTP N0 appears If you selected BOOTP N0 then you will be prompted to configure each of the TCP IP parameters Press item to continue configuring P BYTE 1 ALUE appears Press until the value of the first byte of the IP address appears on the control panel display Note that if you Press and hold the value will scroll rapidly Press Select to save the value Press Item to continue Repeat steps 8 and 9 to configure the remaining bytes of the IP address Repeat steps 8 through 10 to configure the subnet mask bytes SM syslog server P address LG default gateway GW and timeout TIMEOUT If no other protocol is enabled Press On Line After completing this guide refer tothe HP J etDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for configuration instructions ON OU BRUN HI Ce Configuring Apple EtherTalk Phase Parameter To configure EtherTalk parameters If you do not want to configure the phase parameter Press On Line Press tem CFG ETALKzNO appears Press CFG ETALK YES appears Press Select CFG ETALK YES appears Press Item Phase 2 appears Press to change the phase parameter Phase 1 appears Press Select to save the new value Phase 1 appears Press On Line You may want t
297. w recognized on the PCL CONFIGURATION PAGES replace 2000 Sheet Input Controller 6 Replace Mailbox Controller 7 Replace Mailbox External Power Supply 8 Replace entire Mailbox Wrinkling Envelopes 1 PlaceFusing Levers in UP position and retry envelopes 2 Try new media Verify Envelopes are within specifications See Laser e Family Paper Specifications Guide Poor Fusing 1 Verify Fusing Levers are in the down position for cut sheet paper 2 Verify DC Controller is Revision 2 6 or greater IC 201 in the middle of the DC Controller should be marked with a 06 for Revision 2 6 DC Controller See Service Note C3166A 06A 3 Try new media Verify Media is within specifications 4 Verify AC power does not fluctuate out of range during print cycle See Table 1 7 See Laserjet Family Paper Specifications Guide Feeds from incorrect tray when selecting different media for first page of job First you must determine if it is a hardware or a software issue Run a paper path test from each paper tray to eliminate the hardware 1 Scroll totheTEST MENU from the Control Panel on the printer 2 Scroll through theTEST MENU tothePAPER PATH TEST 3 Press SELECT 4 Pressthe until it says nput Tray 1 5 Press SELECT twice 6 Repeat these steps for all input trays If paper path test fails troubleshoot the error message Verify the most current HP driver is installed Select the Print Quality Tab from the printer driver Click on Abou
298. with the print engine 2 Not enough memory The page is too complex for standard printer memory 3 Printing on legal size paper from Tray 4 when software is specifying letter size this will also cause paper jams Set Page Protect to ON or AUTO Add printer memory As an alternative simplify the print job Review software selection Ensure that printing is on selected size Table 7 21 AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Table 7 22 Compressed Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Toner cartridge bushings are too tight This Replace the toner cartridge may occur on refilled toner cartridges 2 Broken or worn gear Inspect and replace the worn gear or assembly Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page Tray 4 Input only Possible Cause Recommended Action 1 Bad clutch in vertical transfer door Replace Tray 4 vertical transfer door 2 Bad clutch in paper pickup assembly Replace Tray 4 paper pickup assembly 7 72 First occurence of print defect Registration Roller 44 mm 1 73 in Toner Cartridge Primary Charging Roller 44 4 mm 1 75 in Face Up Delivery Roller 47 mm 1 86 in Toner Cartridge Developing Roller 53 5 mm 2 11 in Transfer Roller 58 4 mm 2 30 in Fuser Lower Roller 94 mm 3 71 in Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm 3 71 in Fuser Upper Roller 125 mm 4 92 in Figure 7 25 Repetitive Defect Ruler 7 73 BullooyusajqnolL Z 7 74 pl I mage S
299. wn C3764 67906 Attachment Beam Assembly 8 09 C3764 69100 Exchange Mailbox 8 Bin 8 01 Exchange Mailbox 8 Bin 8 09 O C not shown not shown not shown Co mb NO C3766 60500 Stapling Unit C3766 60501 Top Cover Assembly 8 12 C3766 60503 Stapling Bed Assembly NO C3766 60505 Back Plate C3766 60506 Hinges Set of C C3766 60509 Stapling Unit Packaging 8 12 C3766 60510 Kit staple cover bin full sensor actuator and flag N C3766 60504 Stapling Unit Control PCA not shown C C 00 h O PO PRP MD FP co O oOolIlolololo oo L o next bin full sensor actuator and flag scan bar C3766 60511 Kit T10 Torx screws 10 8 12 C3766 60512 C Link Cable Assembly 97 cm MBM to Stapler 8 01 not shown not shown 00 n2 O C N D T D D e o 2 Co e Parts Index A 13 Xopu Sued V Table A 2 Numerical Parts Index continued Description 8 12 8 09 8 01 8 09 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 01 8 04D 8 04D 8 04D 8 04D Exchange Stapling Unit not shown Stapling Unit Exchange Exchange Mailbox 5 Bin for Stapler Exchange Mailbox 5 Bin for Stapler not shown olo olo oo Co CO NINI Oo O D1 P D1 D gt Oo o o cO O XO O IOIO A c1 o01 O0O O O C N o ks D Oi e h External Paper Handling Controller PCA O A Mailbox wi
300. y MIO card is HP Recommended Action No action required Refer to the Power On section for more information about performing an engine test No action required When the paper reaches the destination output bin the Ready message displays and the On Line LED returns to a steady state No action required If the message displays after five minutes a problem may exist in the network card the network configuration or with the host For more information about the MIO card refer to your network documentation No action required If the message displays after five minutes a problem may exist in the network card the network configuration or with the host For more information about the MIO card refer to your network documentation The problem may be a bad MIO card bad cable or connection on the network or a network problem For more information about the MIO card refer to your network documentation Verify that the product numbers for the MIO card is supported by printer Recommended action no action needed Allow time to initialize If error continues turn printer off and reseat or move to another MIO slot to test verify cabling is not damaged or defective If error follows MIO card replace Figure 7 13 1 Primary Charging Roller Connector 2 Toner Registration Toner Sensor 3 Developing Roller Bias Connector 4 Drum Ground Connector Troubleshooting 7 27 Dunoousoe qnoJ L Table 7 5 P
301. y choice Press items to select Fusing Press to save selection Asterisk indicates printer default Only with HP LaserJet 5Si Heavy Media printers PostScript Menu Table 3 11 PostScript Menu Items PostScript Menu Items Item Choices Action Required PRINT POSTSCRIPT DS Press to display choice ERRORS ON Press Select to activate choice JAM RECOVERY Bip ns Press to display choice ON Press Select to activate choice Asterisk indicates printer default Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated Operating Overview 3 17 e M9IAI9AQ Dunejiedo PCL Menu Table 3 12 PCL Menu Items SOURCE INTERNAL Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice NUMBER II Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice PTI CH Nad 99 99 110 00 Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice SYM SET MS PUBL Press to display choice MATH 8 Press Select to activate choice PS MATH VN MATH P FONT LEGAL 150 4 FORM INES CORNES T Press to display choice Press Select to activate choice Asterisk indicates printer default Shaded menu items appear only if associated option or function is activated 3 18 Operating Overview I O Menu Caution When changing memory configuration Configuration Menu or 1 0 Buffering the printer will automatically reset All fonts macros and downloaded data except w
302. y result Labels must be arranged on the carrier sheet sothat there are no exposed spaces on the sheet Using label stock with spaces between rows or columns of labels can often result in labels peeling off during printing causing serious jamming and possible printer damage Thetop sheet printing surface must be of copier quality and provide good toner adhesion The carrier sheet backing sheet must be compatible with the temperatures and pressure of the fusing process and must be coated for easy release of the top sheet The adhesive must be stable at the 392 F 200 C temperatures encountered for 0 1 second in the fusing process and must not produce emissions that exceed exposure levels or threshold limits established by OSHA and other safety agencies Adhesives must not come into direct contact with any part of the printer A wide selection of suitablelabels may be ordered through Hewlett Packard Available sizes are listed in the HP Laser el Printer Family Paper Specification Guide Transparencies Tray 1 Multi Purpose is required for printing transparencies Print transparencies to the F ace U p Bin only Overhead transparencies used in HP Laser et printers must be able to withstand the 392 F 200 C temperatures encountered in the printer s fusing process for 0 1 second Suitable transparency film is available through Hewlett Packard Refer to the HP Laser et Printer Family Paper Specification Guide for details
303. ystem Troubleshooting Half Self Test Functional Check The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages Cleaning removing excess toner from drum surface Conditioning placing a uniform electrical charge on drum Writing laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image Development formation of the toner image on drum Transfer charge to transfer the image to paper Fusing heat and pressure to produce a permanent image The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which process is malfunctioning Perform the test as follows Print a PCL Configuration Page from the Control Panel Test Menu Open the top cover after the paper advances half way through the printer about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotation The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge Remove the toner cartridge Open the toner cartridge s drum shield to view the drum s surface If a dark and distinct toner imageis present on the drum s surface assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning cleaning conditioning writing and developing see Chapter 5 and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem If NO imageis present on the photosensitive drum perform the functional checks on the following pages Note Drum Rotation Functional Check The photosensitive drum located in the toner cartridge must rotate for the p

HP LaserJet 5Si Family Printers Service Manual, C4077

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents